Home

H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop 3

1. Function Address Sie Stack Size Times Cvete O Hew Sample Sample at PowerON Reset PC H oooooso0 H 0000002C H oooooooo 0 0 0 0 0 INIT IOLIB H00001170 H 000000B2 H0000000c O 0 0 0 0 See main PUUUUT 200 UUUUUUSO HUUUUUU 50 0 0 fi fi sort H00001340 HO00OOOSS Ho000O0TC 0 0 0 0 0 tand H 00001614 Ho0000002C H 00000004 O 0 0 0 0 l printf H 00001508 H 0000003C H 00000008 O 0 0 0 0 change Ho000013C8 H 00000040 H00000028 O 0 0 0 0 CLOSEALL H 00001222 H 00000074 Ho0000018 O 0 0 0 0 _memmove H O0003EB0 H 00000080 H oooooooe O 0 0 0 0 _fpute Hoo002DAc HO00000DC H 0000000C O 0 0 0 0 _lseek Ho000116C H00000004 H 00000000 O 0 0 0 0 tead Ho00010CGA H 00000054 H0000001IC O 0 0 0 0 Dummy Ho0000848 H 00000004 H00000000 O 0 0 0 0 INT Illegal_code Ho0000844 H 00000004 H oooooooo O 0 0 0 0 _Manual_Reset_PC H o000082C H 00000018 H00000000 O 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 54 Tree Sheet Double clicking a function in the Function column expands or reduces the tree structure display The expansion or reduction is also provided by the or key Double clicking the Address column displays the source program corresponding to the specific address Right clicking on the mouse within the window displays a pop up menu Supported menu options are described in the following e View Source Displays the source program or disassembled memory content
2. Cancel Figure 4 3 Global Editor Column States Dialog Box gt To switch off a column in one source file 1 Right click on the Editor window which contains the column you wish to remove to display the pop up menu 2 Click the Columns menu item to display a cascaded menu item Each column is displayed in this pop up menu If the column is enabled it has a tick mark next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not 214 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 1 3 Debugger Columns The debugging platform can add columns to the Editor window which is called as the debugger column These added columns are referred to as debugger columns The columns that can be added to the Source window differ according to the debugging platform The Coverage column that graphically displays code coverage during debugger execution is an example of the columns that can be added Right clicking on the column displays the respective pop up menu for that column Double clicking on the column has a different effect depending on the column For example in the Editor column this sets a PC breakpoint If you are unsure what purpose a column has or what the information it is displaying place the cursor over the column and a tool tip is displayed 4 1 4 Viewing the Assembly Language Code If you have a source file open right click to open the pop
3. Phase 3 Input Files Phase 3 Output Files N PHASE X gt Phase X Input Files Phase X Output Files Figure 3 1 Build Process The High performance Embedded Workshop provides the ability to change this build process via its Build Phases dialog which can be accessed via the Options gt Build Phases figure 3 2 On the left hand side 41 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual are the phases that are defined in the current project Figure 3 2 shows a standard set of build phases The remainder of this chapter details the various functions that the Build Phases dialog provides Build Phases V JH8S H8 300 C C Library Generator IWJH8S H8 300 C C Compiler MH85 H8 300 Assembler blll HENGE Move wT MOSELEY Figure 3 2 Build Phases Dialog 42 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 2 Creating a Custom Build Phase If you want to execute another tool before during or after a standard build process then this can be achieved by creating your own i e custom build phase Select Options gt Build Phases to invoke the Build Phases dialog figure 3 2 and then click the Add button This will invoke the new build phase wizard dialog figure 3 3a The first step as shown in figure 3 3a asks whether you want to create an entirely new phase or whether you want to add a system p
4. Optimize branches SJ K Use short disp imm Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list a CONFIGDIR PROJECTNAME map optimize speed start zi Figure 4 51 Standard Toolchain Dialog Box 2 To enable the settings in the Include Profile box specify the Optimize list box as some setting other than None 4 12 3 Loading Stack Information Files You can select whether or not to read the stack information file in a message box for confirmation that is displayed when a load module is loaded Clicking the OK button of the message box loads the stack information file The message box for confirmation will be displayed when e There are stack information files extension SNTI e The Load Stack Information Files SNI files check box is checked in the Confirmation sheet of the Options dialog box figure 4 52 that can be opened by choosing Tools gt Options from the main menu 253 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual MDelete Template Lose session changes on refresh Load memory IM Verify memory Test memory Delete All Labels Clear Coverage Data 4 Clear Coverage Data at Closing MSave Coverage at Session Saving Delete PA Range Delete All PA Ranges MDelete All PA Ranges at Loading Load Stack Information Files SNI files Figure 4 52 Options Dialog Box 4 12 4 Enabling the Profile Choose View gt Pe
5. Figure 8 1 Version Control Setup Dialog Commands Tab 122 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Commands tab contains two lists of menu options The first list System menu options and toolbar buttons represents those menu options which always appear on the version control sub menu These menu options also have an associated toolbar button on the version control toolbar The second list User menu options represents those additional user defined options which are added to the bottom of the version control sub menu Figure 8 2 shows the structure of the version control sub menu Options Select Configure ity Add File s ie Remove File System Get File s Defined amp Check Out File s Option B Check In File Status of File s 3 User History of File s Defined Undo Check out of File s Option Figure 8 2 Version Control Sub Menu 8 1 1 System menu options and toolbar buttons In order to invoke commands from the toolbar or the system defined options of the Tools gt Version Control sub menu you must first define the associated commands that should be executed when they are activated The names of the options and their intended action are listed in table 8 1 Table 8 1 System Menu Option Option Description Add File s Add selected file s to version control system Remove File s Remove selected file s from version c
6. Parameter Type Description None Saves the profiler information on all download modules to files lt filename gt Character Specifies the name of the file to which profiler string information is saved Example PROFILE_SAVE PR_INFO Saves profiler information to a file named PR_INFO PRO 5 56 QUIT Abbreviation QU Description Exits HEW Closes a log file if it is open Syntax qu Parameter Type Description None Exits HEW Example QU Exits HEW 5 57 RADIX Abbreviation RA Description Sets default input radix If no parameters are specified the current radix is displayed Radix can be changed by using B H D or O before numeric data 351 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Syntax ra lt mode gt Parameter Type Description none Displays current radix lt mode gt Keyword Sets radix to specified type H Sets radix to hexadecimal D Sets radix to decimal O Sets radix to octal B Sets radix to binary Examples RADIX Displays the current radix RAH Sets the radix to hexadecimal 5 58 REGISTER_DISPLAY Abbreviation RD Description Displays register contents Syntax rd lt register gt Parameter Type Description none Displays all register contents lt register gt Keyword Register name Example RD Displays all register contents RD RO Displays the contents of RO 352 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual
7. Parameter Type Description lt symbol gt Character string Symbol name lt value gt Numeric Value Examples SYMBOL_ADD start H 1000 Defines the symbol start at H 1000 SA END_OF_TABLE 1FFF Uses current default radix and defines END_OF_TABLE at H 1FFF 5 72 SYMBOL_CLEAR Abbreviation SC Description Deletes a symbol If no parameters are specified deletes all symbols after confirmation Syntax sc lt symbol gt Parameter Type Description none Deletes all symbols lt symbol gt Character Symbol name string Examples SYMBOL_CLEAR Deletes all symbols after confirmation SC start Deletes the symbol start 5 73 SYMBOL_LOAD Abbreviation SL Description Loads symbols from file File must be in XLINK Pentica b format i e XXXXH name The symbols are added to the existing symbol table 359 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Syntax sl lt filename gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character File name string Examples SYMBOL_LOAD TEST SYM Loads the file TEST SYM SL MY_CODE SYM Loads the file MY_CODE SYM 5 74 SYMBOL_SAVE Abbreviation SS Description Saves symbols to a file in XLINK Pentica b format The symbol file extension default is SYM Syntax ss lt filename gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character File name string Examples SYMBOL_SAVE TEST Saves symbol table to TEST SYM SS MY_CODE SYM Saves the
8. 4 The insertion cursor will be placed at the start of the line number specified Goto 21x Line number fi omea Figure 4 5 Goto Dialog 4 6 Bookmarks When working with many large files at a time it can become difficult to locate specific lines or areas of interest Bookmarks enable you to specify lines that you want to jump back to at a subsequent time One example of its 75 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual use is in a large C file where you may want to set a bookmark on each function definition Once a bookmark has been set it exists until it is removed or the file is closed gt To set a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the line to mark 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark press CTRL EF2 select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the local menu or click the toggle bookmark toolbar button QA 3 A green mark appears in the blank on the left side of the line to indicate the presence of an active bookmark To remove a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the marked line 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark press CTRL F2 select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the local menu or click the toggle bookmark toolbar button QA 3 The mark will be removed and the line will return to normal text To jump to the next bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Sele
9. One byte 0 Return value 2 pen mode X Start address of file neme Parameters 294 Return value output 0 Normal completion 1 Error File number output The number to be used in all file accesses after opening Open mode input H 00 r H 01 w H 02 a H 03 r H 04 w H 05 a H 10 rb H 11 wb H 12 ab H 13 r b H 14 w b H 15 a b These modes are interpreted as follows Watt r Open for reading w Open an empty file for writing mot a Open for appending write starting at the end of the file r Open for reading and writing w Open an empty file for reading and writing at Open for reading and appending High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual b Open in binary mode Start address of file name input The start address of the area for storing the file name FCLOSE Closes a file H 06 Parameter Block Parameters Return value output 0 Normal completion 1 Error File number input One byte One byte 0 Return value File number The number returned when the file was opened 295 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual T FGETC Inputs one byte from a file H 07 R 17 H 27 Parameter Block Parameters e Return value output 0 Normal completion 1 EOF detected e File number input e Function code H 07
10. Figure 3 21 Session Properties Dialog Box 210 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual To make a session read only 1 2 3 4 5 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 3 19 Select the session you would like to make read only Click the Properties button to display the Session Properties dialog box figure 3 21 Check the Read only check box to make the link read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally Click the OK button To save a session with a different name Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 3 19 Select the session you would like to save Click the Save as button to display the Save Session dialog box figure 3 22 Browse to the new file location If you want to export the session file to another location leave the Maintain link check box unchecked If you would like the HEW to use this location instead of the current session location check the Maintain link check box Click the OK button Save Session 2 x Save in ja tutorial gt as EJ Debug SimDebug_H85 2600N ReleaseSession hsf SimSessionH8S 2600N hsf me Save as type Projects hsf x Cancel J Maintain link 4 Figure 3 22 Save Session Dialog Box 211 High performance Embedded Worksh
11. unregister the tool and then invoke the tool uninstaller again 97 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual High performance Embedded Workshop Figure 5 9 Unable to Uninstall Tool If a tool is not registered with the HEW then the dialog shown in figure 5 10 will be displayed when the Unregister button is clicked This confirmation dialog displays all of the files and folders that will be deleted If you are certain that these files and folders can be deleted then click the Yes button To abort the uninstall click the No or Cancel buttons Confirmation C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin C Hew Tools Hitachi XH845_0_2 h8_5020 hrf C Hew Tools HitachiSsH845_0_24h8_5020 huf C Hew Tools HitachiSXH845_0_2 HEW C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 include C Hew Tools Hitachi sH845_0_2 bin 2600a_00 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600a_01 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi XH845_0_2 bin 2600a_10 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600a_11 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600n_00 pak C Hew Tools HitachiSH845_0_2 bin 2600n_01 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600n_10 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 2600n_11 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin300_000 pak C Hew Tools HitachiSH845_0_2 bin 300_001 pak C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 bin 300_010 pak Figure 5 10 Confirmation Dialog 98 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 7 Te
12. Disassembles memory contents to assembly language code The display of disassembled memory is fully symbolic Syntax da lt address gt lt length gt Parameter Type Description lt address gt Numeric Start address lt length gt Numeric Number of instructions optional default 16 Examples DISASSEMBLE H 100 5 Disassembles 5 lines of code starting at H 100 DA H 3E00 20 Disassembles 20 lines of code starting at H 3E00 5 29 ERASE Abbreviation ER Description Clears the Command Line window Syntax er Parameter Type Description none Clears the Command Line window Example ER Clears the Command Line window 332 5 30 EVALUATE Abbreviation EV Description High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Provides a calculator function evaluating simple and complex expressions with parentheses mixed radices and symbols All operators have the same priority but parentheses may be used to change the order of evaluation The operators have the same meaning as in C C Expressions can also be used in any command where a number is required Register names may be used but must always be prefixed by the character The result is displayed in hexadecimal decimal octal or binary Syntax ev lt expression gt Parameter Type Description lt expression gt Expression Expression to be evaluated Valid operators amp amp logica
13. Please note that Smart edit does not support macro usage 166 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Simulator Debugger Part 167 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 168 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 1 Overview This section describes the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop HEW necessary to use the simulator debugger It is intended to give users who are unfamiliar with the Windows operation the details that are required by subsequent sections 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents the HEW allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects Similarly a project can be thought of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files Figure 1 1 shows this configuration PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT WORKSPACE Figure 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Workspaces allow you to group related projects together This is useful when you have an application that needs to be built for different processors when you are developing an application and library at the same time or in other cases Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is buil
14. 310 Syntax an lt state gt High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Parameter Type Description None Displays the performance analysis state lt state gt Keyword Enables or disables performance analysis Enable Enables performance analysis Disable Disables performance analysis Reset Resets performance analysis counts Examples ANALYSIS Displays performance analysis state AN enable Enables performance analysis AN disable Disables performance analysis AN reset Resets performance analysis counts 5 4 ANALYSIS_RANGE Abbreviation AR Description Sets a function for which the performance analysis is provided or displays a function for which the performance analysis is provided without parameters Syntax ar lt function name gt Parameter Type Description None Displays all functions for which the performance analysis is provided lt function name gt Character string Name of function for which the performance analysis is provided Examples ANALYSIS_RANGE sort AR Provides the performance analysis for the function sort Displays the function for which the performance analysis is provided High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 5 ANALYSIS_RANGE_ DELETE Abbreviation AD Description Deletes the specified function or all functions if no parameters are specified it does not ask for confirmation Syntax ad lt index
15. 320 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Output lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt lt option gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file to which data is saved string lt addr gt Numeric Address from which data is output lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF lt option gt Keyword Specifies a new file or appends to an existing file optional makes a new file when abbreviated A Adds the data to the existing file Interrupt lt interrupt typel gt lt priority gt Parameter Type Description lt interrupt type1 gt Numeric Type of interrupt Interrupt vector number 0 to FF lt priority gt Numeric Interrupt priority optional default 0 0 to 17 Examples BREAK_DATA 0 100 L EQ A break occurs when H 100 is written to memory address H O in longword BD C0 FF B NE A break occurs when a value other than H FF is written to memory address H CO in byte BD 4000 10 A break occurs when H 10 is written to memory address H 4000 in byte 5 13 BREAK_DISPLAY Abbreviation BI Description Displays a list of breakpoints Syntax bi Parameter Type Description None Displays a list of breakpoints Examples BREAK DISPLAY BI A list of breakpoints is displayed A list of breakpoints is displayed 321 High performance Embedded
16. A Debug OFF Debug ON Debug OFF Optimize OFF Optimize OFF Optimize ON ae List File YES H List File NO UJ List File NO UJ Assembler Source Files C MyProject Default C MyProject MyDebug C MyProject MyOptimized Figure 2 14 Configurations and File Options 26 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 5 1 Selecting a Configuration The current configuration can be set in two ways Either 1 Select it from the drop down list box figure 2 15 in the toolbar Release z Release Figure 2 15 Toolbar Selection or 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations This will invoke the Build Configurations Dialog figure 2 16 Build Configurations 27 xi Build configurations i Cancel Add Renove Current configuration Debug 7 Figure 2 16 Build Configurations Dialog 2 Select the configuration that you want to use from the Current configuration drop down list 3 Click OK to set the configuration 2 5 2 Adding and Deleting Configurations You can add a new configuration by copying settings from another configuration or delete a configuration These three tasks are described below gt To add a new configuration 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations to display the Build Configurations dialog figure 2 16 2 Click the Add button The Add Configuration dialog will be invoked figu
17. High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Workspace of x Demo amp sbrk _CLOSEALL _INIT_IOLIB change close Dummy S INT_Illegal_code lseek amp main Manual_Reset_PC GE Projects L Templates lt Navigation Figure 1 14 Workspace Window Navigation Tab To allow the Workspace window or the Output window docking Click the right mouse button anywhere inside the Workspace window or the Output window Then a pop up menu will be displayed If Allow Docking is checked docking is allowed otherwise docking is not allowed Select Allow Docking to check or uncheck it When Allow Docking is checked you can dock a window a toolbar or a menu bar to the edge of the HEW main window or to the edge of another docked window Also if Allow Docking is checked you can float them above the other HEW windows or outside the HEW main window Figure 1 14 i shows a docked Workspace window and figure 1 14 ii shows a floating Workspace window mE Workspace ol x E Demo EEE Demo Assembly source file Sy Assembly source file 4 lowll ste 2 lowlvisre C source file Ey C source file dbsct c dbset c iE Dema c 2 Demo c 2 intpra c intprg c 2 lowste c lowsre c tesetprg c 2 resetprg c sbrk c sbtk c 4 vecttbl c Dependencies Figu
18. gt To modify a file mapping 1 58 Select the mapping to be modified 2 Click Modify button The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked figure 3 17 3 4 Click OK to commit the changes Modify the options as necessary High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 6 Controlling the Build By default the High performance Embedded Workshop will execute all of the phases in a build and only stop if a fatal error is encountered You can change this behavior by setting the controls on the Build tab of the Options dialog figure 3 18 Figure 3 18 Options Dialog Build Tab Select Tools gt Options to invoke the dialog If you want to stop the build when a certain number of errors are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of errors exceed check box and then specify the error count limit in the edit field to the right If you want to stop the build when a certain number of warnings are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of warnings exceed check box and then specify the warning count limit in the edit field to the right Note Irrespective of what these controls are set to the build will always halt if a fatal error is encountered In addition to specifying error and warning count limits the Build tab also allows you to request that the command line environment and initial directory of each execution should be displayed Check the
19. gt To remove a phase 1 Select the phase that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button gt To view the properties of a system phase 1 Select the system phase that you would like to examine 2 Click the Modify button gt To move a phase 1 Select the phase that you would like to move 2 Click the Move Up or Move Down button gt To import a phase 1 Click the import button A dialog is displayed which allows the user to browse to an existing project to import a custom phase from 2 Choose the location of the project you wish to import a custom phase from Once selected a dialog is displayed which lists the custom phases in the imported project 3 Selecting a phase name and then clicking properties displays the custom phase details This allows you to decide whether the phase does the functionality you require 4 Once you have decided which phase to import highlight it in the list and then click OK The phase will then be added to the build phases dialog at the bottom of the build order 48 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To modify a custom phase 1 2 Select the custom phase that you would like to modify Click the Modify button The modify phase dialog will be invoked with the Command tab selected figure 3 7 Change the contents of the fields as appropriate Set the Don t check for input file s existence before executing
20. 09 16 bit address FGETS Inputs one line from a file H 19 24 bit address H 29 32 bit address 10 H 0A 16 bit address FPUTS Outputs one line to a file H 1A 24 bit address H 2A 32 bit address 11 H 0B FEOF Checks for end of the file 12 H 0C FSEEK Moves the file pointer 13 H 0D FTELL Returns the current position of the file pointer To perform I O processing use the System Call Address in the Simulator System dialog box section 4 21 1 in the following procedure 1 Set the address specialized for I O processing in the System Call Address select Enable and execute the program 2 When detecting a subroutine call instruction BSR JSR or BSRF that is a system call to the specialized address during user program execution the simulator debugger performs I O processing by using the RO and R1 values H8 300 H8 300L series or the ER1 value H8 300H H8S series as the parameters Therefore before issuing a system call set as follows in the user program e Set the function code table 4 1 to the RO register 291 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual MSB 1 byte 1 byte LSB Function H 01 code SSE e Set the parameter block address to the R1 register for the parameter block refer to each function description MSB LSB Parameter block address e Reserve the parameter block and input output buffer areas Each parameter of the parameter bloc
21. 4 15 6 Deleting a Breakpoint Select a breakpoint and choose Delete from the pop up menu to remove the selected breakpoint To retain the breakpoint but not have it cause a break when its conditions are met use the Disable option see section 4 15 5 Disabling a Breakpoint 4 15 7 Deleting All Breakpoints Choose Delete All from the pop up menu to remove all breakpoints 270 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 15 8 Viewing the Source Line for a Breakpoint Select a breakpoint and choose Go to Source from the pop up menu to open the Source or Disassembly window at address of breakpoint The Go to Source menu is only available when one breakpoint is selected 4 15 9 Closing Input or Output File Select a breakpoint and choose Close File from the pop up menu to close the selected File Input or File Output data file and to reset the address to read the file 4 15 10 Closing All Input and Output Files Choose Close All Files from the pop up menu to close all File Input and File Output data files and to reset the address to read the file 4 16 Analyzing Performance Use the Performance Analysis window to select a function name and analyze the performance 4 16 1 Opening the Performance Analysis Window Choose View gt Performance gt Performance Analysis or click the PA toolbar button E to open the Performance analysis window amp Performance An Index Function Cycl
22. 7FFF to data H 21 5 49 MEMORY FIND Abbreviation MI Description Finds a string in a memory range Syntax mi lt start gt lt end gt lt string gt Parameter Type Description lt start gt Numeric Start address lt end gt Numeric End address including this address lt string gt Numeric Data to search for Example MEMORY_FIND F 1000 H 2000 H 12 Finds the first occurrence of the data H 12 between addresses H 1000 and H 2000 347 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 50 MEMORY MOVE Abbreviation MV Description Moves data in the specified memory area Syntax my lt start gt lt end gt lt dest gt lt state gt Parameter Type Description lt start gt Numeric Start address lt end gt Numeric End address including this address lt dest gt Numeric Destination start address lt state gt Keyword Verify flag optional default V V Verify N No verify Examples MEMORY_MOVE RF 1000 H 1FFF H 2000 MV H FB80 H FF7F H 3000 5 51 MEMORY_TEST Abbreviation MT Description Moves memory contents in the area from H 1000 to H 1FFF into H 2000 Moves memory contents in the area from H FB80 to H FF7F into H 3000 Performs read write and verification testing in the specified address range The original contents of memory have been replaced by the newly written data The test will access the memory according
23. Assembly Application Project for generating an execution program that includes the initial routine file written in the assembly language Demonstration Project for generating a demonstration program written in the C language Empty Application Project for only setting the toolchain environment no generation file Import Makefile A project to create an executable program by importing an existing makefile Library Project for generating a library file no generation file Note Select Empty Application to generate a debug only project 190 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual New Project Step 1 21x Toolchain version E 0 0 0 7 Which CPU do you want to use for this project If there is no CPU type to be selected select the CPU Type that a similar to hardware specification or select Other lt Back Lon Finish Cancel Figure 3 2 CPU Selection Display Step 1 Select the CPU and Toolchain version in Step 1 The CPU types CPU Type are classified according to the CPU series CPU Series Select the CPU corresponding to the program to be developed because the generation file differs according to the CPU Type and CPU Series settings If there is no corresponding CPU select a CPU with similar hardware specifications or Other The following buttons at the bottom of the dialog box are the same as those in the New Project wizard dialog box Next gt Moves to th
24. The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the file type in the tree to which you wish to add the new keyword group 3 Click Add underneath the tree The Add Category dialog box will be displayed figure 4 11 Enter the name of the keyword group in the Category Title field then click OK to create the new keyword group Add Category i 1x Category Title ema Figure 4 11 Add Category Dialog gt To create new keywords 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the item underneath the source view icon in the tree you wish to modify the syntax highlighting for This should be the file type e g C source file and correct keyword group e g identifier or pre processor 3 Select the Keywords tab figure 4 12 82 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Format Views Assembly include file Assembly list file Assembly source file C header file C list file C source file D Comments D PreProcessor C header file C list file C source file HEW Sample Text ok cance _ Figure 4 12 Format Views Dialog Keywords Tab 4 Click the Add button to add a keyword Then the Add Keyword dialog figure 4 13 will be launched Specify a keyword in the Keyword field and click OK to close the dialog To remove a keyword select the keyword and
25. Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users gt To check in edits made to a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to check back into Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Check In Files toolbar button 2 or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check In menu option 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users However if the check out operation was carried out by mistake or perhaps is no longer required then the operation can be undone To undo a check out of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to undo a previous check out operation You may also select a file f
26. in Session 1 GO No activities GO can only be executed manually by User User click GO in Session 2 User click STEP in session 1 No activities GO manually executed by User STEP GO No activities must STEP manually by User User click STEP in session 2 User click ESC in session 1 No activities must STEP manually by User BREAK STEP Still executing if previously executing User Target Program User click ESC in session 2 Still executing if previously executing User Target Program BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or due to illegal User Program BREAK Still executing if previously executing User Target Program Still executing if previously executing User Target Program BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or due to illegal User Program RESET CPU in session 1 RESET CPU No activities RESET CPU in session 2 No activities RESET CPU Figure 4 94 Synchronized debugging off Note Another difference to the standard debugging system is that it is possible to view the download modules in the workspace window for all synchronized sessions This allows modules to be downloaded for any of the available sessions easily 305 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 306 High performance Em
27. n 0x0000082a 0x00000836 for i 0 i lt 10 i JA 0x0000083e j rand eth TO AAN BE A lt gt Demo_H8Sz Read wite 1 93 fl Figure 1 2 HEW Main Window There are three main windows the workspace window the editor window and the output window The workspace window shows the projects and files which are currently in the workspace the editor window provides file viewing and editing facilities and the output window shows the results of a various processes e g build version control commands and so on 1 2 1 The Title Bar The title bar displays the name of the currently open workspace project and file It also contains the standard minimize maximize and close buttons Click the minimize button to minimize the HEW on the windows start bar Click the maximize button to force HEW to fill the screen Click the close button to close the HEW this has the same effect as selecting File gt Exit or pressing ALT F4 1 2 2 The Menu Bar The menu bar contains nine menus File Edit View Project Options Build Tools Window and Help All of the menu options are grouped logically under these headings For instance if you wanted to open a file then the file menu is where you will find the right menu option if you wanted to set up a tool then the tools menu is the correct selection The following sections will cover the functions of the various menu options as they become 4 High performance Embed
28. s Manual 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Show History menu option 143 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options You can control the way in which the history and status commands are displayed by selecting Tools gt Version Control gt Configure To display the results of a history command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for history check box or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window To display the results of a status command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for file status check box or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window 144 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 10 Network Facilities 10 1 Overview The High performance Embedded Workshop version 3 is capable of sharing workspaces and projects across a network This allows users to concurrently work on shared projects and see each other s changes as they happen This system can be used in conjunction with version control The major difference with using this system is that each user can modify and update the workspace and project without making all of the other users reload their project and potentially lose all their changes This system is implemented by making one of the machines attached to the network th
29. s Manual Internal HEW synchronization The HEW also supports internal multiple target debugging This will allow you to connect to multiple target components in the same HEW application These targets can then be debugged simultaneously The system allows the user to setup a number of sessions with different targets Then when debugging the sessions can be synched so that certain events in one session can trigger the same events in the others This is very similar to that seen in the External HEW synchronization section above This facility though has the added advantage that it is easy to swap sessions and see what is happening in the same application gt To setup internal HEW synchronization 1 2 3 Select the Options gt Debug Sessions menu item Select the Synchronized Debug tab of the dialog The dialog displayed in figure 4 91 is displayed Select the sessions you wish to synchronize All currently available sessions in the workspace are displayed Click the synchronize session button The icons for these sessions should changed to checked rather than unchecked Click the Enable synchronized debugging check box to switch this facility on Click OK to verify the changes Debug Sessions xj Sessions Synchronised Debug Sessions Debug Taraet__ a DemoWorkspace Te DemoW orkspace v SimSessionSH3 DSPCore SH3 DSP Core S v SimSessionSH3 DSP_L SH3 DSP Simulat DefaultSession SimSessionSH3 DSPCor
30. 2 Click Add A dialog is displayed that asks you to enter your chosen template name This name must be unique otherwise a duplicated template name message will be displayed and the template will not be added 3 If you want to modify an existing template use the Template name drop down menu to select which template you want to modify 4 Enter the desired text into the Template text text area You can copy text from another editor window and then paste it into this dialog using CTRL V 5 There are 10 shortcut keys reserved for templates If you want to designate one of these select the key in the drop list at the bottom of the edit template dialog These range from CTRL 0 to CTRL 9 Enter the following keywords to insert special information when the template is inserted Menu Entry Placeholder Replaced With Time TIME Current time Date as DMY DATE_DMY Current date in dd mm yy form Date as MDY DATE_MDY Current date in mm dd yy form Date as YMD DATE_YMD Current date in yy mm dd form Date as Text DATE_TEXT Current date in text form Line LINE First line number of template insertion User USER Current windows user File FULLFILE Name of the file Filename FILE Name and full path of the file Project Name PROJNAME Current project name Workspace Name WORKSPNAME Workspace name Cursor position Insertion cursor Positions the cursor in this po
31. 265 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 15 Using the Simulator Debugger Breakpoints Sophisticated breakpoint functions are available in the simulator debugger in addition to the HEW standard PC breakpoints The user can specify break conditions and actions after a break condition is satisfied and can display the breakpoints set 4 15 1 Listing the Breakpoints Choose View gt Code gt Eventpoints or click the Eventpoints toolbar button Ee to open the Event window which lists the breakpoints set Figure 4 64 Event Window The following items are displayed Enable Displays whether the breakpoint is enabled or disabled Enable Valid Disable Invalid Type Displays break types BP PC break BA Break access BD Break data BR Break register Register name BS Break sequence BCY Break cycle Condition Displays the conditions that satisfies a break condition The contents displayed differ from the type of the break When the type of the break is BR the register name is displayed and when the type of the break is BCY the number of cycles is displayed BP PC Program counter Corresponding file name line and symbol name BA Address Address Symbol name BD Address Address Symbol name BR Register Register name BS PC Program counter Corresponding file name line and symbol name BCY Cycle Number of cycles displayed in hexadecimal Action Dis
32. Build gt Build or click the build toolbar button j or press F7 or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build from the pop up menu The build all option compiles and assembles all source files irrespective of whether they have been modified or not and links all of the new object files produced gt To perform a build all Select Build gt Build All or click the build all toolbar button or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build All from the pop up menu Both the build and the build all will terminate if any of the project files produce errors 2 6 2 Building Individual Files The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build project files individually gt To build an individual file 1 Select the file which you want to build from the project window 2 Select Build gt Build File click the build file toolbar button ge or press CTRL F7 or click the right mouse button on a file icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build lt file gt from the pop up menu 29 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 6 3 Stopping a Build The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to halt the build process gt To stop a build 1 Select Build gt Stop Build or click the stop build toolbar button The build wi
33. C 4 Placeholder Tips Placeholders are there to allow you to create flexible paths to the various files used by the system e If there is a placeholder pop up menu next to an edit field into which you are about to enter a path or file you should consider how you can use a placeholder to make that path or file definition flexible e If you use several configurations then the CONFIGDIR placeholder is very useful to ensure that files can be written to and from the current configuration s directory e Wherever possible use a placeholder They can always be removed or added later so don t be afraid to experiment 377 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 378 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix D I O File Format HEW formats the IO window based on information it finds in an I O Register definition file When you select a debugging platform HEW will look for a lt device gt IO file corresponding to the selected device and load it if it exists This file is a formatted text file that describes the I O modules and the address and size of their registers You can edit this file with a text editor to add support for memory mapped registers or peripherals you may have specific to your application e g registers in an ASIC device mapped into the microcomputer s address space D 1 File format Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each mo
34. Hew Demo_H8S26004 Demo_H8S26004 dbsct c Setting of BLA Section C Hew Demo_H8S26004 Demo_H8S 26004 lowlvl sre Program of Low level C Hew Demo_H8S26004 Demo_H8S26004 lowsre c Program of 1 0 Stream C Hew Demo_H8S26004 Demo_H8S26004 sbrk c Program of sbrk C Hew Demo_H8S26004 D emo_H8S 26004 iodefine h Definition of 1 0 Register Click OK to generate the project or Cancel to abort IV Generate Readme txt as a summary file in the project directory Cancel Figure 3 11 Summary Dialog Box 10 The project generator displays information on the project to be generated in the Summary dialog box After confirming the display contents click OK Checking Generate Readme txt as a summary file in the project directory will save the project information displayed in the Summary dialog box as a text file named Readme txt in the project directory 3 3 Configuring the Debugging Platform Before loading a program into your debugging platform the platform must be set up to match your application system The items that must be set are typically the device type operating mode clock speed and memory map It is particularly important to set the memory map In the HEW the project generation process will have completed much of this work However if you are using a board with a configuration different from the standard types then some customization will be required 3 3 1 Memory Map The debugging platform needs to
35. JR a 0x7c000024 int 10 R 0 H00000000 0x7c000024 tint R 1 H00000000 0x7c000028 int R 2 H00000000 Ox c00002c tint R G HOO000000 0x7c000030 n R 4 H o0000000 0x7c000034 n R 5 H oo000000 Ox7c000038 tint R 6 H 00000000 0x7c00003c tint R D H 00000000 0x7c000040 n R B H 00000000 0x7c000044 n R 9 H 00000000 Ox7c000048 tint R max H00000000 Ox c00004c int Figure 4 45 Watch Window This window allows the user to view and modify C C source level variables The contents of this window are displayed only when the debugging information available in the absolute file abs includes the information on the C C source program The variable information is not displayed if the source program information is excluded from the debugging information during optimization by the compiler In addition the variables that are declared as macro cannot be displayed 248 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The following items are displayed Name Name of the variable Value Value and assigned location The assigned location is enclosed by Type Type of the variable The R mark shows that the value of the variable can be updated during user program execution When the color of the R mark is black a value is updated in an instruction interval specified with the Response command Adding a Watch Item Use the Add Watch dialog box in th
36. L OOFFFBA8 lt pE 05330 0000029394 000C78 MOV L s ER6 lt 00FF 095320 NNNNNPAAN NNNACPA aes ADD M DEZ FREN Figure 4 61 Trace Window This window displays the following trace information items PTR Pointer in the trace buffer 0 for the last executed instruction Cycle Total number of instruction execution cycles cleared by instruction execution reset Address Instruction address CCR Displays the contents of the condition code register CCR as a mnemonic Mult Displays the flag in the multiplier as a mnemonic H8S 2600 series only Instruction Instruction mnemonic Access Data Data access information display format destination lt accessed data Source C C or assembly language source programs 4 14 4 Searching for a Trace Record Use the Trace Search dialog box to search for a trace record To open this dialog box choose Find from the pop up menu 263 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual C Cycle Cancel Address Value BRA Figure 4 62 Trace Search Dialog Box This dialog box specifies the conditions for searching trace information Specify a search item in Item and search for the specified contents in Value PTR Pointer in the trace buffer 0 for the last executed instruction specify in the form of nnn Cycle Total number of instruction execution cycles Address Instruction address Instruction Instruction
37. Project types list displays all of the available project types application library etc Select the project type you want to create from this list The project types displayed will be all valid types for the current pair of CPU family and toolchain The project types are classified in three classes toolchain only debugger only and full project generator that configures both the debugger and toolchain aspect of the HEW Click the OK button to create the new workspace and project It is not possible to create a workspace if one already exists in the same directory 171 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 4 Opening a Workspace gt To open a workspace 1 Select Browse to another project workspace option from the Welcome dialog box figure 1 2 and click the OK button or select File gt Open Workspace The Open Project Workspace dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the workspace file that you want to open HWS files only 3 Click the Open button to open the workspace If the HEW is set up to display information when a workspace is opened the Workspace Properties dialog box will be displayed figure 1 4 Otherwise the workspace will be opened Note that whether the Workspace Properties dialog box is shown depends on the setting of either the Show workspace information on workspace open check box in the Workspace Properties dialog box or the Display workspace information dialog on
38. Syntax fl lt format gt lt filename gt lt offset gt lt state gt Parameter Type Description lt format gt Keyword Object format optional default DEFAULT_OBJECT_FORMAT settings Binary Binary type Elf Dwarf2 Elf Dwarf2 type IntelHex Intel Hex type S Record S type lt filename gt Character string File name lt offset gt Numeric Offset to be added to load address optional default 0 lt state gt Keyword Verify flag optional default V V Verify N No verify Examples FILE_LOAD A BINARY TESTFILE A22 Loads Motorola S Record file testfile a22 FL ANOTHER MOT H 200 Loads Motorola S Record file another mot with an offset of H 200 bytes 335 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 33 FILE_SAVE Abbreviation FS Description Saves the specified memory area data to a file The user is warned if about to overwrite an existing file The file extension default is MOT Symbols are not automatically saved Syntax fs lt format gt lt filename gt lt start gt lt end gt Parameter Type Description lt format gt Keyword Object format optional default DEFAULT_OBJECT_FORMAT settings Binary Binary type IntelHex Intel Hex type S Record S type lt filename gt Character string File name lt start gt Numeric Start address lt end gt Numeric End address Examples FILE_SAVE TESTFILE 0 H 2013 Saves address range 0 H 2013
39. The HEW allows the user to extend the HEW functionality by adding additional components to the system This is achieved by registering the component in the Tools Administration dialog box These components can add windows menus and toolbars to the HEW system Examples of the components are the debugger and builder components of HEW The debugger component adds all of the menus and toolbars associated with the debugger and the builder component does the same for the build functionality The components you have registered in the system will modify the look and feel of HEW In some cases you may not have some of the menus which you can see in this manual For instance if the debugger component is not installed you will not have the Debug menu in the HEW main window 12 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Build Basics This chapter explains the general functions of the HEW whilst the more advanced features can be found in chapter 3 Advanced Build Features 2 1 The Build Process The typical build process is outlined in figure 2 1 This may not be the exact build process which your installation of HEW will use as it depends upon the tools that were provided with your installation of HEW e g you may not have a compiler for instance In any case the principles are the same each step or phase of the build takes a set of project files and then builds them if all succeeds then the next step or phase is executed
40. The tab is only displayed if a version control system is in use For further details on version control refer to chapter 7 Version Control 1 2 7 The Status Bar The status bar displays information as to the current state of the HEW Figure 1 18 shows the seven sections of the status bar Displays HEW statu i npaya Hiisi Read only status Line number Column number Insertion Mode Ready Read write 2 4 1 INS y Caps lock Num lock Figure 1 19 Status Bar 1 3 The Help System The help menu is the rightmost menu on the HEW menu bar It contains the menu option Contents which when selected takes you to the main HEW help window To obtain help on specific dialogs click on the context sensitive help button which is located in the top right hand corner of each dialog box as shown in figure 1 19 Context sensitive help Cancel button Figure 1 20 Help Button When this is clicked the mouse pointer will change to a pointer with a question mark above it Whilst the mouse pointer is in this state click on the part of the dialog box that you require assistance on Alternatively select the control that you require help for and then press the F1 key 11 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 4 Launching the HEW To run the HEW open the Start menu of Windows select Programs select Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop and then select the shortcut of
41. This means that multiple sessions can share the same download module and avoid unnecessary code rebuilds Each session s data should be stored in a separate file in the HEW project For details refer to section 3 4 Debugger Sessions 173 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 174 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 2 Simulator Debugger Functions This section describes the functions of the H8S H8 300 series simulator debugger 2 1 Features e Since the simulator debugger runs on a host computer software debugging can start without using an actual user system thus reducing overall system development time e The simulator debugger performs a simulation to calculate the number of instruction execution cycles for a program thus enabling performance evaluation without using an actual user system e The simulator debugger provides pseudo interrupt and I O simulation functions for simple system level simulation e The simulator debugger offers the following functions that enable efficient program testing and debugging The ability to handle all of the H8S H8 300 series CPUs Functions to stop or continue execution when an error occurs during user program execution Profile data acquisition and function unit performance measurement A comprehensive set of break functions Functions to set or edit memory maps Functions to display function call history Coverage information is displayed in the
42. and linker These components provide the build capability e System Tool an application EXE which can be launched from the Tools menu They are often provided as extra applications which support the toolchain e g an external debugger like the Hitachi Debugging Interface HDI or an interactive graphical librarian e Utility Phase a ready made build phase which supports some specific build functionality e g analyze complexity of source code count lines of source code etc These components provide added functionality to the build that is not toolchain specific e Debugger Component a component that supports some specific debugger functionality e g Target platform Object reader etc e Extension Component a component that provides key functionality in a certain area of the HEW system These components cannot be unregistered when installed e g The HEW builder debugger and flash support 91 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 1 Tool Locations The HEW maintains the locations of HEW compatible components automatically as each new tool is installed After installation the HEW stores information about the component including its location this is referred to as registration Although initial registration is automatic during the course of development or if you want to manage the tools being used in your projects more effectively you may need to register components yourself The
43. gt CPU gt Memory with the Ctrl M accelerator or click the View Memory toolbar button a to open the Memory window This will open the Format dialog box shown in figure 4 7 Format 21x Boon eal eo Lox Cancel End H o00000FF Format Byte x1 m Display Value As fansi character 7 Bytes Count For One Line fie Byte 7 Figure 4 7 Format Dialog Box Enter the range you wish to display as an address value or an equivalent symbol in the Begin and End fields Select the data size and format for the display from the Display Value As and Format drop down lists respectively Select the number of bytes displayed in one line from the Bytes Count For One Line drop down list Click the OK button or press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the Memory window opens The display can be scrolled within the range of the entered display start and end addresses Memory olx Address Z 3 4 5 6 Value 0x00000000 52 65 6E 65 73 6l 73 oo Renesas 0x00000008 00 oo oo oo oo oo oo lu emia ee ere 0x00000010 00 oo oo oo oo oo oo 00e orcas ere 0x00000018 00 oo oo oo oo oo oo OD E 0x00000020 00 oo oo oo oo oo oo OO ee ar 0x00000028 00 oo oo oo 00 oo oo OD teeia es erssers 0x00000030 00 oo oo oo oo oo oo OG A 0x00000038 00 oo oo oo 00 oo oo OOS sascanan ha Figure 4 8 Memory Window 217 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual There are three display columns Addr
44. s Manual 1 6 Closing a Workspace Selecting File gt Close Workspace closes a HEW workspace If there are any changes to the workspace or any of its projects you will be requested whether or not you wish to save them Selecting File gt Save Workspace can save a HEW workspace 1 7 Using Old Workspaces The HEW can open any workspace that was created on a previous version of the HEW This should not cause any problems and any differences in the workspace file details should be upgraded when the workspace is opened A back up version of the initial workspace or project file must be saved in the current directory of the file that has been upgraded The session files used in the Hitachi Debugging Interface will not be upgraded 1 8 Exiting the HEW The HEW can be exited by selecting File gt Exit pressing the ALT F4 accelerator or selecting the Close option from the system menu To open the system menu click the icon at the upper left corner of the HEW title bar If a workspace is currently open the same workspace closing procedure is followed as described in section 1 6 Closing a Workspace 1 9 Debugger Sessions The HEW stores all of your builder options into a configuration In a similar way the HEW stores your debugger options in a session The debugging platforms the programs to be downloaded and each debugging platform s options can be stored in a session Sessions are not directly related to a configuration
45. 1 3 It is possible to then add additional information concerning the exact issue you have found in the large edit box 4 Once you are happy with your report you can choose the method of sending the report in the submit drop list This has e mail entries and an entry for printing the report 5 Then click submit This will send the report Submit a Bug Report xi You may submit a Bug Report through e mail or by conventional means The box below contains information gathered from your machine and any additional information about the state of the software if a crash occurred You may check and edit the acquired data and should add any additional information at the end of the text RAM Information 0 267 837 440 bytes 65 019 904 bytes 384 319 488 bytes 189 648 896 bytes 2 147 352 576 bytes 231 693 824 bytes No project information available Please type a description of the problem you wish to report F w Print How would you like to submit the report Figure 12 1 Submit bug report dialog 155 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 156 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 13 Navigation facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop 3 0 has a number of new integrated navigation facilities The navigation window is located alongside the project and templates window This view is shown below in Figure 13 1 Workspace x LF amp SF
46. 1 Select the Create a new project workspace option from the Welcome dialog box figure 1 2 and click the OK button or select File gt New Workspace The New Project Workspace dialog box will be displayed figure 1 3 New Project Workspace 2 xi Projects Application Workspace Name ia Assembly Application w Demonstrator Project Name E Empty Application t Import Makefile Library Directory CAHew Browse CPU family H85 H87300 7 Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Properties 5 Note Figure 1 3 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Enter the name of the new workspace into the Workspace Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character As you enter the workspace name the HEW will add a subdirectory and project name for you automatically To select the directory in which you would like to create the workspace use the Browse button or type the directory into the Directory field manually This allows the workspace and project name to be different Select the CPU family and toolchain upon which you would like to base the workspace Note that these cannot be changed once the workspace has been created When a new workspace is created the HEW will also automatically create a project with the name specified in the project name field and place it inside the new workspace The
47. 16 bit address One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 Input buffer start address e Function code H 17 24 bit address H 27 32 bit address One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 4 The number returned when the file was opened e Start address of input buffer input The start address of the buffer for storing input data 296 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual FPUTC Outputs one byte to a file H 08 H 18 H 28 Parameter Block Parameters Return value output 0 Normal completion 1 Error File number input e Function code H 08 16 bit address One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 Output buffer start address e Function code H 18 24 bit address H 28 32 bit address One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 4 The number returned when the file was opened Start address of output buffer input The start address of the buffer used for storing the output data 297 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 9 FGETS Reads character string data from a file H 09 H 19 H 29 Reads character string data from a file Data is read until either a new line code or a NULL code is read or until the buffer is full Parameter Block Parameters e Return value output 0 Normal completion 1 EOF detected e File number input
48. 3 Enter the full path of the project database file HWP file into the edit field or click Browse to search for it graphically 4 Click OK to insert the existing project into the workspace Note When an existing project is being inserted into a workspace the CPU family and tool chain upon which that project is based must match those of the current workspace If they do not then the project cannot be inserted into the workspace 2 11 Specifying Dependencies between Projects The projects within a workspace can be dependent upon one another so that when one project is built all its dependent projects are built first This is useful if another project uses one of the others in the workspace For example imagine that a workspace contains two projects The first project is a library that is included by an application project In this case the library must have been built and up to date before the second application can build correctly To achieve this situation we can specify the library as a dependent i e child project of the application project This would then allow the library to be built first if it is out of date When a dependent project is built the HEW attempts to match the configuration in the dependent project with that of the current project This means that if the current configuration is Debug then the HEW will attempt to build the Debug configuration in the dependent project If this matched configuration do
49. 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 8 2 8 3 8 4 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4124 Brace Matching ensa r t E E E E E 87 Editor Column majagemiehts seiorn ecinic a a 88 Tools Administration sseseseeeseeeseeseseeresresieseeresresresreresrssrsresresrssese 91 TOOLE OCIOSEAR TANE KEENER AAR E 92 HEW Registration Files HRE eenen onnenn n a 92 Registering COMmponents ccsiesics ccvedsc sah veceseeseuncsnbeveved oasecs A EEE 93 5 3 1 Searching Drives for Components ccscseceeseeseeeeseeeeceeeeeceseeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeas 93 5 3 2 Registering a Single Compomentt ceceseeeesceceeseeseeeeeeceeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 94 Unregistering Components 94 Viewing and Editing Component Properties csceeceeseeseeseeeeceeeesceseeseeseeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 95 Uninstallitig Components rssicon toerit oiri o aE EEEE EE R EE 97 Techitical Support ISSUS nien E E EE E TE E 99 On Demand Components sieisen reisene na e ER E AEE E 101 Custom Project TYPE Skrsi parestri ontis E E EVES PAO CETE EO EEEE TOTII SE 102 Customizing the Environment s s sssssesessissesessessresesststneseseeseses 103 Customizing the Toolbatts jiscccccsciscoscssicesecasasedeceaibgeccsthege ce savanes sevtesecahsvancssusuececenseascsaveaeses 103 Customizing the Tools Menu Configuring the Help System 108 Specifying Workspace Options
50. 6 Click Modify to modify an application The Modify Application dialog will be displayed This dialog is the same as the Add Application dialog described above except that the Name field is read only Modify the settings as desired and then click OK 23 24 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 7 Click OK to set the application for the selected file group High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 4 Specifying How to Build a File Once you have added the necessary files to the project the next step is to instruct the HEW on how to build each file To do this you will need to select a menu option from the Options menu The contents of this menu depend upon which tools you are using For example if you are using a compiler assembler and linker then there will be three menu options each one referring to one of the tools gt To set options for a build phase 1 Select the options menu and find the phase whose options you would like to modify Select this option 2 A dialog will be invoked which allows you to specify the options 3 After making your selections click OK to set them To obtain further information use the context sensitive help button or select the area in which you need assistance and then press F1 25 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 5 Build Configurations The HEW allows you to store all of your build options i
51. C C or assembly source level BO ONTE Pe BNE Visual debugging functions provided through the display of images or waveforms e The breakpoints memory map performance and trace can be set through the dialog boxes under Windows Environments corresponding to each memory map of the H8S H8 300 series microcomputers can be set through the dialog box 1 Intuitive user interface 2 Online help 3 Common display and operationality 2 2 Target User Program Load modules in the Elf Dwarf2 format can be symbolically debugged with the simulator debugger Load modules in other formats can be downloaded and their instructions can be executed however they cannot be symbolically debugged For details refer to section 4 10 Elf Dwarf2 Support 2 3 Simulation Range The simulator debugger provides simulation functions for the H8 300 H8 300L H8 300H H8S 2600 and H8S 2000 series microcomputers The simulator debugger supports the following H8S H8 300 series microcomputer functions e All CPU instructions e Exception processing e Registers e All address areas e CPU modes shown in table 2 1 175 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table 2 1 Platforms and CPU Modes Names of Debugging Platforms CPU Modes H8 300 Simulator H8 300 H8 300L Simulator H8 300L H8 300HA Simulator H8 300H advanced mode H8 300HN Simulator H8 300H normal mode H8S 2600A Simulator H8S 2600 advanced mode H8S 2600N Simulato
52. Click the wrap text check box This switches on the wrap text facility when printing so no text is truncated and everything is visible 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 4 8 2 Changing Tabs gt To change tab size 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Enter into the Tab size field the number of desired tabs 3 Click OK for the tab setting specified to take effect Modny Figure 4 7 Options Dialog Editor Tab When a TAB key is pressed in the editor a tab character is usually stored in the file However sometimes it is preferable to store spaces instead The representation of tab characters can be controlled via the Options dialog gt To use spaces as tabs 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Use spaces as tabs check box as appropriate 3 Click OK for the tab setting specified to take effect 78 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 8 3 Auto Indentation When you press return in a standard editor the insertion cursor will move to the next line down at the first column i e against the left hand side of a window Auto Indentation is a feature which when return is pressed places the insertion cursor on the next line as before but under the first non white space cha
53. Command line controls whether the command line is shown as each tool is executed Environment controls whether the environment is shown as each tool is executed Initial directory controls whether the current directory is shown as each tool is executed Figure 2 19 Options Dialog Build Tab 31 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 7 File Dependencies A typical project will contain dependencies between files for example one C file may include one or more header files In complex projects source files will include or depend upon others and this can quickly become difficult to manage However the HEW provides a dependency scanning mechanism whereby all files in a project are checked for dependencies Once complete the project window will display an up to date list with all the project file dependencies gt To update a project s dependencies Select Build gt Update All Dependencies or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Update All Dependencies from the pop up menu Initially the dependencies for all files are contained within the Dependencies folder figure 2 20 i 2 8 Configuring the Workspace Window If you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window a pop up menu will be invoked Select the Configure View menu option
54. Count default is 1 Syntax st lt mode gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Type of single step optional instruction Steps by assembly instruction line Steps by source code line lt count gt Numeric Number of steps optional default 1 Example STEP 9 Steps code for 9 steps 5 66 STEP_MODE Abbreviation SM Description Selects the step mode Syntax sm lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Step mode Auto Selects the mode automatically Assembly Steps by assembly language instruction Source Steps by source code line Example STEP_MODE auto Selects the step mode automatically When the Editor window is active execution steps by source code line When the Disassembly window is active execution steps by assembly 356 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual language instruction 5 67 STEP_OUT Abbreviation SP Description Steps the program out of the current function i e a step up This works for both assembly language and source level debugging Syntax sp Parameter Type Description none Steps the program out of the current function Example SP Steps the program out of the current function 5 68 STEP_OVER Abbreviation SO Description Performs a specified number of instructions from current PC This command differs from STEP in that it does not perform single step operation in subro
55. Declaration animal h line 12 Go to Definition animal h line 12 Cancel Figure 13 7 C Configure view dialog Another useful facility is the capability of viewing the base or derived classes for a certain selection gt To view the Base or derived classes 1 Select the class that interests you in the navigation view 2 Right click and view the pop up menu 3 To see the derived classes for the selection click the Show Derived Classes menu item To see the base classes for the selection click the Show Base Classes menu item 4 Depending on the selection a dialog is displayed which shows the class structure selected in an expanded tree format 5 Click OK to close this dialog once you have the information you require 13 2 C Function and defines navigation components These components simply add the function and define definitions to the navigation view It is then possible to jump to these definitions by double clicking on the label you wish to view 161 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 162 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 14 Smart Editor Another feature of the High Performance Embedded Workshop is its smart edit facility This is enabled by default for all C source files This feature allows the HEW editor to access C navigation information and provide auto completion help when using C classes and member functions gt To view the Smart edit
56. EEEN EIEE DEEE TEE EE 244 AAO C CE EX Pressi Ons honie eias EE EEE ER REEK 244 4 10 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels ce ecesceseeseeeseeseeseeseeeceeceeeeseeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees 245 4 10 4 Debugging an Overlay Program eeececceseesseeeceseeseeseeseeseceeeeseeseeseeseeneeeeeeaeeaees 246 Looking at Variables oi c cececesateestensticecesous en censsvccegannavasenssederebanadeesesenbugegnseneqasoeceecstedes ATII Tooltip Watch sccscccsccssenscassccsescesscectacescsuasesedessesavcusrcozasnaznassstarcszesnaziasastenesa E TE AsV 2 Tinstant Waterss irra asie eE ETETE EEA resect 4113 Watch WNdO Wessie atis E EAEE ERN KEAR AA LOCAlS MO A E sb buesest Mauss ialleaesiayiued Viewing the Profile Information ceeceecceseeseeteeeeceececeeseesecseceeeecenseaeeaeeseeeseeeeaeeaeees 41271 Stack Information Piles s cccsssecssoscssgeastecarestoucase ss AE AAE NEA SE 4 12 2 Profile Information Files 4 12 3 Loading Stack Information Files cccsesesessceseeseeseceeceeceeeeseeseceeceeeeaeeneeaeeaees 253 4124n Enabling the Profiles cece ccecsivccacccsecuccseeveascaescenncecvviaguaceveesexcevsavsdosveccensovesveioreuntes 254 4 12 5 Specifying Measuring Mode ceeeeseesceseeseceeeeseeseesececeeceeeeseeseeaeeneeeeeeneeaeeaees 254 4 12 6 Executing the Program and Checking the Results ccceceseseseseeeeeeeeeseeneeeees 255 4 12 77 AISE SWC ass aiian aiia aa i A IA A E TEETE 255 412 8 Tree SHGCt js svssssscecaagiztassabssacsidivs
57. Embedded Workshop will attempt to locate help on that selected item The help files which will be searched are listed in the Help tab of the Customize dialog gt To add a new help file 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Help tab see figure 6 7 Customize C C Standard Library Help e hew2 tools hitachi s C C Standard Library Help v Figure 6 7 Customize Dialog Help Tab 2 Click the Add button The Add Help File dialog will be displayed figure 6 8 3 Enter a description of the help file into the Title field 4 Enter the full path of the help file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking on the Browse button 5 Click OK to define the new help file Add Help File Programming in ANSI C c files help ansi hip Figure 6 8 Add Help File Dialog 108 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual To make a help file the default choice select it from the Default help file drop down list or set it to None if you would like to be prompted for a help file when F1 is pressed 6 4 Specifying Workspace Options The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to control several aspects of a workspace via the Options dialog figure 6 9 To invoke it select Tools gt Options and select the Workspace ta
58. End address of the coverage measurement range Examples COVERAGE RANGE Measures the coverage of addresses between H 1000 and H 1000 H 10FF FH 10FF CVR Displays the range of coverage measurement 330 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 26 COVERAGE SAVE Abbreviation CVS Description Saves the coverage information in a COV or TXT file If a wrong file extension is specified an error message will be output Syntax cvs lt filename gt Parameter Type Description filename Character File name string Examples COVERAGE_SAVE TEST Saves the coverage information in the TEST COV file CVS COVERAGE COV Saves the coverage information in the COVERAGE COV file 5 27 DEFAULT_OBJECT_FORMAT Abbreviation DO Description Specifies the default format for loading object program files The format specified with this command is only valid when the format specification is omitted from the FILE_LOAD command Syntax do lt format gt Parameter Type Description none Displays the default format settings lt format gt Keyword Object format Binary Binary type Elf Dwarf2 Elf Dwarf2 type IntelHex Intel Hex type S Record S type Example DEFAULT_OBJECT_FORMAT Displays the default format settings DO binary Specifies the binary format as the default format 331 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 28 DISASSEMBLE Abbreviation DA Description
59. Hes Record Obiect Reader 3 0 1 0 1 0 100 Figure 5 13 Component not found icon 5 8 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual On Demand components The HEW version 3 0 onwards has the concept of on demand components These components are not automatically loaded by the application or the debugger component These components can be loaded by the user or as part of the project generation process gt To load or unload an on demand component manually 1 2 3 Intermediate state component Click the Project gt Components menu item The component gallery dialog is displayed This is displayed in figure 5 14 Select the component you wish to load Click the load button The components image should change to the loaded state If you wish to unload a component Select the component Click the unload button The components image should change to the unloaded state Click OK to verify the changes Component Gallery x Project 3 Application Extensions ITRON component eal ma Loaded component OSEK component Cancel Custom memory view component Pin view component Unloaded component Loa Unload il Figure 5 14 Component Gallery Note Each project in your workspace can have different components loaded and unloaded If you have multiple projects you can use the Multiple projects and All projects items to change a components load statu
60. Loading unloading a Project into from a Workspace scceccesceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeaeeaee 37 2 14 Relative projects paths in the Workspace cece cece cseeeceecseeeeseeeesesaeeecseseeeeeaeeees 38 215 Us r folders in the workspace ieiasccccessveccdsvcuncccsavecescavcescedvevesesecvesncescuvasuteuscencescuestutevvenses 39 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 ii High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Advanced Build Features ccccccccssccccssseccssssceeessseceesseeeessseeeenees 41 The Build Process Revisited we 4l 3 1 1 What is a Build 41 Creating a Custom Build Phase 43 Ordering Build Phases 47 3 3 1 Build Phase Order 48 3 3 2 Build File Phase Order 51 Setting Custom Build Phase Options vol 3AT Options Tabs sccccvecdascsscssdesesescsdessessavsavtsceanaressavanstevedvareeaasvaters AKAR TIELA a E aN 52 3 4 2 Output Files Tabiissosin errire se SSE SEELE EEA EES 53 3 430 y Dependent Files Tabris iniia ee iE EAER 55 File Mapping Sinos ureo ena e a n a a a a a a a id 57 Controlling the B ildssssnennosn nr E E KEE E 59 Logging Build Outputs ierosin esse rors aa N E RER ETER EE AA ERT ES 60 Changing Toolchain Version ccs cssessicccecaisssvsvsseossaceccetsvatessceasensaacazteve reine sesaseseesaveacdesseas 61 Using an External Debug ger sssccvscsssvisoessoxevesssevi
61. MEMORY_EDIT ME Modifies memory contents 48 MEMORY FILL MF Fills a memory area 49 MEMORY FIND MI Finds a string in an area of memory 50 MEMORY_MOVE MV Moves a block of memory 51 MEMORY_TEST MT Tests a block of memory 52 OPEN_WORKSPACE OW Opens a workspace 53 PROFILE PR Enables or disables profile 54 PROFILE_DISPLAY PD Displays profile information 55 PROFILE _SAVE PS Saves the profile information to file 56 QUIT QU Exits HEW 57 RADIX RA Sets default input radix 58 REGISTER_DISPLAY RD Displays register values 59 REGISTER_SET RS Changes register contents 60 REMOVE FILE RF Removes a file from the current project 61 RESET RE Resets CPU 62 RESPONSE RS Sets a window refresh area 63 SLEEP Delays command execution 64 STATUS STA Displays the debugging platform status 65 STEP ST Steps program by instructions or source lines 66 STEP_MODE SM Sets the step mode 67 STEP_OUT SP Steps out of the current function 308 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table 5 1 Simulator Debugger Commands cont No Command Name Abbreviation Function 68 STEP_OVER SO Steps program not stepping into functions 69 STEP_RATE SR Sets or displays rate of stepping 70 SUBMIT SU Executes a command file 71 SYMBOL ADD SA Defines a symbol 72 SYMBOL CLEAR SC Deletes a symbol 73 SYMBOL LOAD SL Loads a symbol information file 74 SYMBOL SAVE SS Saves a symbol information file 75 SYMBOL VIEW SV
62. New Build Phase Dialog Step 2 The input file group list contains the current file groups defined for the project It is possible to define multiple input file groups by selecting the Multiple Groups entry in the input file group list Selecting this list entry displays the dialog in figure 3 3c Select Groups Assembly source file Binary file OC header file Cancel OC list file MC source file C header file C list file MC source file CPU information file Expanded assembly source file Figure 3 3c Modify multiple input file groups Once this choice has been made the input file group selection is displayed as Multiple Groups This dialog allows the user to choose multiple input file groups for the custom phase being added to the project To select a file group check the box next to the file groups name One or more file groups can be selected in this dialog 44 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The third step figure 3 3d requests the fundamental information about the new build phase Enter the name of the phase into the Phase name field Enter the location of the program file into the Command field do not insert any command line options as these options are specified via the Options menu of the HEW menu bar Specify the default options for the phase i e what options you would like new files to take when added to the project into the De
63. OK to add the extension to the File Extensions list 21 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Add File Ext Eile extension T asm F Z Cancel File group Extension belongs to an existing group Assembly source file C Extension belongs to a new group A Associated application Oren Assembly source file E _ Figure 2 10 Add File Extension Dialog Existing Group In addition to opening a file with the editor the File Extensions dialog allows you to associate any application with any file group so that when you double click on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace then the appropriate application is launched with the file Figure 2 11 shows the association between a word processor and the extension DOC File Extensions Extension Group a Ipp C list file cpp C source file Cancel cpu CPU information file Text editor Word processor doc Documents ddd B exp Expanded assembly source file ERED Librarian Se lib Library file lsl Library list file Open with sct Library section list file map Linkage map file fsy Linkage symbol file No application f J obj Object file S kn Pramraceccad comes fila Fa b Figure 2 11 File Groups and Applications 22 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To associate an application wi
64. ON i Optimize OFF Set Compiler Options List File YES Debug OFF Optimize OFF Set Assembler Options List File YES Debug ON A Sine YES Set Linker options Map File YES Library Files Figure 2 2 Editing a Project 14 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 1 Adding Files to a Project Before you can build your application you must first inform the High performance Embedded Workshop which files it is composed of gt To add a files to a project 1 Select Project gt Add Files select Add Files from the Workspace window s pop up menu see figure 2 3 or press INS when the Workspace window is selected Open dbsct c Build dbsct c Build Options E Add Files INS Remove Files Exclude Build dbsct c Version Control Configure View iv Allow Docking Hide Properties Show Differences Figure 2 3 Project Pop up Menu 2 The Add dialog will be displayed 3 Select the file s that you want to add and then click Add There are a number of other ways to add new files to the project These are described below e Clicking right button on an open file in the editor window displays a pop up menu option figure 2 4 If the file is already in the project then the Add File to Project menu option is disabled Selecting the Add File t
65. Set Batch File dialog box or choose Play from the pop up menu to execute the command file The Play menu is displayed in gray while the file is running and can be used when the command file execution stops and control returns to the user 282 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 19 4 Stopping Command Execution Choose Stop from the pop up menu to stop command execution The Stop menu becomes valid during command execution 4 19 5 Specifying a Log File Choose Set Log File from the pop up menu to open the Open Log File dialog box in which a log file to store the command execution results can be specified Open Log File Log File D Browse si Figure 4 83 Open Log File Dialog Box Enter the name of a log file log The logging option is automatically set and the name of the file is shown on the window title bar Opening a previous log file will ask the user if they wish to append or overwrite the current log 4 19 6 Starting or Stopping Logging Choose Logging from the pop up menu to toggle logging to file on and off When logging is active the button becomes effective Note that the contents of the log file cannot be viewed until logging is completed or temporarily disabled by clearing the check box Re enabling logging will append to the log file 4 19 7 Entering a Full Path to the File It is recommended that the full path to a file is specified as a file name in
66. Setting Display Step 5 5 Specify the stack area in Step 5 This is done by setting the initial value of the stack pointer and the stack size The initial value of the stack areas depends on the CPU selected in Step 1 Note The stack area is defined by stacksct h which is generated by the HEW If stacksct h has been modified by an editor it cannot be modified from Project gt Edit Project Configuration in the HEW To move to Step 6 click the Next gt button in Step 5 195 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual What ing files would you like to create IV Vector Definition Files Vector Handlers PowerON_Reset 0 Power On Rese Manual_Reset 1 Manual Reset Ej Finish Cancel Figure 3 7 Vector Setting Display Step 6 6 Specify the vector in Step 6 Vector Definition Files Checking generates a vector definition file and a vector table setting function definition file Vector Handlers Handler Displays the handler program name of the reset vector To modify the handler program after selecting the handler program name by clicking on it enter the new handler program name Note that if the handler program is modified a reset program resetprg c is not generated Vector Displays a description of the vector Note Since the generated reset program and interrupt functions are samples be sure to refer to the CPU hardware manual To move to Step 7 click the Next gt button in Step 6 19
67. Text noi ccveitespedcossevcvecesteacessecuecscvstvevcaue duresevsvvaveseveasevevstesnaesvencencevreuedeieees 73 4 5 2 Finding Text in Multiple Files 20 0 0 eeeeceeccesceceeseeseeeeceeeeeceeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 74 45 3 Replacing Texten EE E a 74 4 5 4 Jumping to a Specified Line ee ec eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseceeeseeseeseeaeeaeeeeeeeeeaseneeas 75 BookMarks a NAA AA E A a EEN NENNE 75 Printing a File si scis sexes csvsass seve asn rava torsen a EaI AKOPA KEEKSID PEESO saa vecedavanaanaiaascsvasns 76 Configuring Text Lay outsicesscczccsssvcsccesivctccstavescienneacaseseveascevsebncenavsdestevavaisesaucdstausteaeito eres 77 A821 Page Setpro E E E E E 77 4 8 2 Changing Tabset Eea SER EE EER EE E R 78 4 8 3 Atto Ind ntation mearen oe a AE ATE REA E KE T ARa TA 79 Splitting a Window cisccccssisescscssscessavssecssnsascsasevasceaszeancensasasciavavscsesnssavstaseazsecsavassstavezsteveass 80 Configuring Text sosis R REEERE E 81 4 10 1 Changing the Editor Font cc cececeseeseeseeseesceeseeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 81 Syitax Colorno n horiet sristi ET a EE EEEE E eave E EE S 81 Templates p a EEA AE 84 412 1 Defining a Templates ocssceveosccecesncessvensssspeestarsavererersovatensncauerstentesie R 84 4 12 2 Deleting a Template sristi nrn EEE ENEE SEEE EE SS a 86 412 3 Ins rtinig a Templates ccsccisisesssszssesssesseccecsazssnevasavcvscsszasnsaveascvstvascnnsavavesavavascneaons 86 4 13 5 1 5 2 5 3 5
68. User s Manual 5 5 Viewing and Editing Component Properties To view information regarding a component select it from the Registered components list and then click the Properties button The properties dialog will be displayed with the General tab selected figure 5 4 This tab displays the name version and location of the selected component None of the information on this tab is editable H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain 5 0 2 0 Properties 24x General Information Environment Name H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain Version 5 0 2 0 Location c hewtools hitachi h8 5_0_2 Cancel Figure 5 4 Properties Dialog General Tab Select the Information tab to view any information about the component figure 5 5 This may include copyright information enhancements bug fixes user notes and so on H8S_ H8 300 Standard Toolchain 5 0 2 0 Properties 21 x General Information Environment Information High performance Embedded Workshop H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain Ver 5 0 2 0 H8S H8 300 C C Library Generator Ver 1 0 02 H8S H8 300 C C Compiler Ver 4 0 04 Figure 5 5 Properties Dialog Information Tab 95 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Select the Environment tab if it exists to view and edit a component s environment settings figure 5 6 This dialog is most commonly used to modify the environment of a toolchain H8S H8 300 Sta
69. Version control VCDIR Virtual version control directory COMMENT Comment Version control Pi AA AA A A AA AH Ai AHA H HH S BARA n n LINE Line number of an error warning 375 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual For example the placeholders will be expanded as shown in table C 2 Table C 2 Placeholder Expansions Example VCDIR c project is mapped to x vc project COMMENT Please Enter Comment dialog is invoked Placeholder Expanded placeholder example FULLFILE c new workspace project file src FILEDIR c new workspace project FILENAME file src FILELEAF file EXTENSION src WORKSPDIR c new workspace WORKSPNAME workspace PROJDIR c new workspace project PROJECTNAME project CONFIGDIR c new workspace project debug CONFIGNAME debug HEWDIR c new TCINSTALL c new toolchains renesas sh 51 1 TOOLDIR c new toolchains renesas sh 51 1 TEMPDIR c Temp WINDIR c Windows WINSYSDIR c Windows System EXEDIR v ive win32 USERNAME JHARK PASSWORD 214436 LINE 12 In table C 2 we are assuming that a file path is c new workspace project file src a workspace named workspace is located at c hew workspace a project named project is located at c hew workspace proj
70. Visual SourceSafe 139 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe 140 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands sass sais sesdsscisessaasssaes sexsdacttyssscsnesa OKEN STENENE REKO 141 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control cccceccesesseeseeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeate 141 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control cceeeeceereereeeeeee 141 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control cee 141 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control 142 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation cceeeseescesceseeeeeeeeceeceseeseeaeeaeeeeeeseeeeaeeaes 142 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File ecesesscseeecceeeeseesecseeeceeeeeeeaeeseeaeeeeeenseaeeaeeaee 142 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a Pile vsiscscccsscssesssassassesevasevavasevsssssastevesss sesedesanasneten seasons 142 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options ccecceceeseeseeseeeeceseeseeeeeceeeeseeseeaeseeceeeeseeaeenees 144 10 Network Facihties 2 25 Avian vis E E a aeiae LOD OVERVIEW aie a toes eases ch catoasan AAE E E NTE E AANA 10 1 1 Enabling network access 10 1 2 Setting the administrator user s pasSWOT cecceseeseeseeteeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeseeeeeeeneeae 146 10 1 3 Adding new users to the system s sseeeesesssesreeeeeesesesrsrstststssesrsrsisesresrseeseseseest 148 10 1 4 Changing your password ccssscseecesseeseesecsecesceseeseesecaeeeeceeeeaeeaeeaeseeseaeeaeeaeen
71. aaa aoe 1 2 2 The Menu Bar ag Ezar The Toolbars seis Oe SONG ASS AIOE ON od 12 4 The Workspace WINdOW isccce secteur a E OEE tetera 7 1 253 The Editor WindOwsiissestssssvestscett osetia cove ssssten tev tan eater TI SEA 9 1 2 6 The Output Window sisccssesscasisccstsssvasesssvisicevsevasesasviescovsineaessscdeeseessarecnavseassvanveee 10 TOT De Stats Bats A AEA EEA A E A ANAT 11 L3 The Help System iperito oe kE E ERR EERE 11 LA Launching the HEW see E EE E E EE 12 15 Exiting the HEW ir iini ate aT AANA AA S ES 12 1 6 Component System Overview ccceccsscesessecsecesceseeseesecseesceeeeseesecaeceeeseeaeeaeeaeeeeeneeeaeeaes 12 2 Build Basics ZI The Build Process isccsjsyieedse vanced vets canveusscnssvavcensovnccaiaweve EEEE EEEO D2 a Project File Shardin OE EE EE TA OEE TE RTA es 2 2 1 Adding Files to a Project 2 2 2 Removing Files from a Project ccescesssssceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeseeseeaeeeeseeeeaeeneee 17 2 2 3 Excluding a Project File from Build ceceeeseeseeseesecseeeeceeeeaeeseeseeeeceeeeaeeaeeas 19 2 2 4 Including a Project File in Build oo ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeecneceeceeeeaeeaeeneeeeseseeseeneees 19 2 3 File Extensions and File Group ccccccssssscssesececcessessoncenevsceesssacensensesesescsacensoneeeassasense 19 2 4 Specifying How to Build a File ee es eecesceeseeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeceeeesesseeeeseeeeaeeaeeaee 25 25 gt Build Confi surations iseset ieren nr TEA E R ET E 26 2 5 1 Selec
72. addr gt lt size gt lt count gt lt option gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file to which data is saved string lt addr gt Numeric Address from which data is output lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF lt option gt Keyword Specifies a new file or appends to an existing file optional makes a new file when abbreviated A Adds the data to the existing file Interrupt lt interrupt typel gt lt priority gt Parameter Type Description lt interrupt type1 gt Numeric Type of interrupt Interrupt vector number 0 to H FF lt priority gt Numeric Interrupt priority optional default 0 Oto 17 Examples BREAK_SEQUENCE 1000 2000 A break occurs when addresses H 1000 and H 2000 are passed in this order BS 1000 A break occurs when address H 1000 is executed 326 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 17 BUILD Abbreviation BU Description Starts a build operation on the current project Syntax bu Parameter Type Description None Starts a build operation on the current project Examples build Starts a standard build process on the current project 5 18 BUILD_ALL Abbreviation BL Description Starts a build all operation on the current project Syntax bl Parameter Type Description None Starts a build all operation on
73. all open windows in sequence vertically so that they occupy the entire editor window with no overlapping edges e Window gt Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows at the bottom of the editor window e Window gt Close All Close all open editor windows The files within the editor can be displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files gt To show files in notebook 1 Select Tools gt Options The Tools Options dialog box will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Set the Show files in notebook check box as appropriate 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 4 2 1 The Editor Toolbars The editor has four related toolbars Editor Search Bookmarks and Templates They provide a shortcut to the functions of the editor which you will use most often The following sections describe each buttons function 4 2 2 Editor Toolbar Buttons O New File The new file button creates a new source file window with a default name When you save the file you can specify your own filename gt Open File Click this button if you want to open a file It invokes a standard file chooser select the file which you want to open and then click Open Save File Saves the active source file Gi Save All Files Saves all of the files in the editor 66 High performance Embedded Workshop User s
74. and cycles for transferring data SLEEP Instruction The simulator debugger does not add the number of cycles considering the case when the SLEEP instruction is used for halting program Standard I O and file I O processing The standard I O and file I O processing are specific functions for the simulator debugger and they are not added to the number of cycles Note that the standard I O and file I O processing are the period while the branch to the position specified with the system call address of the BSR and JSR instructions is completed to return to the called source after the I O processing 182 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 12 Break Conditions The simulator debugger provides the following conditions for interrupting the simulation of a user program during execution e Break due to the satisfaction of a break command condition e Break due to the detection of an error during execution of the user program e Break due to a trace buffer overflow e Break due to execution of the SLEEP instruction e Break due to the STOP button Break Due to Satisfaction of a Break Command Condition There are five break commands as follows e BREAKPOINT Break based on the address of the instruction executed e BREAK_ACCESS Break based on access to a memory range e BREAK DATA Break based on the value of data written to memory e BREAK REGISTER Break based on the value of data written to a register e BREAK SEQUENCE Break b
75. appropriate check boxes as necessary 59 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 7 Logging Build Output Tf you would like to write the results of each build to file then invoke the Customize dialog by selecting Tools gt Customize and select the Log tab figure 3 19 Set the Generate log file check box and then enter the full path of the log file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Customize Figure 3 19 Tools Customize Dialog Log Tab 60 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 8 Changing Toolchain Version If two or more versions of the same toolchain are registered in the HEW you can choose a version of the toolchain on the Change Toolchain Version dialog shown in Figure To invoke the dialog select Tools gt Change Toolchain Version Choose one of the versions from the Available versions drop down list and click the OK button to enforce your choice Change Toolchain Version 24 x Toolchain name Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Current version 6 0 0 0 Cancel Available versions 5 0 2 0 H8S H8 300 Assembler H8S H8 300 C C Compiler 4 0 04 H8S H8 300 C C Library Generator 1 0 02 OptLinker 7 1 07 Figure 3 20 Change Toolchain Version Dialog To show information of toolchain components select a tool from the Toolchain build phases
76. as Motorola S Record file TESTFILE MOT FS D USER ANOTHER A22 H 4000 Saves address range H 4000 H 4FFF as H 4FFF Motorola S Record format file ANOTHER A22 5 34 FILE_LUNLOAD Abbreviation FU Description Unloads a file from memory at a specified offset If no offset is supplied then memory will be scanned and the first occurrence of the file will be unloaded 336 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Syntax fu lt format gt lt filename gt lt offset gt Parameter Type Description lt format gt Keyword Object format optional default DEFAULT_OBJECT_FORMAT settings Binary Binary type Elf Dwarf2 Elf Dwarf2 type IntelHex Intel Hex type S Record S type lt filename gt Character string File name lt offset gt Numeric Offset at which the file will be removed optional Examples FILE_UNLOAD TEST A22 FU ANOTHER 200 Unloads the first occurrence of file test a22 from memory Unloads file another from memory location H 200 337 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 35 FILE_VERIFY Abbreviation FV Description Verifies file contents against memory contents The file data must be in a Motorola S Record format The file extension default is MOT Syntax fv lt filename gt lt offset gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character File name string lt offset gt Numeric Offset to be added to fi
77. but the response such as for the break button becomes slower Set a frequency appropriate for the machine used 354 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Syntax rp lt instruction number gt Parameter Type Description lt instruction number gt Numeric Specifies the frequency in number of instruction executions the window is to update 1 to 65535 optional default 40000 Example RESPONSE 9 Sets the window to refresh every 9 information executions 5 63 SLEEP Abbreviation None Description Delays command execution for a specified period Syntax sleep lt milliseconds gt Parameter Type Description lt milliseconds gt Numeric Delayed time ms The value must always be specified in decimal Example SLEEP D 9000 Delays 9 seconds 5 64 STATUS Abbreviation STA Description Displays the current status of the debugging platform The contents of the Platform sheet in the Status window is displayed Syntax sta Parameter Type Description None Displays the current status of the debugging platform 355 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Example STA Displays the current status of the debugging platform 5 65 STEP Abbreviation ST Description Single step in source line or instruction units execution Performs a specified number of instructions from current PC Default is stepping by lines if source debugging is available
78. can enter a number or C C expression in the Value field You can choose whether to modify the whole register contents a masked area floating or flag bits by selecting an option from the drop down list the contents of this list depend on the CPU model and selected register When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 4 7 6 Using Register Contents Use the value contained in a CPU register by specifying the register name prefixed by the character e g R1 PC R6L or HER3 when you are entering a value elsewhere in the HEW for example when displaying a specified address in the Disassembly or Memory windows 4 8 Executing Your Program This section describes how you can execute your program s code You will learn how to do this by either running your program continuously or stepping single or multiple instructions at a time 4 8 1 Running from Reset To reset your user system and run your program from the reset vector address choose Debug gt Reset Go or click the Go Reset toolbar button The program will run until it hits a breakpoint or a break condition is met You can stop the program manually by choosing Debug gt Halt or by clicking the Halt toolbar button 5 Note The program will start running from whatever address is stored in the Reset Vector location Therefore it is impor
79. character string as a whole word then check the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 7 If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box 8 If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions check box Refer to appendix B Regular Expressions for further information 9 If you clicked Find Next the editor will search for the first occurrence of the search string Click Replace if you want to replace it Click Replace All to replace all occurrences or click Cancel to stop the replace action If you select Selection in Replace In selected range of the text is replaced If you select whole file the whole files are replaced If you select all open files all files that are currently open in the editor have the replace operation carried out on them 4 5 4 Jumping to a Specified Line gt To jump to a line in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Select Edit gt Goto Line press CTRL G or select Goto Line from the editor window s local menu A goto line dialog box will be displayed figure 4 5 3 Enter into the dialog box the number of the line that you want to go to and then click OK
80. check box if you don t want the HEW to abort the execution of the phase if any of the input files don t exist Select Read Output On Fly checkbox to display build output as it happens rather than showing the output at the end of each phase execution Modify MyPhase C tools mptool exe E E Figure 3 7 Modify Phase Dialog Command Tab 6 Select the Environment tab figure 3 8 to edit the environment settings for the phase Use the Add Modify and Remove buttons to add modify and remove environment variables The operation is the same as discussed in the previous section Click OK when all modifications have been made 49 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Modify MyPhase PATH c dos c Stools SHOWALL FALSE ENV 1024 fable PETTY Figure 3 8 Modify Phase Dialog Environment Tab 50 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 3 2 Build File Phase Order If you were to select a C source file from the Workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File or press R2 you would expect the file to be compiled Likewise if you were to select an assembly source file from the workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File you would expect the file to be assembled The connection between file group and which phase s to execute is managed by the Build File Order tab of the
81. continuation mode 183 Table 2 4 Error Message High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Simulation Errors Error Cause Processing in Continuation Mode Address Error Odd PC value Instruction was fetched from the internal I O area Access in words from odd number addresses Access in longwords from odd number addresses Operates in the same way as the actual device operation Memory Access Error Access to a memory area that has not been allocated Write to a memory area having the write protect attribute Read from a memory area having the read disable attribute Access to an area where memory does not exist Write to the EEPROM by instructions other than EEPMOV On memory write nothing is written on memory read all bits are read as 1 Illegal Instruction Execution of a code that is not an instruction Execution of MOV B Rn SP or MOV B SP Rn Illegal Operation Incorrect relation between the values in the C flag or H flag of the CCR in the DAA or DAS instruction and the values before adjustment Zero division executed by the DIVXU or DIVXS instruction or overflow Always stops Continues simulation but the result is not guaranteed Continues simulation but the result is not guaranteed When a simulation error occurs in the stop mode the simulator debugger returns to the command input wait state after stopping instruction execu
82. different lines 4 Click OK to keep the changes 153 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Format iews Disassembly D LHS Different Lines D LHS Moved Lines D RHS Different Lines D RHS Moved Lines HEW Sample Text Add Modify Remove x Figure 11 6 Format views dialog 154 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 12 Technical Support The High performance Embedded Workshop has a number of integrated technical support features gt To check for HEW product updates or service packs 1 Select Help gt Technical support gt Check website for updates 2 Your default web browser is invoked and defaults to the HEW download page for your region 3 Browse this area for HEW updates to fix bugs or add new features Occasionally you may experience some unforeseen problems with the HEW application If a problem does occur that results in a application crash the HEW bug tracking program will be invoked automatically This allows you to compile a bug report and this can then be sent to your technical support contact in a variety of ways It is also possible to invoke this tracker program manually This is described below gt To create and send a HEW bug report 1 Select Help gt Technical support gt Create Bug Report 2 Detailed information is generated from your HEW system This may take some time The bug report dialog is then displayed This is shown in figure 12
83. e Function code H 09 16 bit address One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 Buffer size 4 Input buffer start address e Function code H 19 24 bit address H 29 32 bit address One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 Buffer size 4 Input buffer start address The number returned when the file was opened e Buffer size input The size of the area for storing the read data A maximum of 256 bytes can be stored e Start address of input buffer input The start address of the buffer for storing input data 298 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 10 FPUTS Writes character string data to a file H 0A H 1A H 2A Writes character string data to a file The NULL code that terminates the character string is not written to the file Parameter Block Parameters Return value output 0 Normal completion 1 Error File number input e Function code H 0A 16 bit address One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 Output buffer start address e Function code H 1A 24 bit address H 2A 32 bit address One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 4 The number returned when the file was opened Start address of output buffer input The start address of the buffer used for storing the output data 299 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual FEOF Checks for e
84. feature which outputs tool information regarding the registered components to a file This allows you to retrieve information on the entire HEW system This information can then be sent to your technical support contact if you are experiencing problems with the HEW gt To output tool information 1 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item 2 Click the Tool information button A standard windows file save dialog is displayed 3 Choose the file location and click OK 4 A file is created in the chosen location with the current registered tool setup of the HEW 2 If any of the components have problems these can be seen in the tools administration dialog If the icon has an additional icon this explains the problem There are two additional icons that can be displayed If a component is found but cannot be used due to it being an old version or another dependent component is not available then 99 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual the icon in figure 5 12 is used to show this If the component is not located where the registration file says it is then the icon in figure 5 13 is used to show this Registered components Component ae Tool hain oe LAR TINY SERIES H8 300HN na sW Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Stand 3 Hiksabhi CinmnarH AICI asnanimna Chane Figure 5 12 Incompatible component found icon H8S H8 300 Series Simulator T arget Platform HMon Embedded Monitor Platform Intel
85. following items are displayed Times Number of times instruction was executed Pass Execution status of conditional branch instructions T A branch occurred because the condition was satisfied F No branch has occurred because the condition was not satisfied Address Instruction Address Assembler Disassembled display Source C C or assembly language source When the Coverage window is closed the acquired coverage information and the conditions to acquire information will be cleared e Coverage window specifying source file 274 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Coverage H 00000800 H 0000081f x Functions Statistic Status Times Pass Address Assembler a PowerON_Reset_PC 87 Enable 1 00000800 MOY L BIH Manual_Reset_PC 0 Enable 1 oooo0802 ADD H l 00000804 LDC R2 1 00000806 MOV L BiH V Enable All 00000808 JSR BRZ Clear All 00000080A NOP oooo0soc MOY H I 00000080E EXTU B R3 1 00000810 LDC R4 L 00000812 NOP 1 00000814 MOV L BiH 1 00000816 JSR ERZ 0 00000081E NOP Ho TENO 4 Figure 4 71 Coverage Window Specifying Source File This window is divided into two by a splitter e Leftside This window displays the coverage range and statistical information The following item is displayed Function List of functions Statistic Percentage of the instruction executed within the function Status Enable or Disable status of the respective func
86. found that the settings of the workspace differed from what I had set before The settings saved last are enforced Once HEW opens a workspace it is updated inside the memory HEW does not save the settings into a file until a user saves the workspace intentionally I want HEW to automatically specify default options to a file which is newly added to a project You can specify default options to a phase if the phase is a multiple build phase Select a phase from the Options menu If the phase is a multiple build phase a file list is displayed on the left hand side of the options dialog figure A 1 In the file list open a folder of a file group to which you want to specify your default options You will find a Default Options icon in the folder Select the icon specify options on the right hand side of the options dialog and click OK The options specified here will be given to any new file of that file group when it is first added to the project 369 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual C C source file E C source file 424 C source file Default Options Figure A 1 Options Dialog File List I selected Build gt Build All but the dependencies in the Projects tab of the Workspace window is not updated while selecting Build gt Build updates the dependencies Build gt Build All does not update the dependencies in the Proje
87. function for performance measurement of the user program 2 15 1 Profiler The profiler function displays the memory address and size allocated to functions and global variables the number of function calls and the profile data for the entire user program The profile data displayed differs according to the CPU Profile information is displayed in list tree and chart formats Profile information is useful in optimizing user programs by reducing the size and putting the most frequently called functions in line When using the profile information saved in a file it is possible to optimize user programs based on dynamic information using the optimizing linkage editor For details refer to section 4 12 Viewing the Profile Information and section 4 2 3 Optimize Option Profile in the Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual 186 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 15 2 Performance Analysis The performance analysis function displays the number of execution cycles and function calls for the specified function in the user program Since performance data for only the specified function is acquired simulation can be done faster For details refer to section 4 16 Analyzing Performance 2 16 Pseudo Interrupts The simulator debugger can generate pseudo interrupts during simulation in the following two ways 1 Pseudo interrupts generated by break conditions A pseudo interrupt can be generated using a break command to
88. g suo al H COMPILER Source File lt Lal ASSEMBLER L H Assembler Source Files Project LINKER Object ye Files Library Files Load Module Figure 2 1 Typical Build Process In the example shown in figure 2 1 the compiler is the first phase the assembler is the second phase and the linker is the third and final phase During the compiler phase the C source files from the project are compiled in turn during the assembler phase the assembler source files are assembled in turn During the linker phase all library files and output files from the compiler and assembler phases are linked together to produce the load module This module can then be downloaded and used by the debugger functionality in HEW The build process can be customized in several ways For instance you can add your own phase disable a phase delete phases and so forth These advanced build issues are left to chapter 3 Advanced Build Features In this chapter only the general principles and basic features will be detailed 13 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 Project Files In order for the HEW to be able to build your application you must first tell it which files should be in the project and how each file should be built figure 2 2 Add Project Files Remove Project Files Debug
89. gt Parameter Type Description None Deletes all functions lt index gt Numeric Index number of function to delete Examples ANALYSIS_RANGE_DELETE 6 AD 312 Deletes the function with index number 6 Deletes all functions High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 6 ASSEMBLE Abbreviation AS Description Assembles mnemonics and writes them into memory In assembly mode exits steps back 2 byte the Enter key steps forward a byte Syntax as lt address gt Parameter Type Description lt address gt Numeric Address at which to start assembling Example AS H 1000 Starts assembling from H 1000 5 7 ASSERT Abbreviation None Description Checks if an expression is true or false It can be used to terminate the batch file when the expression is false If the expression is false an error is returned This command can be used to write test harnesses for subroutines Syntax assert lt expression gt Parameter Type Description lt expression gt Expression Expression to be checked Example ASSERT RO 0x100 Returns an error if RO does not contain 0x100 313 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 8 BREAKPOINT Abbreviation BP Description Specifies a breakpoint at the address where the instruction is written Syntax bp lt address gt lt count gt lt Action gt Parameter Type Description lt addre
90. gt Administration 2 Click on the uninstaller button The Uninstall HEW Tool dialog is invoked figure 5 8 Uninstall HEW Tool my zi xi pasate Close Select the directory in which to begin the search for tools _ id hew20 debug Browse IV Include subfolders Start Located Tools which can be uninstalled Version Uninstall i Hip Installation Directory Component Search Status Idle Figure 5 8 Uninstall HEW Tool 3 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Check the Include subfolders check box if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 5 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 6 The results of the search are shown in the Located Tools which can be uninstalled list Select a component and click Uninstall to uninstall a component 7 Click Exit to exit the dialog A component may only be uninstalled if it is not currently registered with the HEW If you attempt to uninstall a tool which is registered then the dialog shown in figure 5 9 will be displayed In such a case you must return to the Tools Administration dialog via Tools gt Administration
91. has this facility The difference window can be invoked two ways The first is from the show differences menu item on the tools menu The second is via the workspace window pop up with the same name When using the pop up menu the current file selection is automatically added to the edit box Clicking the show differences menu item displays the dialog shown below in figure 11 1 LE aloe c hew projects myproject myproject dbsct c File in version control n n al ER 15 16 16 Vv pragma section DSEC n pragma section DSEC 13 static const struct 13 static const struct 1 char rom_s Start address of th 1 char rom_s Start address of the 20 char rom_e End address of the 20 char rom_e End address of the in a char ram s Start address of tk char ram s Start address of the 22 DTBL b 2 DTBL a __sectop D _ secend D _ sectop 73 __ sectop D _ secend D _ sectop R aff __sectop ABS8D _ secend SABS8D __sectop ABS8D _ secend SABS8D _ as ff __ sectop ABS16D _ secend ABS16 3 __ sectop ABS16D _ secend ABS16D 2 PS 26 he a pragma section BSEC a pragma section BSEC 2 static const struct 2 static const struct 28 char b 3s Start address of nc char bh 3 Start address of non 20 char h_e End address of non 7 char b End address of non in n BTBL n BTBL n p p 32 all Danehant2n ENS sre
92. in the Overlay dialog box otherwise the HEW will operate incorrectly First click one of the address ranges displayed in the Address list box The section groups assigned to the selected address range will then be displayed in the Section Name list box 246 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Click to select the section group with the highest priority among the displayed section groups Address Section Name 001000 001023 002000 00200B Peect O02 Psect12 Psect0O3 Psecti3 Cancel PsectOl1 Psectil Figure 4 42 Overlay Dialog Box Highest Priority Section Group Selected After selecting a section group clicking the OK button stores the priority setting and closes the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without storing the priority setting Note Within the address range used by the overlay function the debugging information for the section specified in the Overlay dialog box is referred to Therefore the same section of the currently loaded program must be selected in the Overlay dialog box 4 11 Looking at Variables This section describes how you can look at variables in the source program 4 11 1 Tooltip Watch The quickest way to look at a variable in your program is to use the Tooltip Watch feature gt To use Tooltip Watch Display the source file containing the variable that you want to examine on the Editor window Rest the mouse curs
93. include file Assembly list file Assembly source file C header file C list file C source file C header file C list file C source file Expanded assembly Hex file Library information file Linkage map file Linkage symbol file Figure 4 10 Format Views Dialog Font Tab 4 11 Syntax Coloring To enhance code readability the HEW editor can display specific strings i e keywords in different colors For instance C source code comments could be shown in green and C types e g int could be shown in blue The coloring method used can be specified on a file group by file group basis For example you can define different color schemes for a C source files text files map files or even your own files gt 81 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual To change existing colors 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the item underneath the icon in the tree you wish to modify the colour for This should be the file type e g C source file and correct keyword group e g identifier or pre processor 3 Select the Colour tab Modify the Foreground and Background color lists as desired The color System refers to the current window foreground and background settings in control panel 5 Click OK for the new colors to take effect gt To create new keyword groups 1 Select Tools gt Format Views
94. keep all of the paths correct The High performance Embedded Workshop also has the ability to define custom placeholders This means you can enter your own custom placeholder definition and decide upon its directory value Once defined this placeholder becomes available throughout the rest of the HEW system The placeholders can be defined on an application wide level so the placeholders are available to all workspaces and projects that use the HEW The other method of defining the placeholders is using the workspace wide custom placeholders this means the placeholders can only be used in the current workspace This list is only available when you have a workspace open Customize 21x Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Application wide custom placeholders Placeholder Directoy Modi Remove Workspace wide custom placeholders Placeholder Directoy Mod Remove De ee ee jai Figure 6 14 Customize Dialog Placeholder Tab To add a custom placeholder 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Placeholders tab figure 6 14 2 Choose whether you need to use an Application wide custom placeholder or Workspace wide custom placeholder Click Add on the adjacent button to the list you require 3 The dialog add New Custom Placeholder dialog is displayed figure 6 15 4 In the fi
95. know which areas in the device s address space are RAM ROM on chip registers or areas where memory is not allocated Therefore the memory map must be set up When you select the device type and mode in the project generator the HEW will automatically set up the map for that device and the mode in which the processor is operating For example in a device with internal ROM and RAM the areas where these are located in the device s memory map will be set by default When external memory is used the debugging platform requires to be informed 200 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual When using the simulator the memory map settings can be modified in the Memory tab of the Simulator System dialog box For details refer to section 4 21 2 Modifying the Memory Map and Memory Resource Settings In this case the settings can be referred to in the Simulator sheet of the Standard Toolchain dialog box Clicking the View button of the Standard Toolchain dialog box figure 3 12 displays the CPU hardware map dialog box figure 3 13 SimD ebug_H8S 26004 Be All Loaded Projects Ea Ox00000000 OxOO007FFF R W AC source file OxOOFFEOOO Ox0OFFEFBF R W Ch source file Ox0OFFF800 OxOOFFFF3F R W H E Assembly source file Ox0OFFFF60 OxOOFFFFFF RAW H E Linkage symbol file Figure 3 12 Standard Toolc
96. mnemonic Clicking the OK button stores the settings and starts searching Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without searching When a trace record that matches the search conditions is found the line for the trace record will be highlighted When no matching trace record is found a message dialog box will appear If a find operation is successful choosing Find Next from the pop up menu will move to the next found item 4 14 5 Clearing the Trace Information Choose Clear form the pop up menu to empty the trace buffer that stores the trace information If more than one Trace window is open all Trace windows will be cleared as they all access the same buffer 4 14 6 Saving the Trace Information in a File Choose Save from the pop up menu to open the Save As file dialog box which allows the user to save the contents of the trace buffer as a text file A range can be specified based on the PTR number saving the complete buffer may take several minutes Note that this file cannot be reloaded into the trace buffer 4 14 7 Viewing the Source File The Editor window corresponding to the selected trace record can be displayed in the following two ways e Select a trace record and choose View Source from the pop up menu Double click a trace record The Editor or Disassembly window opens and the selected line is marked with a cursor 264 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4
97. modules differ between devices but the typical modules are a DMA controller serial communications interface A D converter integrated timer unit bus state controller and watchdog timer Registers that are mapped to the microcomputer s address space controls the on chip peripheral modules The Memory window enables you to look at data in continuous memory addresses as byte word longword single precision floating point double precision floating point or ASCII values However registers of different sizes are allocated to non continuous memory addresses in the I O register To handle this register the HEW has the IO window to facilitate checking and setting up of these kinds of registers 4 5 1 Opening the IO Window To open the IO window select View gt CPU gt IO or click the View IO toolbar button Es Modules that match the on chip peripheral modules organize the I O register information When the IO window is first opened only a list of module names is displayed 230 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Name Address Value Access SRS System Control SYSCR OOFEFE39 H 0 MIEG o E INT O 0 E INT 0 E macs 0 Figure 4 24 IO Window 4 5 2 Expanding the I O Register Display To display the names addresses and values of the I O registers double click on the module name or select the module name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the Enter key Th
98. of the workspace need to be added to the make file See figure 3 23 5 Checking Scan dependencies whilst building makefile will force a dependency scan to ensure the make file creation is up to date 6 Select the radio button which is relevant for your makefile and then click OK Generate make file 24x For all configurations in the currently active project Cancel For all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace IV Scan dependencies whilst building make file Figure 3 23 Generate makefile Dialog The HEW will create a subdirectory make within the current workspace directory and then generate the makefile into it It is named after the selection with a mak extension for example the current project and configuration e g project_debug mak The executable HMAKE EXE located in the HEW installation directory is provided for you to execute the makefiles generated by the HEW It is not intended to execute makefiles which have been user modified gt To execute a makefile 1 Open a command window and change to the make directory where the makefile was generated 2 Execute HMAKE Its command line is HMAKE EXE lt makefile gt Note The degree portability of a generated makefile is entirely dependent upon how portable the project itself is For example any compiler options which include full paths to an output directory or include file directory will mean that when give
99. select Build gt Terminate Current Tool which will attempt to forcibly terminate the current process Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again I have a text file in the editor but it does not show any syntax coloring Ensure that you have named the file i e saved it and that the Enable syntax coloring check box is set on the Editor tab of the Tools Options dialog which is launched via Tools gt Options HEW checks a file group to which the file s extension belongs and decides whether the file is colored To view the current defined extensions and their file groups use the File Extensions dialog which is launched via Project gt File Extensions To view coloring information use the Format tab of the Tools Options dialog which is launched via Tools gt Options See the Syntax Coloring section in chapter 4 Using the Editor for details I want to change the settings of a tool but the Tools gt Administration menu option cannot be selected Tools gt Administration cannot be selected while a workspace is open To enter the Tool Administration dialog first close the current workspace I did not edit any of the project files But some of files were built again when I selected Build gt Build A file is built again if any of the fol
100. showing the information start address end address and size of the selected variable as default Clicking OK opens the Memory window 4 11 4 Locals Window The local variables and their values can be displayed in the Locals window Opening the Locals Window To open the Locals window choose View gt Symbol gt Locals or click the Locals toolbar button zl Locals oO OF x Value Ox00ffecO00 ol r Figure 4 49 Locals Window 251 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual As you debug your program the Locals window will be updated If a local variable is not initialized when defined then the value in the Locals window will be undefined until a value is assigned to the local variable The local variable values and the radix for local variable display can be modified in the same manner as in the Watch window 4 12 Viewing the Profile Information The profile function enables function by function measurement of the performance of the application program in execution This makes it possible to identify parts of an application program that degrade its performance and the reasons for such degradation The HEW displays the results of measurement in three windows according to the method and purpose of viewing the profile data 4 12 1 Stack Information Files The profile function allows the HEW to read the stack information files extension SNI which are output by the Optimiz
101. specify Interrupt as the action when a break condition is satisfied For details refer to Specifying the Action at Break in section 4 15 2 Setting a Breakpoint 2 Pseudo interrupts generated from the Trigger window A pseudo interrupt can be generated by clicking a button in the Trigger window For details refer to section 4 20 Generating a Pseudo Interrupt Manually If another pseudo interrupt occurs between a pseudo interrupt occurrence and its acceptance only the interrupt that has a higher priority can be accepted Note In the pseudo interrupts whether an interrupt is accepted is determined by interrupt information Priority not the vector number Note that when H 8 is specified as the priority level of an interrupt that interrupt is always accepted The simulator debugger does not simulate the operation of the interrupt controller 2 17 Coverage The simulator debugger acquires instruction coverage information during instruction execution within the measurement range specified by the user In the measurement range addresses are directly specified and all functions in a file whose name has been specified are set The status of each instruction execution can be monitored through the instruction coverage information In addition this information can be used to determine which part of a program has not been executed The Coverage window displays the acquired instruction coverage information The instruction c
102. the HEW By default the Welcome dialog box shown in figure 1 20 will be displayed Welcome 21x m Options iy 2 C Open a recent project workspace Administration fe Hew demo demo hws Z Cancel ii Z Browse to another project workspace Figure 1 21 Welcome Dialog To create a new workspace select Create a new project workspace and click OK To open one of recent project workspaces select Open a recent project workspace select a workspace from the drop down list and click OK The recent project workspace list displays the same information as that seen in the workspace most recently used file list This list appears on the file menu To open a workspace by specifying a workspace file HWS file select Browse to another project workspace and click OK To register a tool to or unregister a tool from the HEW click the Administration button see chapter 5 Tool Administration for details Click the Cancel button to use the HEW without opening a workspace 1 5 Exiting the HEW The HEW can be exited by selecting File gt Exit pressing ALT F4 or by selecting the close option from the system menu To open the system menu click the icon at the upper left corner of the HEW title bar If a workspace is open then the same workspace closedown procedure is followed as described in the previous section 1 6 Component System Overview
103. the PC or hardware breakpoints 213 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual include include include include lt no_float h gt lt stdio h gt lt math h gt lt stdlib h gt void main void void sort long a void change long a extern void srand unsigned int 0x00000a0c 0x00000a16 void main void long a 16 min max long j int i 0x00000a18 srand 1 000000820 gt I printf tHE Data Input HF n 0x00000a2c for i O i lt 16 i Ox00000a2e j rand 0x00000a36 if j lt 8 0x00000a38 J gt j H 0x00000a3a ali j 0z00000a44 printf a d 1d n i a i 0x00000a62 sort a Ox00000866 000000872 Ox00000874 printf Sorting results n for i O i lt 10 i printf a d 1d n i a i Figure 4 2 Editor Window and Address Column gt To switch off a column in all source files 1 Right click on the Editor window or select the Edit menu 2 Click the Define Column Format menu item 3 The Global Editor Column States dialog box is displayed 4 The check box indicates whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked the column is enabled If the check box is gray the column is enabled in some files and disabled in others 5 Click the OK button for the new column settings to take effect Global Editor Column States i Coverage Editor Source Address
104. the Trace Information The simulator debugger acquires the results of each instruction execution as trace information and displays it in the Trace window The conditions for the trace information acquisition can be specified in the Trace Acquisition dialog box 4 14 1 Opening the Trace Window To open the Trace window choose View gt Code gt Trace or click the Trace toolbar button El 4 14 2 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions After the Trace window opens the trace acquisition conditions must be specified in the Trace Acquisition dialog box To open this dialog box choose Acquisition from the pop up menu Trace Acq Trace Start Stop ______ Diea 2 i Cancel Instruction Type Instruction Subroutine m Trace Buffer Full Handling Continue C Break Trace Capacity 1024 records 4096 records 16384 records 32768 records Figure 4 60 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box This dialog box specifies the conditions for trace information acquisition Trace Start Stop Disable Disables trace information acquisition Enable Enables trace information acquisition Instruction Type Instruction Acquires trace information for all instructions Subroutine Acquires trace information for the subroutine instructions only Trace Buffer Full Handling Continue Continues acquiring trace information even if the trace informatio
105. the feature will not work Clicking the Go button starts execution according to the settings Clicking the Reset Go button starts execution from the reset vector Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without executing instructions 4 8 5 Single Step To debug your code it is very useful to be able to step a single line or instruction at a time and examine the effect of that instruction on the system In the Editor window then a step operation will step a single source line In the Disassembly window a step operation will step a single assembly language instruction If the instruction calls another function or subroutine you have the option to either step into or step over the function If the instruction does not perform a call then either option will cause the debugger to execute the instruction and stop at the next instruction 4 8 6 Stepping Into a Function If you choose to step into the function the debugger will execute the call and stop at the first line or instruction of the function To step into the function either click the Step In toolbar button W or choose Debug gt Step In 4 8 7 Stepping Over a Function Call If you choose to step over the function the debugger will execute the call and all of the code in the function and any function calls that that function may make and stop at the next line or instruction of the calling function To step over the function either click the Step Over toolbar button
106. the file that I have chosen at that time To do this you can replace the specific name of the file for a general placeholder i e c myedit myeditor exe FULLFILE Now whenever the HEW launches the editor with a file it knows that it has to replace FULLFILE with the file you have selected C 2 Inserting a Placeholder Placeholders can only be entered into three specific edit fields within the HEW figures C 1 C 2 and C 3 There are four ways a placeholder can be entered In the first example place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder and then select the required placeholder from the pop up menu to the right of the edit field File fe project myproject ouput file out gt Figure C 1 Placeholder Pop up Menu In the second example select the required placeholder other than Custom directory from the drop down list box and specify a sub directory relative to the directory shown by the placeholder If you select Custom directory specify an absolute directory path in the Sub Directory field Relative to Configuration directory 7 Sub Directory pee ooo Figure C 2 Placeholder Drop down List and Sub Directory Field 373 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual In the third example place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder select the required placeholder from the drop down list box and
107. the memory block that you wish to save and a name and format for the file The File name drop down list contains the previous four file names used for saving memory Clicking the Browse button can open the standard File Save As dialog box On clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key the dialog box closes and the memory block will be saved into the disk as a file of the specified format type When file saving has completed a confirmation message box may be displayed A memory area in the address space can be verified using the memory verify function Open the Verify Memory dialog box by choosing File gt Verify Memory erify Memory Binary X Cancel Eile name Offset address Figure 4 15 Verify Memory Dialog Box 4 2 11 Disabling Update of the Window Contents Automatic update of the Memory window contents which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled This is done by checking Lock Refresh in the pop up menu 4 2 12 Updating the Window Contents The Memory window contents can be forcibly updated This is done by checking Refresh in the pop up menu 222 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 13 Comparing the Memory Contents The contents of two memory blocks can be compared Open the Compare Memory dialog box by selecting Memory gt Compare from the main menu or by selecting Compare from the pop up menu of the
108. the profiler information Syntax pd lt mode gt lt state1 gt lt state2 gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Specifies the method of displaying the profiler information optional default list tree Displays in tree format list Displays in list format lt state1 gt Keyword Specifies whether or not to include child function information in the parent function cycle information optional default n i Specifies child function information to be included in the display n Specifies child function not to be included in the display lt state2 gt Keyword Specifies whether or not to control displaying functions that are not executed optional default a e Displays only executed functions a Displays all functions lt count gt Numeric Specifies the nesting level for calling functions to be displayed This can be specified only when the lt mode gt parameter is tree optional default 16 Examples PROFILE_DISPLAY TREEI Specifies the profiler information to be displayed in tree format and to include child functions pd Specifies the profiler information to be displayed in list format without child function information 350 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 55 PROFILE_SAVE Abbreviation PS Description Saves the profiler information to a file The default file extension is PRO Syntax ps lt filename gt
109. to 32 286 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Program Area Bit size Specifies the number of bits in the program area The following values can be set in each CPU H8 300 H8 300L H8 300HN and H8S 2600N 16 H8S 2000N H8 300HA Same as the number of address space bits H8S 2600A and H8S 2000A 17 to 32 SYSCR Address Specifies the SYSCR address System Call Address Specifies the start address of a system call that performs standard input output or file input output processing from the user program Enable When checked a system call is enabled Response Specifies the window refresh timing that is how many instructions should be executed between refresh actions 1 to D 65535 Execution Mode Specifies whether the simulator debugger stops or continues operating when a simulation error occurs Stop Stops the simulation Continue Continues the simulation Round Mode Specifies the rounding mode for floating point decimal to binary conversion Round to nearest Rounds to the nearest value The denormalized number is not converted to 0 Round to zero Rounds toward zero The denormalized number is converted to 0 Clicking the OK or Apply button stores the modified settings Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without modifying the settings 4 21 2 Modifying the Memory Map and Memory Resource Settings The Memory tab in the Simulator System dialog box sets and modifies the m
110. to modify the way in which information is displayed The following four sections detail the effect of each option on the Configure View dialog 2 8 1 Show Dependencies under Each File If you select Show dependencies under each file the dependent files are shown under the including source file as a flat structure i e the files themselves become folders figure 2 20 ii If this option is not selected then a separate folder contains all dependencies figure 2 20 i f Workspace E E Demo BB B Assembly source file ERS Projects 8 lowlvl sre C source file 2 intpra c 2 lowste c 2 resetpra c 2 sbrk c 2 vecttblc Dependencies E lowsre h E sbrk h E stacksct h E vecth _ of x ii Workspace E E Demo a y p a aa 2 J Navigation Assembly source file 8 lowlvl sre C source file F E lowsre h feselprg c stacksct h 32 Figure 2 20 Dependencies under Each File High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 8 2 Show Standard Library Includes By default any dependent files found in standard include paths will not be shown figure 2 21 1 For example in C code if you write an include statement such as include lt stdio h gt then stdio h will not be listed as a dependent file To view such system include files select the Show standard library includes option figure 2 21 ii
111. to the map settings This simulator debugger does not support the MEMORY_TEST command Syntax mt lt start gt lt end gt Parameter Type Description lt start gt Numeric Start address lt end gt Numeric End address including this address Examples MEMORY _TEST H 8000 H BFFF MT H 4000 H 5000 348 Tests from H 8000 to H BFFF Tests from H 4000 to H 5000 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 52 OPEN _WORKSPACE Abbreviation OW Description Opens a workspace Syntax ow lt filename gt Parameter Type Description filename Character Workspace file name string Example OW WKSP HWS Opens the WKSP HWS file 5 53 PROFILE Abbreviation PR Description Enables disables or sets the profiler display and resets the profiler information Syntax pr lt state gt Parameter Type Description None Displays the profiler information lt state gt Keyword Enables disables or sets the profiler display and resets the profiler information enable Enables the profiler tree off Enables the profiler but does not trace function calls during profile information acquisition disable Disables the profiler reset Resets the profiler information Examples PROFILE ENABLE Enables the profiler prr Resets the profiler information 349 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 54 PROFILE_DISPLAY Abbreviation PD Description Displays
112. user to change the look of other views which have been installed by HEW If you would prefer to use your favorite editor rather than the HEW internal editor then specify your alternative in the Options dialog box which can be invoked via the Tools gt Option menu option For further details on how to use and configure the editor refer to chapter 4 Using the Editor 1 2 6 The Output Window The Output window by default has four tabs on display The Build tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file then the error will be displayed in the build tab along with the source file name and line number To quickly locate a problem double click on the error to jump to the source file and line AE Ef Build Find in Files A Version Control Figure 1 18 Output Window The Debug tab shows the output from any debugger process Any debug component that needs to display information will send its output to this window 10 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Find in Files tab displays the results of the last Find in Files action To activate find in files select the Edit gt Find in Files menu option the toolbar button For further details on how to use find in files refer to chapter 4 Using the Editor The Version Control tab displays the results of version control actions
113. using an access size of longword 344 5 46 MEMORY _ DISPLAY High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Abbreviation MD Description Displays memory contents Syntax md lt address gt lt length gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt address gt Numeric Start address lt length gt Numeric Length optional default H 100 bytes lt mode gt Keyword Display format optional default byte byte Displays in byte units word Displays in word units 2 bytes long Displays in longword units 4 bytes ascii Displays in ASCII codes single Displays in single precision floating point format double Displays in double precision floating point format Examples MEMORY_DISPLAY H C000 H 100 WORD Displays H 100 bytes of memory starting at MEMORY_DISPLAY H 1000 H FF 5 47 MEMORY EDIT Abbreviation ME Description H C000 in word units Displays H FF bytes of memory starting at H 1000 in byte units Allows memory contents to be modified When editing memory the current location may be modified in a similar way to that described in the ASSEMBLE command description When editing exits edit mode goes back one data unit and blank line goes forward without modification 345 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Syntax me lt address gt lt mode gt lt state gt Parameter Type Descri
114. which allows you to select more than one configuration This method is used throughout HEW for modifying multiple configurations at once 3 4 1 Options Tab The Options tab figure 3 11 allows you to define the command line options that will be passed to the phase The Command field displays the command which was entered when you defined the phase figure 3 3d Enter into the Options field the command line arguments that you would like to pass to the command If you want to insert a placeholder select the relevant placeholder from the Placeholder drop down list box and then click the Insert button For a detailed description of placeholders see appendix C Placeholders 52 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual sub CONFIGDIR buildlib sub Configuration directory 7 ae x f cra Figure 3 11 Custom Options Options Tab 3 4 2 Output Files Tab The Output Files tab figure 3 12 is where you can specify the output file or files that will be produced by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the output files are of a less recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e input files have been modified since the output file or files were last produced If the files are up to date then the phase will not be executed Note If no output files are specified the phase will execute regardl
115. 0 to H FF Priority Interrupt priority when the prefix is omitted values must be input and are displayed in hexadecimal H 0 to H 11 Whether or not the interrupt is accepted is determined by the CPU s specification of the selected debugging platform However when H 8 or larger is specified for the priority interrupts are always accepted Note When the same file is specified for multiple File Input the simulator debugger will read data from the file in the order conditions are satisfied When the same file is specified for multiple File Output the simulator debugger will write data to the file in the order conditions are satisfied However when File Input and File Output specify the same file only the operation for the first condition satisfied is valid 4 15 3 Modifying Breakpoints Select a breakpoint to be modified and choose Edit from the pop up menu to open the Set Break dialog box which allows the user to modify the break conditions The Edit menu is only available when one breakpoint is selected 4 15 4 Enabling a Breakpoint Select a breakpoint and choose Enable from the pop up menu to enable the selected breakpoint 4 15 5 Disabling a Breakpoint Select a breakpoint and choose Disable from the pop up menu to disable the selected breakpoint When a breakpoint is disabled the breakpoint will remain in the list but a break will not occur when the specified conditions have been satisfied
116. 1 Opening the Simulated I O Window Choose View gt CPU gt Simulated I O or click the Simulated I O toolbar button o to open the Simulated T O window E Simulated 170 Window ioj x Simulated 1 0 Figure 4 90 Simulated I O Window The standard output from the user program is displayed in this window The key input from this window is handled as the standard input to the user program 290 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 22 2 T O Functions Table 4 1 lists the supported I O functions Table 4 1 I O Functions No Function Code Function Name Description 1 H 01 16 bit address GETC Inputs one byte from the standard input H 11 24 bit address device H 21 32 bit address 2 H 02 16 bit address PUTC Outputs one byte to the standard output H 12 24 bit address device H 22 32 bit address 3 H 03 16 bit address GETS Inputs one line from the standard input device H 13 24 bit address H 23 32 bit address 4 H 04 16 bit address PUTS Outputs one line to the standard output device H 14 24 bit address H 24 32 bit address 5 H 05 16 bit address FOPEN Opens a file H 15 24 bit address H 25 32 bit address 6 H 06 FCLOSE Closes a file 7 H 07 16 bit address FGETC Inputs one byte from a file H 17 24 bit address H 27 32 bit address 8 H 08 16 bit address FPUTC Outputs one byte to a file H 18 24 bit address H 28 32 bit address 9 H
117. 109 6 4 1 Open last workspace at Start Up 0 0 eseeeeceecceseeseeseeseesecsececeeceeeeseeaeesesaeeeeeeneeee 109 6 4 2 Restore the files on opening Workspace 0 cece es ese cseeeeseeeeeetseeeeseeeeseeeeees 109 6 4 3 Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace eee 110 6 4 4 Save workspace before executing any tools ccecceseeseeseeeeceeeeeeteeteeeeceeeeseeneees 110 6 4 5 Prompt before saving Workspace cseseseeeseeseeseeseesecaeeseceeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeas 111 6 4 6 Default directory for new Workspaces cccecceceeseeseeseceeceeceeceseeseeeeeeceeeeaeeaeeaeees 111 6 4 7 Prompt before saving SCSSION csceseeeececeeceeeeeseeseeseeseceeeeseeaeeaeeaeeseeeeeeeeaseaeeas 111 Using an External Editor Customizing File Save 6 6 1 Save files before executing any tools ccececeeeeeeteesecseeeeeeseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeas 113 6 6 2 Prompt before saving files 0 oneni nia aAa KE A ET RRES 113 Using n External Debug ger is csevisesssvssecsssevasevssassncacacvasevavacsvisszenesesa sacavenisava K EERE TERNES 114 Using Custom Placcholders insonnin rsss re eieae iriad riti 115 Using the workspace and project log facilities 20 0 0 eeeceeceesceseeeeceeceeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 116 V EFSION CONON eeigen OR Ei 117 Selecting a Version Control System cceccecceseeseeseeeceeseeseeseeseeeceeeeseeaeeseceeeeseeeeaeeaeeneees 118 Using the Custom Version Control Syste
118. 14 8 Trimming the Source Choose Trim Source from he pop up menu to remove the white space from the left side of the source When the white space is removed a check mark is shown to the left of the Trim Source menu To restore the white space choose Trim Source while the check mark is shown 4 14 9 Analyzing Statistical Information Choose Statistic from the pop up menu to open the Trace Statistic dialog box and analyze statistical information under the specified conditions Statistic hl m Statistic Analysis Default Range Set ltem code1 gt Stat Poox aba Result codel SOO 2 00015 00014 ADDRESS 0000000C 0001 2 00011 00010 3 code E320 3 00007 00006 00005 3 00007 00006 00005 code2 2322 amp codel E320 Figure 4 63 Trace Statistic Dialog Box This dialog box allows the user to analyze statistical information concerning the trace information The target of analysis is specified in Item and the input value or character string is specified by Start and End When Default is selected the input value or character string cannot be specified as a range To specify a range select Range Set Adds a new condition to the current one New Creates a new condition Result Obtains the result of statistical information analysis Clear Clears all condition and results of statistical information analysis Clicking the Close button closes this dialog box
119. 2CENESAS H8S H8 300 Series High performance Embedded Workshop 3 for Windows 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP User s Manual Renesas Development Environment System Rev 1 00 Renesas Technology 2003 7 3 www renesas com Cautions Keep safety first in your circuit designs 1 Renesas Technology Corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with appropriate measures such as i placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of nonflammable material or iii prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials 1 These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corporation product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights belonging to Renesas Technology Corporation or a third party 2 Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts programs algorithms or circuit application examples contained in these materi
120. 3 Parameter Block e Function code H 03 16 bit address One byte One byte 0 Input buffer start address e Function code H 13 24 bit address H 23 32 bit address One byte One byte 0 ant cae Input buffer start address Parameters e Input buffer start address input Start address of the buffer to which the input data is written to 4 PUTS Outputs one line to the standard output device H 04 H 14 H 24 Parameter Block e Function code H 04 16 bit address One byte One byte 0 Output buffer start address e Function code H 14 24 bit address H 24 32 bit address One byte One byte 0 Pas retried Output buffer start address Parameters 293 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Output buffer start address input Start address of the buffer in which the output data is stored FOPEN Opens a file H 05 H 15 H 25 The FOPEN opens a file and returns the file number After this processing the returned file number must be used to input output or close files A maximum of 256 files can be open at the same time Parameter Block e Function code H 05 16 bit address One byte 0 Return value One byte File number 2 Open mode Unused 4 Start address of file neme e Function code H 15 24 bit address H 25 32 bit address One byte File number Unused
121. 3 Splitting Up the Window Display ccecesesceeeeseeseeseeeeceeceeeeaeeaeeeeneeeeeeneeaees 218 4 2 4 Viewing a Different Memory Area cceeeeeseeseeseeseceeceeceeceseeseeaeeeeneeeeeeaeeaees 218 4 2 5 Modifying the Memory Contents ccecceseseeesceeeseeseeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeaecneeeseeaeeaees 219 4 2 6 Selecting a Memory Range eceeeceeseeseeseeseceeceseeseeseceeeeeceeeeseeseeaeeeeeeeeeneeaeeaees 219 4 2 7 Finding a Value in Memory ssisissccsssscsscvsscsssesssasasevasevescossnsanavasesacsvssnesnssasesacrassaze 220 4 3 44 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 vi High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 8 Filling a Memory Area with a Value 4 2 9 Copying a Memory Area 0 4 2 10 Saving and Verifying a Memory Area 4 2 11 Disabling Update of the Window Contents 4 2 12 Updating the Window Contents 222 4 2 13 Comparing the Memory Contents 223 4 2 14 Loading a Memory Area from a File 1223 Displaying Memory Contents as an Image 224 4 3 1 Opening the Image View WindoW e sseeeeeeessesseesiseesesrsrersesersesrersrseesesresesrses 224 4 3 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents ecececeeeeeseeneceeeeeeeseeseeneee 226 4 3 3 Updating the Window Contents cccescesceeeeeseeseeeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 226 4 3 4 Displaying the Pixel Information ccceeeeeeeeceseeeeceeceeeeseeseeaeeneeeeeeeeeaeeneees 226 Displaying Memory Conten
122. 4 14 6 Saving the Trace Information in a File eeeeeeseesecseceececeeseeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaees 264 4 14 7 Viewirig the Source Files tsc cscceccssinesecieseccassacesavcnececdascnedasvevevessescsedatssvevasdisenees 264 4148 Trimming the Source neo e EE EAEE E OA E 265 4 14 9 Analyzing Statistical Information essssseseeeeeesesseseserestsstsesrsistrsesesessesesesesses 265 Using the Simulator Debugger Breakpoints ceceeceeseeseeteeseceeceeceseeseeaeeseeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 266 415 1 Listing the Breakpoints ic c2 sscccccssvuccscvstvsiecsvenscvevesegsasevenscacevsesnasevevcsnsoveaseeorecaden 266 4 15 2 gt Setting a Breakpoimtsceccssscccscisegecessvngesccvsegeeasaatese catedecuasenadagvevevessevevedasssvesccutevsecs 267 4 15 3 Modifying Breakpoints 0 00 00 eeceeeeceeseeseesecseeeceeeeseesecsecseceeeeaeeseeaeeaeseeeeeeeeeeaees 270 4 15 4 Enabling a Breakpoint c cc cceeceeeeceeseeseeecseceeceeeeseesecseeseseeeeaeeseeaeeaecneeereeaeeaees 270 4 15 5 Disabling a Breakpoint vssccsscsicscecsseccussessexeonassasvsversszcsnsanevesavieascnseaserasaveusoassabades 270 4 15 6 Deleting a Break point cis iccscscsssesssacevevsscssncsssscasevasecsscasenaassvarsssesseesannssasssacoraasezs 270 vii High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 15 7 Deleting All Breakpoints 0 00 270 4 15 8 Viewing the Source Line for a Breakpoint 271 4 15 9 Closing Input or Output File 271 4 15 10 Closing All Input and
123. 4 19 8 Pasting a Placeholder sscisvccecetstasisavtvaxconcvcasnacawvateverscaaiseevescevevereinsesvetcsndeveaveveivens 283 4 20 Generating a Pseudo Interrupt Manually cceceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeceeeeaeeaeeeeeneeaeeaeeate 284 4 20 1 Setting a Trigger Button eeeeseesceseeseeseceeceeceeceaeesecseeseceeeeaeeseeseeeseeseeseaeeas 285 4 20 2 Changing the Number of Trigger Buttons ccccceseseeseeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseeneees 285 4 20 3 Changing the Size of Trigger Buttons cceceeceeseeseesecneceeceeeeseeseeaeeeeeeseeaeeaeees 286 4 21 Modifying the Simulator Debugger Settings cceeeceeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeaeeaeeneeneeeaeenes 286 4 21 1 Modifying the Simulator System 0 0 0 ec eceeeeeeseeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeseeaeeeeeeaeeaeeneees 286 4 21 2 Modifying the Memory Map and Memory Resource Settings ececeeseeneeee 287 4 21 3 Set Memory Map Dialog BoX ececesesseeseeseeeeeeeeeseesecsececeeeeseeseeaeeneeeeceeeeaeeneees 289 4 21 4 Set Memory Resource Dialog BoX cceseeeeeeseeseeeeeeneeeeceeeeaeeaeeseeeeceeseaeeaeeas 290 4 22 Standard I O and File I O Processing ccecceccesesseeseeseeeeceseeseeseeseceeceeeeeeeseeaeeeeneeneeeaeeate 290 4 22 1 Opening the Simulated I O Window cece eee cseceeeecseeeeseteceeeseeeeeeaeees 290 A222 OFUN UIS oeeie EE AREE E AER 291 4 23 Synchronizing Multiple Debugging Platforms s eseseseseeeeseesseeresrsisesesrerrseserresssrsrees 302 4 23 1 External HEW sy
124. 42 MAP DISPLAY onon n a E E NEEE RENEE EE 343 MAP SE Tirana eeen ea VNESE VE ETE RTEA N AOE ENEE 343 MEMORY COMPARE sssscsssssevedsssssctivitestassisevt ns A R RE penai 344 MEMORY DISPLAY sanna nna E EENEN RNA 345 MEMORY EDT a AA E AATAS 345 MEMORY FEE eeo alae aa ETN EEE aE 346 MEMORY FND aioe severest US css A ED ecu AAEE EEEE Eh 347 MEMORY MOVE osscessessssisvnssessovsesasioveunesseveniassuvcsiosssvendasssastessouvenessdnedestaueuassanteudersitoves 348 MEMORY TEST A N ANE EE nia ENEE ENRE 348 OPEN WORKSPACE oralara aoaea eaa EUNE EE EE A EEE aE 349 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 53 PROFILE seseeesseeess 349 5 54 PROFILE_DISPLAY 350 5 55 PROFILE_SAVE 351 5 56 QUIT vavcecceeeeeveee 351 5 57 RADIX 351 5 58 REGISTER_DISPLAY 352 5 59 REGISTER_SET 353 5 60 REMOVE FILE 354 SOL RESEND asuraos e E a aO Ea O AE O NEO aO T 354 502 RESPONS Erres a E E A A A N 354 5 603 SEEE P irrena ER EAE OEE O NENEN 355 5604 STATUS rE E ETNEN ETA EEA TOUN 355 5 63 ISTEP ninsa E EE R 356 5 66 STEP MODE mr aaa E ET T AEE E EAR seed 356 SOT STEP OUT AATE ERA RRA OREN A A AIN 357 508 STEP OVER e orana aE A A Aa ssh O Ea P OEEO O A ON 357 S09 S TEP RATE oies e t re E KSEE EAEE ATEEK EAER KEETE AAEE 358 DTO SUE M T AA a EE 358 SIl SYMBOL ADD aaa e ATEETAN 358 5 12 SYMBOL CLEAR eoet r AA Ta NETR EEE A AEEA EAT AERA E ANAE a 359 ST SYMBOL FOAD eei r on days aa ara O rA aE a vise snus EON PESE ESATE
125. 5 59 REGISTER_SET Abbreviation RS Description Changes the contents of a register Syntax rs lt register gt lt value gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt register gt Keyword Register name lt value gt Numeric Register value lt mode gt Keyword Data size optional default corresponding register size byte Byte word Word long Longword single Single precision floating point double Double precision floating point Examples RS PC_StartUp Sets the program counter to the address defined by the symbol _StartUp RS RO H 1234 WORD Sets word data H 1234 to RO 353 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 60 REMOVE_FILE Abbreviation RF Description Removes a from the current project Syntax rf lt filename gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt String File name Example remove_file PROJDIR sbrk c Removes the file sbrk c from the project Placeholders are valid syntax 5 61 RESET Abbreviation RE Description Resets the microprocessor All register values are set to the initial values of the device Memory mapping and breakpoints are not initialized Syntax re Parameter Type Description none Resets the microprocessor Example RE Resets the microprocessor 5 62 RESPONSE Abbreviation RP Description Specifies the frequency of the window update When a long refresh interval is specified the simulation becomes faster
126. 6 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual H8S 2600N Simulator Tareet type 2600 7 lt Back Lor Finish Cancel Figure 3 8 Debugger Target Setting Display Step 7 7 Specify the debugger targets in Step 7 Targets Sets the debugger targets Select by checking the debugger targets No selection or a selection of more than one target is possible Target Type Specifies the type of the targets displayed in Targets To move to Step 8 click the Next gt button in Step 7 197 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Target name H8S 26004 Simulator Configuration name SimDebug_H8S 26004 Detail options Simulator 1 0 Simulator I O addr 0x0 Bus mode Modify lt Back Lor Finish Cancel Figure 3 9 Debugger Option Setting Display Step 8 8 Set the options for the debugger targets selected in Step 8 Configuration name By default the HEW generates two configurations Release and Debug If a debugger target is selected a configuration for the selected target is also generated an abbreviation including the target name This configuration name can be changed in Configuration name Detail options Sets the debugger target options To modify an option select Item and click Modify If the selected item cannot be modified Modify remains gray even when Item is selected Simulator I O System call for standard I O or file I O from
127. Build Phases dialog figure 3 9 Build Phases 2 xi Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Eile group Phase order Compiler MyPhase C source file 4 0 Figure 3 9 Build Phases Dialog Build File Order Tab The list displays all of the current phases that will be executed when the build file operation is selected upon the file group shown in the File group list box In figure 3 9 the C source file file group is selected and the Compiler and MyPhase phases are associated with it Entries in the Phase order list of the Build File Order tab are added automatically as new entries are added to the Build Order tab For example if you were to add a phase which takes C source files as input then this phase will be automatically added to the list of phases to execute when a build file operation is applied to a C source file If you don t want a certain phase to execute when Build gt Build File is selected then clear the check box to the left of the phase name in the Phase order list 3 4 Setting Custom Build Phase Options Once you have defined a custom phase you will want to specify the command line options that should be used when it is executed Each defined phase has a menu option on the Options menu To specify options for that phase select it The dialog that will be invoked depends upon whether the custom phase selected was a mult
128. CETINE 359 5 74 SYMBOL SAVE ian ann aTa EEE EOE NE TET E R A 360 SA1 SYMBOL WE W e Ana AEEA A ONA 361 STO TOE EE EEE ISES ETE ESEO A EO EN N aye 361 STTH TRAC EAT E A A S AEA T 362 5 78 TRACE ACQUISITION scesscsessesnestsdestenssusunsanddentorebiovaessstoabapasiybessendetduasbostgsansdendeeessi 363 519 TRACE SAVE r a aC A E N E AAN EO A C E 364 3 80 TRACE STATISTICS rne teara rE ASECO OPENEN A TOINTE NETAN 364 5 81 TRAP ADDRESS i A EE T RREO ERA AES 365 5 827 TRAP ADDRESS DISPLAY ei aene E EEA ES EEEa 365 5 83 gt TRAP ADDRESS ENABLE iscccgs ccccetscsuestecavenaveeahvanvesacsseuedcasssceedadoneeducnboveecsbexeseesevis 366 5 84 UPDATE_ALL_DEPENDENCIES s sesisiririseserereririrsrsisssrsosesearsrriseetriresssorinisinvevestnsrivis 366 Section G Messa ei E a a 367 6 1 Information Messages onana oise orae EENE E ADEE EA EEA e E TEREE EEA TEATES 367 6 2 Erto Messages ices neunit seve tah cance a seats EEA EERE NE e 368 Appendix A Trouble Shooting 00 0 eee cece cceceeseesessessessessessessessessesseseeaes 369 Appendix B Regular Expressions ccccecec cscs csececesssssesseesessesseesesseeseeaes 371 Appendix C Placeholders iicnweseomereeuoein nverornerecissotesenuveoreenieeoteees 373 Cl Whats a Placehold r sssecsceatsssesrestiseecsssneestseasesteseveensseceebi E E 373 C2 Inserting a Placeholder cvssssessecorcssseeeenascasteateveeted esa secaa teeta E ede hanes 373 C3 AvailablePlaceholders 2 3 oc
129. DATA Abbreviation BD Description Specifies a memory data value as a break condition Syntax bd lt address gt lt data gt lt size gt lt option gt lt Action gt Parameter Type Description lt address gt Numeric The address where the break condition is checked lt data gt Numeric Access data lt size gt Keyword Size optional default B Byte Byte size Word Word size Longword Longword size Single Single precision floating point size Double Double precision floating point size lt option gt Keyword Match or mismatch of data The default is EQ EQ A break occurs when the data matches the specified value NE A break occurs when the data does not match the specified value lt Action gt Keyword Action taken when the conditions are satisfied optional default Stop Stop P Halts the execution of the user program Input I Inputs saves data to a file Output O Outputs reads data from a file Interrupt T Initiates a pseudo interrupt Format The method of defining each Action are as follows Stop Input lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file from which data is input string lt addr gt Numeric Address to which the data is read lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF
130. Debug gt Download Modules and the Debug gt Unload Modules menu items 3 3 6 Unloading of Modules It is possible to manually unload downloaded modules in the list whenever you want from the Debug gt Unload Modules menu item This can also be done from the Download Module pop up menu in the Workspace window When a module is unloaded its symbols are erased from the HEW debugging system but the memory contents of the target remains unmodified After a module has been unloaded it cannot be debugged unless it is reloaded 3 4 Debugger Sessions The HEW stores all of your builder options into a configuration In a similar way the HEW stores your debugger options in a session The debugging platforms the programs to be downloaded and each debugging platform s options can be stored in a session Sessions are not directly related to a configuration This means that multiple sessions can share the same download module and avoid unnecessary program rebuilds Each session s data should be stored in a separate file in the HEW project Debugger sessions are described in detail below 3 4 1 Selecting a Session The current session can be selected in the following two ways e From the toolbar Select a session from the drop down list box figure 3 18 in the toolbar Ello SS ifReteacesession eda ta Figure 3 18 Toolbar Selection e From the dialog box 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions This will open the De
131. Displays symbols 76 TCL Enables or disables the TCL 77 TRACE TR Displays trace information 78 TRACE_ACQUISITION TA Enables or disables trace information acquisition 79 TRACE SAVE TV Outputs trace information into a file 80 TRACE STATISTIC TST Analyzes statistic information 81 TRAP_ADDRESS TP Sets a system call address 82 TRAP_ADDRESS_ TD Displays system call address settings DISPLAY 83 TRAP_ADDRESS_ TE Enables or disables the system call ENABLE 84 UPDATE_ALL_ UD Updates the current projects build dependencies DEPENDENCIES The following describes the syntax of each command 309 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 1 COMMENT Abbreviation None Description Allows a comment to be entered useful for documenting log files Syntax lt text gt Parameter Type Description lt text gt Text Output text Example Start of test routine Outputs comment Start of test routine into the Command Line window and to the log file if logging is active 5 2 ADD_FILE Abbreviation AF Description Adds a file to the current project Syntax af lt filename gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt String File name Example add_file PROJDIR sbrk c Adds the file sbrk c to the project from the project directory Placeholders are valid syntax 5 3 ANALYSIS Abbreviation AN Description Enables disables performance analysis Counts are not automatically reset before running
132. E_ACQUISITION E Trace information acquisition is enabled B BUF 32 Operation stops when the trace buffer becomes full The capacity of the trace buffer is set to 32768 TAD Trace information acquisition is disabled High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 79 TRACE SAVE Abbreviation TV Description Saves the trace information in files The files are in text format so the default file extension is TXT Syntax tv lt filename gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character File name string lt mode gt Keyword File writing mode A Appends information to the file O Overwrites the file default Examples TRACE_SAVE TEST Saves the trace information in TEST TXT TV TRACE TXT Saves the trace information in TRACE TXT 5 80 TRACE_STATISTIC Abbreviation TST Description Analyzes the statistic information under the specified conditions Syntax tst lt item gt lt string gt Parameter Type Description lt item gt Character Statistic information item to be analyzed string lt string gt Character Character string that specifies conditions string Example TST CODE1 E630 Analyzes the statistic information under condition CODE1 E630 364 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 81 TRAP_ADDRESS Abbreviation TP Description Specifies the system call address for standard I O and file I O functions from the user program For details refer t
133. H KKK EKKE HHH KH EEKK KK KKK KEKE KEKKKKKKKKKKKKE 7 FILE dbsct c DATE Mon Jun 23 2003 DESCRIPTION Setting of B R Section 7 CPU TYPE H857 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 2 6 Z EAEEREN EEEE EEEE E EE E E E E E E E E E JE E E JE E E E E E ME JE E E JE JE E JE E E JE E E ME JE E ME E E E E E E EEE pragma section DSEC static const struct char rom_s Start address of the initialized data se char rom_e End address of the initialized data sect char ram_s Start address of the initialized data se DTBL sz gt so resetpra c 2 gt dbsctc Figure 4 1 Editor Window 65 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 Working with Multiple Files The file area is where you will work with the files of your project The editor allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them in different configurations and to edit them in whichever order you want to The operations that you can perform upon the windows are typical of most Windows applications and they can be found under the Window menu e Window gt Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap with the top left of each window visible e Window gt Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows in sequence horizontally so that they occupy the entire editor window with no overlapping edges e Window gt Tile Vertically Arrange
134. Hdi exe CONFIGDIR PROJECT NAME hds CONFIGDIR PROJECT NAME abs Figure 6 13 Customize Dialog Debugger Tab To use an external debugger check the Use external debugger checkbox and specify the items described below There are three items of information which need to be specified Firstly the location of the HDI executable must be specified This must be version 4 0 or greater otherwise the behavior is not guaranteed The second item of data is the session file This tells HDI which session to load when it is launched Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to HDI when the download module changes after a build Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button to invoke HDI with the specified session file After a build if the download module has been updated the HEW will switch back to HDI to enable immediate debugging Whilst using HDI double clicking in any source window will switch back to the HEW with the source file open at the line which was double clicked 114 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 8 Using Custom Placeholders Throughout the High performance Embedded Workshop the user can use a number of pre defined placeholders for directory definitions For example the user can use the PROJDIR variable to signify the current HEW project directory This makes it much easier to relocate projects and
135. In the simulator debugger the rounding mode for floating point decimal to binary conversion can be selected in the Simulator System dialog box One of the following two modes can be selected e Round to nearest RN Round to zero RZ If a denormalized number is specified for binary to decimal or decimal to binary conversion it is converted to zero in RZ mode and left as a denormalized number in RN mode If an overflow occurs during decimal to binary conversion the maximum floating point value is returned in RZ mode and the infinity is returned in RN mode 2 14 Display of Function Call History The simulator debugger displays the function call history in the Stack Trace window when simulation stops which enables program execution flow to be checked easily Selecting a function name in the Stack Trace window displays the corresponding source program in the Editor window This allows the function that has called the current function to also be checked The displayed function call history is updated in the following cases e When simulation stops due to the break conditions described in section 2 16 Break Conditions e When register values are modified while simulation stops due to the above break conditions e While single step execution is performed For details refer to section 4 13 Viewing the Function Call History 2 15 Performance Measurement The simulator debugger has the profiler function and performance analysis
136. Manual 5 Print File To print the contents of the current window click this button A Cut Clicking this button will remove the current text selection and place a copy of it onto the Windows clipboard it can be pasted back to a file with a paste operation Copy This button allows you to copy the current text selection into the Windows clipboard Paste The paste button copies the contents of the clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor ray Find Click this button if you want to find a certain text string in the current file It invokes a find dialog box where you can specify the search parameters Oy Find in Files To search several files for a text string then click this button All find results are displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window For further information refer to the Searching and Navigating Through Files section later in this chapter Match Braces The match braces button highlights text between braces of type and This is particularly useful when attempting to find out the structure of C C code blocks which are opened with and closed with To use it select the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it and then click this button For further information on brace matching refer to the Brace Matching section later in this chapter T Insert Template To insert a pre defined template at the current cursor p
137. Map can be added modified or deleted using the following buttons a a Adds Memory Map items Clicking this button opens the Set Memory Map dialog box figure 4 88 and memory map items can be specified Es Modifies Memory Map items Select an item to be modified in the list box and click this button The Set Memory Map dialog box figure 4 88 opens and memory map items can be modified x Deletes Memory Map items Select an item to be deleted in the list box and click this button 288 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Memory Map and Memory Resource can be reset to the default value by the a button Clicking the OK or Apply button stores the modified settings Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without modifying the settings 4 21 3 Set Memory Map Dialog Box The Set Memory Map dialog box specifies the memory map of the target CPU The contents displayed in this dialog box depend on the target CPU The simulator debugger uses the specified data to calculate the number of cycles for memory accesses Set Memory Map 2 xi Memory type ROM he Cancel if Begin H o0000000 End H OOFFFFFF Data bus 32 he State count peoo Figure 4 88 Set Memory Map Dialog Box The following items are specified Memory type Memory type ROM Internal ROM RAM Internal RAM EXT External memory IO Internal I O EEPROM EEPROM Begin Start address of the
138. Memory window Compare Memory Start Compare pome oo Format Byte amp 1 x Figure 4 16 Compare Memory Dialog Box Enter the comparison format Format the start address Begin and end address End of the source memory area and the start address Start Compare of the destination memory area If the memory block is already highlighted in the Memory window the start and end addresses will be automatically filled in when the Compare Memory dialog box is opened If there is a mismatch the address where it was found is displayed in a message box 4 2 14 Loading a Memory Area from a File A file can be loaded to the debugging platform s memory Select Load from the pop up menu of the Memory window to open the Load Program dialog box Load Program Format Open Eile name ee Offset address paee ooo Figure 4 17 Load Program Dialog Box Enter the file format Format and the file name File name If the load address value is to be changed enter the offset value in the offset field Offset address otherwise enter zero 223 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 Displaying Memory Contents as an Image The memory contents can be displayed as an image in the Image View window 4 3 1 Opening the Image View Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Image or click the Image toolbar button m to open the Image Properties dialog box
139. OVERAGE_DISPLAY CVD Displays coverage information 24 COVERAGE_LOAD CVL Loads coverage information 25 COVERAGE_RANGE CVR Sets a coverage range 26 COVERAGE_SAVE CVS Saves coverage information 27 DEFAULT_OBJECT_FODO Sets the default object program format RMAT 28 DISASSEMBLE DA Disassembles memory contents 29 ERASE ER Clears the Command Line window 30 EVALUATE EV Evaluates an expression 307 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table 5 1 Simulator Debugger Commands cont No Command Name Abbreviation Function 31 EXEC_MODE EM Sets and displays execution mode 32 FILE_LOAD FL Loads an object program file 33 FILE_SAVE FS Saves memory to a file 34 FILE_UNLOAD FU Unloads an object file from memory 35 FILE_VERIFY FV Verifies file contents against memory 36 GENERATE _MAKE_ GM Generates a build makefile for the current workspace FILE 37 GO GO Executes user program 38 GO RESET GR Executes user program from reset vector 39 GO TILL GT Executes user program until temporary breakpoint 40 HALT HA Halts the user program 41 INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugging platform 42 LOG LO Controls command output logging 43 MAP_DISPLAY MA Displays memory resource settings 44 MAP_SET MS Allocates a memory area 45 MEMORY_COMPARE MC Compares memory contents 46 MEMORY_DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents 47
140. Output Files 4 16 Analyzing Performance 271 4 16 1 Opening the Performance Analysis Window 271 4 16 2 Specifying a Target Function 272 4 16 3 Starting Performance Data Acquisition 272 4 16 4 Resetting Datasveissssccsscsvesssasssesasszatescvavevesaavzavenszavavevatearesntaveavadetvascsnsenannsvanesseeranss 272 4 16 5 Deleting a Target Function 20 0 cecececeesecsceeececeeseeseeneeseceeeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 272 4 16 6 Deleting All Target FUnctions cc ceceeeseeseeeeeeseeseeseeseceeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeceeeeaeeaeeaeens 272 417 Acquiring Code Coverage eseis siete casess cosavatessesnses cavsvatednasnses E N a a 272 4 17 1 Opening the Coverage Window cccescessseeesseseeseeseeseceeceeeeseeaeeaeeseceeeeaeeaeeaeens 273 4 17 2 Acquiring Coverage Information ccccscsseeceseeeeeeeeceeceseeeeeaeeseeseeeeceeeeaeeneees 276 4 17 3 Viewing the Source Window cceccesceseeseeseeeeceseeseeseeseceeeecceeeeaeeaeeaeeeeceeeeaeeaeens 276 4 17 4 Changing the Display Address cccceseseececeseeseeseeeeceeceseeseeseceeeeeeeeeaeeaeeneees 276 4 17 5 Changing the Coverage Range cccssseseseeseceseesceseeeeceeceeeeseeaeeseeaeeeeeeeeeaeeneees 276 4 17 6 Clearing Coverage Information cceceseecceeeeeeeseeseeseceeeeceeeesesaeeseeeeceeeeeeeaeeas 278 4 17 7 Saving Coverage Information in a File cceeceeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 278 4 17 8 Loading Coverage Information from a File cc
141. The Insert Project dialog will be displayed figure 2 23 2 Set the New Project option 3 Click OK The Insert New Project dialog will be invoked 4 Enter the name of the new workspace into the Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character As you enter the project name the HEW will add a subdirectory for you automatically This can be deleted if desired 5 Click the Browse button to graphically select the directory in which you would like to create the project Alternatively you can type the directory into the Directory field manually 6 The Project type list displays all of the available project types e g application library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list 7 Click OK to create the project and insert it into the workspace Note When a new project is being inserted the CPU family and tool chain cannot be specified as these properties are already defined by the workspace i e all projects within the same workspace target the same CPU family and toolchain Insert Project 2 E Figure 2 23 Insert Project Dialog 35 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To insert an existing project into a workspace 1 Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog will be displayed 2 Set the Existing Project option
142. This dialog box displays pixel information on the cursor location Color Mode Displays the format of the image Pixel Displays color information of the cursor location Displayed in decimal Position Displays the cursor location in X and Y axis Displayed in decimal X Displays the X axis of the cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of the cursor location Buffer Size Displays the buffer size Displayed in decimal Width Displays the buffer width Height Displays the buffer height Image Size Displays the width and height of the display Displayed in decimal Width Displays the width Height Displays the height 4 4 Displaying Memory Contents as Waveforms Memory contents can be displayed as waveforms in the Waveform View window 4 4 1 Opening the Waveform View Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Waveform or click the Waveform toolbar button Eh to open the Waveform Properties dialog box shown in figure 4 21 227 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Waveform Properties Data Address fHooooo000 X Data Size fest tsi e k Mono Stereo Buffer Size H0000 000 7 Figure 4 21 Waveform Properties Dialog Box Specifies the waveform format The following items can be specified Data Address Specifies the start address of data in memory Displayed in hexadecimal Data Size Selects 8Bit or 16Bit Channel Specifies Mono or Ste
143. To create a new file extension in a new file group 1 Select Project gt File Extensions from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed figure 2 7 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 9 3 Enter the extension which you want to define into the File extension field It is not necessary to type the period character The drop list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to a new group option and enter a description which defines this new file group 5 At this stage it is possible to change the associated application There are four available choices in the Open with drop list These are listed below e Editor e None e Other e Windows default If the editor is selected the open file function in the workspace window causes the file to be opened in the HEW editor If none is selected then the open operation is disabled when the open file function is attempted Selecting Other allows you to configure an another tool for the open file operation See To associate an application with a file group for more details If the Windows default option is selected then the open file function in the workspace window passes the open file to the Windows operating system This
144. Toolbars Tab gt To create a new toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Click the New button The dialog shown in figure 6 2 will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the new toolbar into the Toolbar name field 4 Click OK to create the new toolbar New Toolbar MyToolbal Figure 6 2 New Toolbar Dialog 103 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual When a new toolbar is created it will appear undocked i e floating and empty gt To add buttons to a toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Commands tab see figure 6 3 2 Browse the available buttons by selecting the button categories from the Categories list Select a button from the Buttons area to display information on its operation 3 Click and drag a button from the dialog onto the toolbar Customize Figure 6 3 Customize Dialog Commands Tab 104 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual To remove buttons from a toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Commands tab see figure 6 3 2 Click and drag a button from the toolbar onto the Buttons area To remove a user defined toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Select the u
145. User menu options list and then click the Modify button beside the list The dialog shown in figure 8 4 will be displayed The title of the dialog is Modify Menu Option 3 Modify the commands as necessary and then click OK 4 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK gt To change the ordering of version control menu options 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be moved and then click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK 126 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 2 Defining Version Control Commands Commands are defined when the Add or Modify buttons are clicked on the dialogs shown in figure 8 3 and figure 7 4 In either case the dialog shown in figure 8 5 is invoked Add Command MWS SAWING2 Ss exe Cancel History CDIR FILENAME Y USERNAME PASS Figure 8 5 Add Modify Command Dialog gt To define a command 1 Enter the full path of the command into the Version control executable field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 2 Enter the arguments for the command into the Arguments field 3 Enter the initial directory in which you would like to run the executable from into the Initial
146. Workshop User s Manual 5 14 BREAK_ENABLE Abbreviation BE Description Enables or disables a breakpoint Syntax be lt flag gt lt index gt Parameter Type Description lt flag gt Keyword Enables or disables a breakpoint E Enable D Disable lt index gt Numeric Index of the breakpoint to be canceled If the index is omitted all breakpoints are deleted Examples BREAK ENABLE D 0 The first breakpoint is disabled BEE All breakpoints are enabled 322 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 15 BREAK_REGISTER Abbreviation BR Description Specifies a register data as a break condition Syntax br lt register name gt lt data gt lt size gt lt option gt lt Action gt Parameter Type Description lt register gt Character Register name string lt data gt Numeric Access data lt size gt Keyword Access size If no size is specified the size of the specified register is assumed Note that when data is specified the size must not be omitted byte Byte size word Word size longword Longword size single Single precision floating point size double Double precision floating point size lt option gt Keyword Match or mismatch of data The default is EQ EQ A break occurs when the data matches the specified value NE A break occurs when the data does not match the specified value lt Action gt Keyword Action taken when t
147. Workspace iof x ii Workspace Demo Demo 3 6 Assembly source file g Assembly source file cO sitc lis L hwefa c intv c 2 main c 2 sbrk c Figure 2 21 Standard Library Includes 33 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 8 3 Show File Paths If Show file paths is selected all of the files in the project window are shown with their full path i e from a drive letter figure 2 22 Workspace of x G Demo 3 6 Assembly source file 2 C Hew2 Demo Demo cO sre C source file C Hew2 Demo Demo hweta c E C Hew2 Demo Demo inty c E C Hew2 Demo Demo main c E C Hew2 Demo Demo sbrk c amp Dependencies lt 3 Projects lt I Navigation Figure 2 22 File Paths Shown 2 9 Setting the Current Project 2A workspace can contain more than one project but only one of the projects can be active at any time This active project is the one which build actions and debug operations can be performed on There are three states a project can be in The current project a loaded project or an unloaded project If the project is loaded it is possible to open the project files directory and view the files It is also possible to change the builder or debugger options for the project A loaded project can have tool execut
148. _Init INT_OFFSET amp MAMMAL ANIMAL SMe Cs Classes demo Sa CShark CShark amp CShark GetClassN ame void s m_nFins E m_nSharpTeeth 8 Crocodile CCrocodile 4 CCrocodile GetClassN ame void e m_nLivein Water E m_nSharpTeeth a CFish amp CFish amp CFish GetClassN ame void E m_nLivein w ater 8 CGreatwhite amp CGreatWhite amp CGreatwhite FeedTheShark CCrocodile myGoat FeedTheShark CFish myFishyFood FeedTheShark char pszOtherT ype FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyFood FeedTheShark CPerson myPersonFood Project Templates Navigation entries Navigation category Project Class name Class members El Navigation Figure 13 1 Navigation view The navigation view contains categories for all supported navigation types In HEW 3 0 the following navigation components are supported as standard e C Classes All classes functions and members are displayed for C source files e C Defines All defines for C and C source files are displayed e C Functions All ANSI C standard functions are for C source files displayed Each category is displayed in the top level of the view Underneath each category each project in the workspace is displayed Then the items belonging to that pa
149. a docked window and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar gt To hide the Workspace window or the Output window Click on the close button which is located in the top right corner of the window Or push the right mouse button anywhere inside a floating window and select Hide on the pop up menu To display the Workspace window or the Output window Select View gt Workspace or View gt Output respectively 1 2 5 The Editor Window The editor window is where you will work with the files of your project The HEW allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them and to edit them in whichever order you want to By default the editor window is displayed in a notebook style where each text file has a separate tab as shown in figure 1 16 The editor contains a gutter on the left hand side of the window The gutter in HEW can be configured to contain many columns Each column can refer to a different component s capability In figure 1 16 the editor is displayed with the debugger address column and the standard column The standard column allows the user to configure the position of bookmarks and software breakpoints quickly and easily If you are unsure what purpose a column has or what the information it is displaying is if you place the cursor over the column a tool tip is displayed showing its iden
150. a file Output O Outputs reads data from a file Interrupt T Initiates a pseudo interrupt Format The method of defining each Action are as follows Stop Input lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file from which data is input string lt addr gt Numeric Address to which the data is read lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF Output lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt lt option gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file to which data is saved string lt addr gt Numeric Address from which data is output lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF lt option gt Keyword Specifies a new file or appends to an existing file optional makes a new file when abbreviated A Adds the data to the existing file 316 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Interrupt lt interrupt typel gt lt priority gt Parameter Type Description lt interrupt type1 gt Numeric Type of interrupt Interrupt vector number 0 to H FF lt priority gt Numeric Interrupt priority optional default 0 Oto 17 Examples BREAK ACCESS 0 1000 W A break occurs when the specified ran
151. akpoint Up to 1024 breakpoints can be specified Address Address where a break occurs Count Number of times that a specified instruction is fetched when the prefix is omitted values must be input and are displayed in decimal 1 to 16383 default 1 Break Access Up to 1024 addresses can be specified Start address Start address of memory where a break occurs if the memory is accessed 267 Break Data High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual End address End address of memory where a break occurs if the memory is accessed If no data is input only the start address is break range Access type Read Write or Read Write Up to 1024 values of data can be specified Start address Address of memory where a break occurs Data Data value that causes a break Size Data size Option Data match mismatch Break Register Up to 1024 register names can be specified Register Register name where break conditions are specified Size Data size Data Data value that causes a break If no data is input a break occurs whenever data is written to the register Option Data match mismatch Break Sequence Only one address can be specified Break Cycle Address1 to Pass addresses that are the conditions to generate a break Address8 All eight breakpoints do not have to be set Up to 1024 cycles can be specified Cycle Number of cycles to determine a break H 1 to H FFFFFFFF A condition wil
152. al 4 7 2 Expanding a Bit Register If a register is used as a set of flags at the bit level for the control of state its one character symbol rather than its state indicate each bit Double click on the register s name to display the Edit Register dialog box and switch each bit on or off Checking the check box for any bit specifies it as holding a 1 while removing the check specifies it as a 0 Register SR Figure 4 33 Expanding a Bit Register 4 7 3 Choosing a Register to be Displayed To choose a register to be displayed in the Register window choose Settings from the pop up menu This dialog box is shown in figure 4 34 Figure 4 34 Set Dialog Box 238 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 7 4 Splitting Up the Window Display To vertically divide the Register window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move the split up bar Moving the split up bar to the top end or bottom end of the window cancels the split up display 4 7 5 Modifying Register Contents To change a register s contents open the Edit Register dialog box in one of the following methods e Enter a value directly in the window e Double click the register you want to change e Select the register you want to change and choose Edit from the pop up menu Register RO Set As Cancel Whole Register Figure 4 35 Edit Register Dialog Box You
153. al 8 4 Controlling Execution The General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 13 allows you to control the way in which the version control tool is executed It also shows the full path to the current version control configuration file 8 4 1 Prompt before executing command If this check box is set then before any version control commands are executed a dialog is displayed figure 8 15 which lists all of the files involved in the operation Files may be deselected by clearing the associated check box Clicking OK will apply the command to each of the selected files Clicking Cancel will abort the operation History 21x demo c c hew demo demo sbrk c c hew demo demo vecttbl sre c hew demo demo Figure 8 15 Command Prompt Dialog Example 8 4 2 Run in DOS Window By default the output of the version control commands is redirected to the Version Control tab of the Output window If you would rather run each command in a separate DOS window then set this check box 8 4 3 Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter By default when the HEW substitutes the placeholder VCDIR it uses the backward slash character V to divide directories However if the version control system you are using uses a forward slash character e g Visual SourceSafe to divide directories then set the Use forward slash as version cont
154. alog box shown in figure 4 6 is displayed Set Address Address main Cancel dil Figure 4 6 Set Address Dialog Box Enter the address or label name in the edit box and either click on the OK button or press the Enter key The Disassembly window will be updated to show the code at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 4 10 Elf Dwarf2 Support 4 1 7 Viewing the Current Program Counter Address Wherever you can enter an address or value into the HEW you can also enter an expression If you enter a register name prefixed by the hash character the contents of that register will be used as the value in the expression Therefore if you open the Set Address dialog box and enter the expression pc the Source or Disassembly window will display the current PC address It also allows the offset of the current PC to be displayed by entering an expression with the PC register plus an offset e g PC 0x100 216 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 Operating Memory This section describes how to look at memory areas in the CPU s address space How to look at a memory area in different formats how to fill and move a memory block and how to load and verify a memory area with a disk file are described 4 2 1 Viewing a Memory Area To look at a memory area choose View
155. als 3 All information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by various means including the Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page http www renesas com 4 When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein 5 Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designe
156. an be opened by clicking the l button or choosing View gt Code gt Event For details refer to section 4 15 Using the Simulator Debugger Breakpoints e To set a PC breakpoint in the Editor window 1 Make sure that the Disassemble or an Editor window is open at the place you want to set a PC breakpoint 2 Choose Toggle Breakpoint from the pop up menu or press F9 at the line showing the address at which you want the program to stop 3 You will see a red circle appear in the gutter to indicate that a PC breakpoint has been set 4 The current breakpoint set can be enabled or disabled by using Enable Disable Breakpoint in the pop up menu Now when you run your program and it reaches the address at which you set the PC breakpoint execution halts with the message Break PC Breakpoint displayed in the Debug sheet of the Output window and the Source or Disassembly window is updated with the PC breakpoint line marked with an arrow in the gutter Note When a break occurs the program stops just before it is about to execute the line or instruction at which you set a program PC breakpoint If you choose Go or Step after stopping at the PC breakpoint then the line marked with an arrow will be the next instruction to be executed When multiple targets are debugged it is possible to specify either or both of them is stopped For details refer to section 4 23 Synchronizing Multiple Debugging Platforms e To set a PC brea
157. ance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Version Control Setup 21x Commands Projects General Show details for project Projecti X m Details Version control directory mappings Version Control Director Add c work applicationsproject x vc swapp project1 ful c work application sre x Ave sw app sre Aodity c work shared x AWwe swi shared Hemave Environment hMiGalty REMOVE Cancel Export Import Figure 8 7 Version Control Setup Dialog Projects Tab gt To define a new mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab and the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Click the Add button that is next to the Version control directory mappings list The dialog shown in figure 8 8 will be displayed 3 Enter the source i e working directory into the Source directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Enter the version control directory i e controlled directory into the Version control directory Version Control Directory Mapping 2 x Source directory JeAwork shared gt Canal Version control directory f Wwesw shared Figure 8 8 Version Control Directory Mapping Dialog 130 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To modify an exis
158. ance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 1 5 Modifying the Assembly Language Code You can modify the assembly language code by double clicking on the instruction that you wish to change The Assembler dialog box will open Assembler Ea Address Code Mnemonic 00001012 O1006DF6 MOVL ERB ER OK Cancel Figure 4 5 Assembler Dialog Box The address machine code and disassembled instruction are displayed Enter the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonics field Pressing the Enter key will assemble the instruction into memory and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will assemble the instruction into memory and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing the Esc key will close the dialog box Note The assembly language display is disassembled from the actual machine code in the debugging platform s memory If the memory contents are changed the dialog box and Disassembly window will show the new assembly language code but the source file displayed in the Editor window will be unchanged This is the same even if the source file contains an assembler 4 1 6 Viewing a Specific Address When you are viewing your program in the Disassembly window you may wish to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Select Set Address from the pop up menu and the di
159. and R e ofall aizi Figure 11 1 Difference view gt To perform a difference comparison with two files on your local drive 1 Select Tools gt Show Differences The difference compare files dialog is displayed This is shown in figure 11 2 Ensure the compare with file on drive radio button is enabled 3 Enter the first and second file to compare You can either select a previous difference comparison or browse to a new file 4 Clicking the advanced button displays the dialog in 11 3 This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog 5 Click compare 6 The difference view is displayed The two files being compared are loaded into each side of the split view Their names are at the top of each window gt To perform a difference comparison with a local file and a file in SourceSafe 1 Ensure the SourceSafe component is enabled Also note that the file must be have been added into the version control system 2 Select Tools gt Show Differences The difference compare files dialog is displayed This is shown in figure 11 2 3 Ensure the compare with version control radio button is enabled 151 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 Enter the first file to compare You can either select a previous difference comparison or browse to a new file 5 Clicking the advanced button displays
160. and file groups can be viewed and modified via the File Extensions dialog figure 2 7 This is invoked by selecting Project gt File Extensions This dialog displays all of the extensions and file groups which are defined within the current workspace File Extensions Extension Group i Absolute file Assembly include file Cancel Assembly list file Add Assembly source file C header file R Remove list file C source file Open with C header file C list file C source file CPU information file Fynandad accambly cource tile Figure 2 7 File Extensions Dialog 19 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The File Extensions list shown in figure 2 7 is divided into two columns On the left are the file extensions themselves whilst on the right are the file groups Many file extensions can belong to the same group For example assembler source files may have several extensions in a single project e g src asm mar etc as shown in figure 2 8 mi SRC ASM MAR LIB EPE Assembler source files C source files Library files Figure 2 8 File Extensions and Groups When creating a new extension you should consider whether the extension belongs to a group which is already defined or whether you need to create a new file group If you are adding a completely new type of file then you will want to create a new file group This process is described below 2
161. ands can perform debug operations via the command line When these commands are executed can be selected in the Command batch file load timing drop down list Add the batch file to be executed after selecting an item in the Command batch file load timing drop down list The order in the list is the order in which the command line batch files will be executed when the timing event occurs 206 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 3 4 Manual Download of Modules Once you have decided which modules are to be downloaded to the target it is possible to manually update the modules of the connected target by selecting Debug gt Download Modules This allows a single module or all of the modules to be downloaded This can also be achieved by right clicking on modules under the Download Modules folder in the Workspace window 3 3 5 Automatic Download of Modules When you select Debug gt Run the HEW calculates whether any of the files or debugger settings that affect the modules have changed since the last download If the HEW detects a change then it asks the user whether a download needs to take place for each module If the user selects Yes then the module is downloaded to the target If you have banked multiple modules at the same start address only the first module at that address is downloaded by default It is then possible to manually load or unload the other modules in the list whenever you want from the
162. ased on a specified execution sequence If Stop is specified as the action for when a break condition is satisfied user program execution stops when the break condition is satisfied For details refer to section 4 15 Using the Simulator Debugger Breakpoints When a break condition is satisfied and user program execution stops the instruction at the breakpoint may or may not be executed before a break depending on the type of break as listed in table 2 3 Table 2 3 Processing When a Break Condition is Satisfied Command Instruction When a Break Condition is Satisfied BREAKPOINT Not executed BREAK_ACCESS Executed BREAK_CYCLE Executed BREAK_DATA Executed BREAK_REGISTER Executed BREAK_SEQUENCE Not executed For BREAKPOINT and BREAK_ SEQUENCE if a breakpoint is specified at an address other than the beginning of the instruction the break will not be detected When a break condition is satisfied during user program execution a break condition satisfaction message is displayed on the status bar and execution stops Break Due to Error Detection during User Program Execution The simulator debugger detects simulation errors that is program errors that cannot be detected by the CPU exception generation functions The Simulator System dialog box specifies whether to stop or continue the simulation when such an error occurs Table 2 4 lists the error messages error causes and the action of the simulator debugger in the
163. ave the contents of an editing window under a new name 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save As 3 A file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 69 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 3 Saving all Files gt To save the contents of every open editor window 1 Select File gt Save All or click the save all files toolbar button i 2 If any of the files has not been saved before a file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 3 If any of the files have been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed 4 3 4 Opening a File gt To open a file 1 Select File gt Open or click the open file toolbar button E or press CTRL O 2 An open file dialog box will be displayed Use the directory browser on the right to navigate to the directory in which the file you want to open is located Use the Files of type combo box to select the type of file you want to open or set it to All Files to see every file in a directory 3 Once you have located the file select it and click Open The High performance Embedded Workshop keeps track of the last fi
164. ayed under the templates folder The toolchain templates folder is for templates which are read only and have been provided for use in the HEW system by the current toolchain Templates in this view can be dragged for insertion into an editor file Itis also possible to drag an area of text from the editor into the templates folder for quick template creation Right clicking on this view displays a pop up so that you can quickly add a new template remove the current selection and edit the current selection 4 12 2 Deleting a Template gt To delete a template 1 Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates select Templates gt Define Templates from the local menu press CTRL T or click on the define template bookmark toolbar button Tie The dialog shown in figure 4 14 will be displayed 2 Use the Template name drop down list to select the name of the template you wish to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Clicking OK saves the template changes and dismisses the dialog 4 12 3 Inserting a Template gt To insert a template 1 Select a template in the toolbar then click the insert template toolbar button TF select Edit gt Templates gt Insert Template or select Templates gt Insert Template from the local menu The dialog is dismissed and the chosen template is added to the current editor window Note It is also possible to use the defined keyboard shortcut or drag the template from th
165. b Figure 6 9 Options Dialog Workspace Tab The following sections explain the options available on this tab 6 4 1 Open last workspace at start up Set this check box if you would like the High performance Embedded Workshop to automatically open the last workspace you opened when it is launched 6 4 2 Restore the files on opening workspace When you close a workspace the HEW stores which files were open When you open a workspace the HEW can restore i e open the same files so that you can continue your session in exactly the same state as when you 109 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual left it If you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when you open a workspace then set this check box 6 4 3 Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace When many workspaces are being used it is sometimes difficult to remember exactly what was contained within each workspace To help resolve this the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to enter a textual description of each workspace gt To enter a workspace description 1 Select the workspace icon from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop up menu and then select the Properties option The dialog shown in figure 6 10 will be displayed 3 Enter the description into the Information field 4 Check the Show workspace informati
166. bedded Workshop User s Manual gt Ifyou are trying to use a C function then the dialog in Figure 14 3 is displayed when the first open bracket is entered This dialog allows you to see what functions are available for the current object Selecting the function automatically enters the remaining parameters for you 164 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual include greatwhite h void main void void main void CGreatWhite cJaws cJaws m_n Hm_nDangerous BHm_nFins m_nJaws m_nlegs m_nliveinWater Wm _nlives m_nSea Figure 14 2 Smart edit member selection include greatwhite h void main void void main void CGreatWhite myfish myfish FeedTheShark int FeedTheShark CFish myFishyFood int FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyFood Figure 14 3 Smart edit function selection Note Smart edit auto completion may not pop up for a variety of reasons HEW can only provide help when the file has been scanned by the navigation component For this to work the file must have been saved Another issue is that defines are not considered so this means that redundant areas of code may still be visible 165 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Another important consideration is if the syntax of your code is incorrect the smart editor may not be able to parse your code correctly and the smart edit functionality will fail In this case no pop up will be displayed
167. bedded Workshop User s Manual Section 5 Command Lines Table 5 1 lists the commands Table 5 1 No Command Name Simulator Debugger Commands Abbreviation Function 1 Comment 2 ADD FILE AF Adds a file to the current project 3 ANALYSIS AN Enables or disables performance analysis 4 ANALYSIS_RANGE AR Sets or displays performance analysis functions 5 ANALYSIS_RANGE_ AD Deletes a performance analysis range DELETE 6 ASSEMBLE AS Assembles instructions into memory 7 ASSERT Checks if an expression is true or false 8 BREAKPOINT BP Sets a breakpoint at an instruction address 9 BREAK_ACCESS BA Specifies a memory range access as a break condition 10 BREAK_CLEAR BC Deletes breakpoints 11 BREAK_CYCLE BCY Specifies a cycle as a break condition 12 BREAK_DATA BD Specifies a memory data value as a break condition 13 BREAK_DISPLAY BI Displays a list of breakpoints 14 BREAK ENABLE BE Enables or disables a breakpoint 15 BREAK REGISTER BR Specifies a register data as a break condition 16 BREAK SEQUENCE BS Sets sequential breakpoints 17 BUILD BU Performs a build on the current project 18 BUILD_ALL BL Performs a build all on the current project 19 CACHE Sets caching on or off 20 CHANGE_CONFIGURA CC Sets the current configuration TION 21 CHANGE PROJECT CP Sets the current project 22 COVERAGE CV Enables or disables coverage measurement 23 C
168. bel name must not overlap mutually in 1024 characters or less Labels are case sensitive 4 6 9 Searching for the Next Label Choose Find Next from the pop up menu to find the next occurrence of the label containing the text that you entered 4 6 10 Viewing the Source Corresponding to a Label Select a label and choose View Source from the pop up menu to open the Source or Disassembly window containing the address corresponding to the label 236 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 7 Looking at Registers If you are debugging at assembly language level then you will probably find it useful to see the contents of the CPU s general registers You can do this using the Register window 4 7 1 Opening the Register Window To open the Register window choose View gt CPU gt Registers or click the Register toolbar button E The Register window opens showing all of the CPU s general registers and the values displayed in hexadecimal a Register Register Name RO H o0000000 R1 H o0000000 R2 H o0000000 R3 H 00000000 R4 H o0000000 RS H 00000000 RG H 00000000 R7 H 00000000 Rg H o0000000 R9 H o0000000 R10 H o0000000 R11 H o0000000 R12 H 00000000 R13 H o0000000 R14 H 00000000 R15 H OFFFFFFO H 00000800 H o0000000 VBR H o0000000 MACH H o0000000 MACL H oo000000 z Tr 4 Figure 4 32 Register Window 237 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manu
169. ble must be specified This must be version 4 0 or greater otherwise the behavior is not guaranteed The second item of data is the session file This tells HDI which session to load when it is launched Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to HDI when the download module changes after a build 62 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button to invoke HDI with the specified session file al After a build if the download module has been updated the HEW will switch back to HDI to enable immediate debugging Whilst using HDI double clicking in any source window will switch back to the HEW with the source file open at the line which was double clicked 3 10 Generating a Makefile The HEW allows you to generate a makefile which can be used to build parts of your workspace without HEW This is particularly useful of you want to send a project to a user who does not have the HEW or if you want to version control an entire build including the make components gt To generate a makefile 1 Ensure that the project which you want to generate a makefile for is the current project 2 Ensure that the build configuration that you want to build the project with is the current configuration 3 Select Build gt Generate Makefile 4 Once this menu has been selected a dialog is displayed which asks the user what parts
170. bug Sessions dialog box figure 3 19 207 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Debug Sessions RiGpenes SimS essionH8S 26004 v Figure 3 19 Debug Sessions Dialog Box 2 Select the session you want to use from the Current session drop down list 3 Click the OK button to set the session 208 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 4 2 Adding and Deleting Sessions A new session can be added by copying settings from another session or deleting a session e To add anew empty session Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 3 19 Click the Add button to display the Add new session dialog box figure 3 20 Check the Add new session radio button Enter a name for the session Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box This creates a file with the same name as the entered session name If the file name already exists an error is displayed ONAA E a a E Add new session 2 xj o n Figure 3 20 Add new session Dialog Box 209 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e To import an existing session into a new session file 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 3 19 2 Click the Add button to display the Add new session dialog box figure 3 20 3 Check the Use an existing sess
171. byte count from the start of the file The following shows an example for inputting one character as a standard input from a keyboard MOV W H 0101 RO MOV W PARM R1 JSR SYS_CALL STOP NOP SYS_CALL NOP PARM DATA W INBUF INBUF RES B 2 END 301 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 23 Synchronizing Multiple Debugging Platforms Multiple debugging platforms can be operated at the same time in the HEW There are two methods available to achieve this These are outlined below the external method was available in HEW 2 x The Internal synchronization of debugger targets is the new preferred method for multiple target debugging in HEW 3 0 4 23 1 External HEW synchronization Initiating a HEW from another HEW synchronizes multiple debugging platforms The HEW that initiates another HEW is called the master and the initiated HEW is called the slave Choose Tools gt Launch Slave HEW or click the Launch Slave HEW toolbar button 4 to initiate a slave HEW The slave HEW has the same functionality as the master HEW The slave HEW is notified of the following actions done in the master HEW to ensure synchronization of the slave HEW and the master HEW e Reset go e Go e Stop debugging Note The master HEW can initiate multiple slave HEW applications but slave HEW applications cannot be nested no slave HEW can initiate another slave HEW 302 4 23 2 High performance Embedded Workshop User
172. c scsssessiavisveraxcasissssreatsevstcdeiesssesaiesateiigessssavesticisa evens anise 375 GA Placeholder Tips tsssssciscsssavessessiciscnssavesseavecisseasaxavsssvaciesoasunaaasereiaashasearahaveidi TEE TEVOET 377 Appendix D I O File Format s hiie iiA E N E E Ei 379 Del File fortnatizss cute AEA TE E EA A E EA ES 379 Appendix E Symbol File Format ccc eeeecsesessessessessessensensenees 381 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Main application High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 Overview This chapter describes the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop It is intended to give users who are new to Windows applications filling in the details that are required by later chapters 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a project can be though of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files Figure 1 1 illustrates this graphically PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT RKSPACE Figure 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Workspaces allow you to group related pro
173. cas veet lila etal divest dalle eased 327 CACHE ieoa et E E a AS Sl N Std IES ea a Balt Ni 327 CHANGE_CONFIGURATIION v reirse asse Esia aR AEREE E ARA 328 CHANGE PROJECT rnio naag s aree ANESSE VE PERLA Aaa DO PERETE EEEE EAEEREN REEE 328 COVERAGE arar E A EEE E EEE 329 COVERAGES DISPLA Yyisorrinisei oneee aT EAE GEETE 329 COVERAGE LOAD erita NEEE NEOA VER Ee 330 COVERAGE RANGE eia r AOE 330 COVERAGE SAVE rivenia Nerise En NAET AATE EENE ATEN 331 DEFAULT OBJECT_FORMAT oi is ccscisessssassevessiavossshsstevetsdzanscsassacvobadsonssabacusestedaosestoies 331 DISASSEMB IB ss sseses E ET sass vers vses E sess vazsees saa E A 332 RAGE sesh E EEEE RN EARI IERS EATE E ERORE 332 EVA UATE el aie ae tee aa eas sd are a i dn 333 EXEC UMODE iiss testes atten eA math MiG Retains tetl aeal detainee eant Malas 334 BILE SLOAD D REEE AO EA EEE 335 PILE SAVE kasano peranna A A TA VA ITE 336 FPILE UNLOAD agiri iaee Ere E EAEE CEEA ETER TE ENTES 336 FILE VERIFY aircsscicivecccsccwsauconvereseuseusuneaetuvaucvssvdineveeaveivnssvd tenceusaussvds levesvsaesdevesterouverss 338 GENERATE MAKE FILE pennorin dived alas cocci Gate diced ae 338 GO eh iets E A EE AE 339 GO RESET cose scangccessutessansengusabivanteatdneecesspvenionstnsntessnvendvesancueassuseteespaanreesoee ENEKEN 340 COL TIL EEE TT sbded ds svavi sey sans ansvasiara sesbseneseashon 340 VAM Te asst acs vos casssazesses vest sasusess evs sev sntsusecyevs A 341 J DND BE PAN A A E E E E E E E 342 OG a E ASARES 3
174. ce Buffer Full Handling in the Trace Acquisition dialog box the simulator debugger stops execution when the trace buffer becomes full The following message is displayed in the Output window when execution is stopped Trace Buffer Full Break Due to Execution of the SLEEP Instruction When the SLEEP instruction is executed during instruction execution the simulator debugger stops execution The following message is displayed in the Output window when execution is stopped Sleep Note When restarting execution change the PC value to the instruction address at the restart location Break Due to the Halt Button Users can forcibly terminate execution by clicking the HALT button during instruction execution The following message is displayed on the status bar when execution is stopped Stop Execution can be resumed with the GO or STEP command 2 13 Floating Point Data Floating point numbers can be used for the following real number data which makes floating point data processing easier The following data can be specified for floating point data e Data in the Set Break dialog box when the break type is set to Break Data or Break Register e Data in the Memory window e Data in the Fill Memory dialog box e Data in the Search Memory dialog box e Input data in the Register dialog box 185 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The floating point data format conforms to the ANSI C standard
175. ce Embedded Workshop editor supports standard editing functionality This is available through the usual methods i e the menu toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and is additionally supported via a pop up menu or local menu that is local to each editor window To invoke it place the pointer in an open window and click the right mouse button Table 4 1 outlines the basic operations that are provided by the editor Table 4 1 Basic Editing Operations Operation Effect Action Cut Removes highlighted text and places it on the Click the cut toolbar button Windows clipboard Select Edit gt Cut Select Cut local menu Press CTRL X Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Click the copy toolbar button Windows clipboard Select Edit gt Copy Select Copy local menu Press CTRL C Paste Copies the contents of the Windows Click the paste toolbar button clipboard into the active window at the Select Edit gt Paste position of the insertion cursor Select Paste local menu Press CTRL V Delete Removes highlighted text it is not copied to Select Edit gt Clear the Windows clipboard Select Clear local menu Press Delete Select All Selects i e highlights the entire contents of Select Edit gt Select All the activenindow Select Select All local menu Undo Reverses the last editing operation Select Edit gt Undo Select Undo local menu Press CTRL Z Redo Repeats the last undone editing operati
176. ch conditions other than pattern search are data match mismatch and search direction Note that only data match and forward direction can be selected with pattern search Click the OK button or press the Enter key The dialog box closes and the HEW searches the range for the specified data If the data is found the address at which the data has been found is displayed in the Memory window If the data could not be found the Memory window display remains unchanged and a message box informing that the data could not be found is displayed If Search Next is selected from the pop up menu in the state where data has been found the search will continue from the next address 4 2 8 Filling a Memory Area with a Value A value can be set as the contents of a memory address range using the memory fill function To fill the same value in a memory range choose Fill from the pop up menu of the Memory window or choose Fill from the Memory drop down menu The Fill Memory dialog box is shown in figure 4 12 220 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Fill Memory ag 2 x Cancel End fee Data Figure 4 12 Fill Memory Dialog Box If an address range has been selected in the Memory window the specified start and end addresses will be displayed Select a format from the Format drop down list and enter the data value in the Data field It is also possible to fill the memory by checking the Ver
177. chnical Support Issues The Tools Administration dialog is also capable of displaying information regarding hidden system components These are part of the HEW itself that cannot be unregistered registered manually If you check the Show all components check box on the tools administration dialog extra component folders are displayed see figure 5 11 Tools Administration 24 xi Registered components oa nw TELL F System Tools Utility Phases E Debugger Components Register Extension Components Uneaster F F E Communication Tools 9 System Extension Components E Project Generators gt Hitachi HS roject Generator SH Project Generator 21 E Project Generators Custom 9 Version Control System 9 Toolchain Support Definition Parser Properties Export Search disk Tool information Uninstaller Fa IV Show all components Current HEW tools database location CAHew Modify Figure 5 11 All Components Shown When seeking technical support you may be asked to give details about some or all of these components To do so open the respective folder select a component and click the Properties button The properties dialog that will be invoked behaves in the same way as discussed previously in this chapter with the exception that there is no Environment tab The HEW also has a
178. click the Remove button Add Keyword Figure 4 13 Add Keyword Dialog When you create a new file syntax coloring will not be active as a new file does not initially have an extension new files are named arbitrarily by the editor without an extension In order to activate syntax coloring you must save the new file with a name which has one of the above extensions gt To disable enable syntax coloring 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Enable syntax coloring check box as necessary and then click OK 83 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 12 Templates When developing software it is often necessary to enter the same text repeatedly for instance when typing a function definition for loop or a comment block for a function The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to specify a block of text or template which can be inserted into the currently active editor window Thus once a template has been defined it can be automatically inserted without the need to re enter it manually 4 12 1 Defining a Template gt To define a template 1 Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates select Templates gt Define Templates from the local menu press CTRL T or click on the define template toolbar button oT The dialog shown in figure 4 14 will be displayed
179. companies or organizations Document Information Product Code S32HEWM Version 3 Copyright Renesas Technology Corp 2003 All rights reserved High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Introduction The High performance Embedded Workshop HEW is a powerful development environment for embedded applications targeted at Renesas technology microcontrollers The main features are A configurable build engine that allows you to set up compiler assembler and linker options via an easy to use interface An integrated text editor with user customizable syntax coloring to improve code readability A configurable environment to run your own tools An integrated debugger which allows you to build and debug in the same application Version control support The High peformance Embedded Workshop has been designed with two key aims firstly to provide you the user with a set of powerful development tools and secondly to unify and present them in a way that is easy to use High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual About This Manual This manual describes the HEW system This manual is composed of two parts HEW part describes information on the basic look and feel of the HEW and customizing the HEW environment and detail the build Simulator Debugger part describes Debugger functions of the High performance Embedded Workshop This manual does not intend to explain how to write C C or assembly language program
180. condition to acquire instruction execution information The following items can be specified File Source file whose type number is C or CPP in the current project Functions in the specified file can be set as the coverage range If the type number of the file is omitted C is complemented The file that has other type numbers than C or CPP cannot be specified A placeholder or the Browse button is available Clicking OK changes the coverage range 4 17 6 Clearing Coverage Information Choose Clear Data from the pop up menu to clear the acquired coverage information 4 17 7 Saving Coverage Information in a File Choose Save Data from the pop up menu to open the Save Data dialog box which allows the user to save the coverage information in a file Figure 4 75 Save Data Dialog Box This dialog box specifies the location and name of a coverage information file to be saved The placeholder or the Browse button can be used If a file name extension is omitted COV is automatically added If a file name extension other than COV or TXT is specified an error message will be displayed 278 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 17 8 Loading Coverage Information from a File Choose Load Data from the pop up menu to open the Load Data dialog box which allows the user to load the coverage information from a file Load Data Figure 4 76 Load Data Dialog Box This d
181. control support provides two placeholders User login name USERNAME and User login password PASSWORD When the command is executed these placeholders will be replaced with the current settings in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 13 Yersion Control Setup Figure 8 13 Version Control Setup Dialog General Tab 134 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual In order to give the USERNAME and PASSWORD fields a value you will first need to login If you have not logged in before a command is executed which uses either of these placeholders then you will be prompted to do so before the command can be executed gt To login i e specify a user name and password 1 Click the Log in button The dialog shown in figure 8 14 will be displayed Enter your user name into the User name field 2 3 Enter your password into the Password field 4 Re type your password again into the Confirm password by retyping it below field 5 Click OK to set the new user name and password If there is any inconsistency between the two versions of the password which you entered then you will be requested to type your password again Log in 21x User name Lox Cancel Password Confirm password by retyping it below xxx Figure 8 14 Log in Dialog 135 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manu
182. ct Edit gt Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark press F2 or select Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark from the local menu or click the next bookmark toolbar button m al To jump to the previous bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark press SHIFT F2 or select Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark from the local menu or click the previous bookmark toolbar button nal To remove all bookmarks in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose bookmarks you want to remove is the active window 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks or select Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks from the local menu or click the clear all bookmarks toolbar button oH 4 7 Printing a File gt 76 To print a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to print is the active window 2 Select File gt Print or click the print toolbar button or press CTRL P High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 8 Configuring Text Layout The following sections detail how to set up the layout of the text within the editor windows 4 8 1 Page Set up When you print a file from the High performance Embedded Workshop editor the settings in the print dialog box affect the way in which the file is printed e g double or single sided Control over how the text is formatted on the page can also be controlled via the page se
183. ction Select Function Set Function 5 Functions 4 Functions 1 Functions Cancel Figure 4 39 Select Function Dialog Box Select overloaded functions or member functions in the Select Function dialog box Generally one function can be selected at one time only for setting breakpoints multiple functions can be selected This dialog box has three areas Select Function Name Displays the same name functions or member functions and their detailed information Set Function Name Displays the function to be set and their detailed information Counter All Function Displays the number of same name functions or member functions Select Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Select Function Name list box Set Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box Selecting a Function Click the function you wish to select in the Select Function Name list box and click the gt button You will see the selected function in the Set Function Name list box To select all functions in the Select Function Name list box click the gt gt button Deselecting a Function Click the function you wish to deselect from the Set Function Name list box and click the lt button To deselect all functions click the lt lt button The deselected function will be moved from Set Function Name list box back to the Select Function Name list box Sett
184. cts tab of the Workspace window To update the dependencies select Build gt Update All Dependencies 370 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix B Regular Expressions The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to include special characters in search strings when performing a find or replace operation These characters are listed in table B 1 and are detailed in the following pages Table B 1 Regular Expression Characters Character Function Matches any single character except newline Matches any number of occurrences 0 or more of any character except a newline n Matches a new line character t Matches a tab character Matches any one character or range listed within the brackets Overrides any following regular expression character e Symbol Meaning This character matches any single character except the newline character Example t p matches top tip but not trap e Symbol Meaning This character matches any number of occurrences 0 or more of any character except a newline Thus this character will not match across new lines The character will match as few occurrences as are necessary to make the rest of the pattern match Example 1 t o matches the to of too the tro of trowel and the ty o of sporty orange but not smart orange because the character does not match across a
185. d or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems for transportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use 6 The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials 7 If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited 8 Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or the products contained therein High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Visual SourceSafe is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation All brand or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
186. ddress gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt start address gt Numeric Specified start address lt end address gt Numeric Specified end address optional default start address lt mode gt Keyword Access type optional default RW R Read only Ww Write only RW Displays the current memory mapping Examples MAP_SET 0000 3FFF RW A read write enabled area is allocated to addresses H 0000 to H 3FFF MS 5000 A read write enabled area is allocated to address H 5000 343 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 45 MEMORY COMPARE Abbreviation MC Description Compares the memory area between the start address and the end address with the memory starting at destination address Syntax mc lt start gt lt end gt lt dest gt lt access size gt Parameter Type Description lt start gt Numeric Start address lt end gt Numeric End address lt dest gt Numeric Destination address lt access Keyword Access size optional default byte size gt byte Displays in byte units word Displays in word units 2 bytes long Displays in longword units 4 bytes ascii Displays in ASCII codes single Displays in single precision floating point format double Displays in double precision floating point format Examples MEMORY_COMPARE H 1000 H 1 FFF Compares the memory between H 1000 and H 2000 LONG H 1FFF with the memory starting at H 2000
187. ded Workshop User s Manual relevant However at this stage it is worth taking a few moments to familiarize yourself with the options that each menu provides 1 2 3 The Toolbars The toolbars provide a shortcut to the options which you will use the most often There are eight default toolbars Bookmarks Debug Debug Run Editor Search Standard Templates Version Control and Difference as shown in figure 1 3 to 1 11 Toolbars can be created modified and removed via the Tools gt Customize menu option see chapter 6 Customizing the Environment for further information Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Togele Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks nase Figure 1 3 Bookmarks Toolbar TCL Toolkit View Disassembly Command Line Print the Disassembly window Enable Disable Breakpoint Radix Connect to debug platform Disconnect debue platform S amp agieos2 am Toggle Breakpoint RE Figure 1 4 Debug Toolbar Reset CPU Step Over Go to Cursor Step Out Reset Go Set PC to Cursor Go Step Halt l 1 THO Ot Figure 1 5 Debug Run Toolbar Save File Copy Match Braces Open File Save All Cut Paste Insert Template New File Print Toggle Bookmark Dehd Stee OTa Figure 1 6 Editor Toolbar Find in Files Find Next Search Strine Find Find Previous l aro JARRA Figure 1 7 Search Toolbar High performance Embedded Wor
188. directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button In most cases this should be set to the FILEDIR placeholder i e execute the command from the same directory as the file 4 Set the Executable return code options as described in the following section 5 Click OK to define the new command 8 2 1 Executable return code Tf the return code of the command s can be used to indicate a failure then you should select the Command has failed if the return code is option and set the two fields to the right as required If the Command has failed if the return code is option is selected then the HEW will check the return code of each command to determine whether a failure occurred If so no further commands will be executed and any other processes which would follow the commands e g build will not be executed If the Return code of tool is not meaningful option is selected then the HEW will not check the return code of each Consequently all commands will execute regardless 127 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 3 Specifying Arguments It is obvious that arguments must be specified correctly otherwise the version control tool executed will not function as intended However it is also important when using custom version control support to specify the arguments in a flexible way as a single version control command can be applied to more than one fi
189. dow in the same way as the normal build process Build Multiple x hewtest1 Debug hewtest Release hewtest2 Debug hewtest2 Release hewtest3 Debug hewtest3 Release hewtest4 Debug hewtest4 Release hewtest5 Debug hewtest5 Release Cancel Figure 2 18 Build Multiple Dialog 2 6 5 The Output Window When a tool executes i e compiler assembler linker etc its output is displayed in the Output window If any of the tools produce any errors or warnings then they are displayed along with the source file name and the line 30 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual number at which the error is located To quickly locate a specific bug double click on a given error warning to invoke the current editor 2 6 6 Controlling the Content of the Output Window It is often useful to display low level information such as the command line options that are being applied to a file during a build The HEW allows you to specify whether or not you want such options displayed in the Output window during a build build all or build file operation via the Tools Options dialog gt To view or hide extra information during a build 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed 2 Select the Build tab figure 2 19 3 Set the three check boxes in the Show group as follows
190. dule must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the section each entry defines an I O register The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations of the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode Each module has a section that defines the registers forming it along with an optional dependency the dependency is checked to see if the module is enabled or not Each register name must be defined in the section and the numbering of each register must be sequential The dependency is entered in the section as dep lt reg gt lt bit gt lt value gt 1 lt reg gt is the register id of the dependency 2 lt bit gt is the bit position within the register 3 lt value gt is the value that the bit must be for the module to be enabled The Register definition entry is entered in the format id lt name gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt lt format gt lt bitfields gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of th
191. e SH3 DSP Core SimSessionSH3 DSP SH3 DSP Simulator Un synchronise session Figure 4 91 Simulator Memory Resource Dialog Box gt To use internal HEW synchronization 1 2 Follow the options as specified in To setup internal HEW synchronization Click on the session combo box located on the standard toolbar Select the Synch Debug selection This is shown in figure 4 92 This option is only available when synchronized debugging has been added to the system 303 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 Once selected the HEW debugger enables the Synchronized debugging facilities This means the addition of another toolbar this is named Sync session This can also be viewed in Figure 4 92 4 The enable disable toolbar button on the Synch session toolbar allows you to temporarily switch off the synchronization without losing your settings for this feature 5 When enabled changing the session in the Sync session combo box changes the session you are currently viewing In the normal HEW debugging state this would mean the session is closed In Synch session you can have multiple sessions open and the currently selected one on this toolbar is the session you are viewing 6 This system allows you to debug multiple targets or CPU cores simultaneously Changing the session changes the views you can see on the screen and the data displayed
192. e Watch window to add Watch items to the Watch window gt To use Add Watch from a Watch window Open the Watch window Choose Add Watch from the pop up menu The Add Watch dialog box opens Add Watch Ea Verable or evpression Cancel str Figure 4 46 Add Watch Dialog Box Enter the name of the variable that you wish to watch and click OK The variable is added to the Watch window A variable can be dragged from the Editor window and dropped into the Watch window Note If the variable that you have added is a local variable that is not currently in scope the HEW will add it to the Watch window but its value will be Not available now Expanding a Watch Item If a watch item is a pointer array or structure then you will see a plus sign expansion indicator to left of its name this means that you can expand the watch item To expand a watch item click on it The item expands to show the elements in the case of structures and arrays or data value in the case of pointers indented by one tab stop and the plus sign changes to a minus sign If the elements of the watch item also contain pointers structures or arrays then they will also have expansion indicators next to them 249 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Watch Window O OL x Expanded Name Value sft x yad re 0 SDSL CL D 5 Expansion 2 D 12 indicat wee Temp Na
193. e or choose Debug gt Step Over 4 8 8 Stepping Out of a Function There are occasions when you may have entered a function finished stepping through the instructions that you want to examine and would like to return to the calling function without tediously stepping through all the remaining code in the function Or alternatively you may have stepped into a function by accident when you meant to step over it and so want to return to the calling function without stepping all the way through the current function You can do this with the Step Out feature To step out of the current function either click the Step Out toolbar button e or choose Debug gt Step Out 4 8 9 Multiple Steps You can step several instructions at a time by using the Step Program dialog box The dialog box also provides an automated step with a selectable delay between steps Open it by choosing Debug gt Step 241 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Step Program dialog box is displayed Step Program Steps Delay seconds 1 25 seconds J Step Over Calls Source Level Step Ces Figure 4 37 Step Program Dialog Box Steps Number of steps to be executed Delay seconds Delay between steps when the program is automatically stepped Value 0 to 6 can be specified where value 0 indicates the longest delay Step Over Calls Selecting this box steps over function calls Source Level Step Sel
194. e split up bar Moving the split up bar to the top end or bottom end of the window cancels the split up display 4 2 4 Viewing a Different Memory Area To change the memory area displayed in the Memory window use the scroll bars To quickly look at a new address use the Format dialog box This can be opened by choosing Format from the pop up menu 218 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Enter the new address value and click the OK button or press the Enter key The dialog box closes and the Memory window display is updated with the data at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function 4 2 5 Modifying the Memory Contents The memory contents can be modified via the Edit Memory dialog box Move the cursor on the memory unit according to the Memory window display choice that you wish to change Either double click on the memory unit or press the Enter key The dialog box shown in figure 4 10 is displayed Edit Memory x Current Value Cancel New Value p Figure 4 10 Edit Memory Dialog Box A number or C C expression can be entered in the New Value field After you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key Then the dialog box closes and the new value is written into memory The memory contents can also be modified by moving the cursor on the me
195. e Count Histogram 0 _main 1304 1 0 rintf 1100 22 0 40 it Os Figure 4 67 Performance Analysis Window This window displays the number of execution cycles required for each specified function The number of execution cycles are calculated as follows Execution cycles total number of execution cycles when execution returns from the function total number of execution cycles when the target function is called The following items are displayed Index Index number of the set condition Function Name of the function to be measured or the start address of the function Cycle Total number of instruction execution cycles Count Total number of calls for the function Ratio of execution cycle count required for the function to the execution cycle count required for the whole program 271 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Histogram Histogram display of the above ratio 4 16 2 Specifying a Target Function After the Performance Analysis window is open choose Add Range from the pop up menu or press the Insert key to open the Performance Option dialog box which allows the user to specify a function to be analyzed Function Name jl Cancel Figure 4 68 Performance Option Dialog Box This dialog box specifies a function including a label to be evaluated Up to 255 functions can be specified in total When an overloaded function or a class name including a membe
196. e Enter key is input repeatedly the second larger data the second smaller data when the Minimum is specified is searched for e Clear Data Clears the number of times functions are called and profile data Data in the List sheet of the Profile window and the data in the Profile Chart window are also cleared e Output Profile Information Files Displays the Save Profile Information Files dialog box Profiling results are saved in a profile information file pro extension The optimizing linkage editor optimizes user programs according to the profile information in this file For details of the optimization using the profile information refer to the manual of the optimizing linkage editor Note If profile information has been acquired by choosing the Not trace the function call menu the program cannot be optimized by the optimizing linkage editor e Output Text File Displays the Save Text of Profile Data dialog box Displayed contents are saved in a text file e Setting This menu has the following submenus the menus available only in the List sheet are also included 1 Show Functions Variables Displays both functions and global variables in the Function Variable column 2 Show Functions Displays only functions in the Function Variable column 3 Show Variables Displays only global variables in the Function Variable column 4 Only Executed Functions Only displays the executed functions If a stack informa
197. e Visual SourceSafe version control system associates a project in your workspace with a project inside a Visual SourceSafe database It allows you to quickly invoke the standard commands either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a Workspace The following sections describe how you can associate Visual SourceSafe with your current workspace 9 1 1 Selecting Visual SourceSafe First you need to select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system gt To use Visual SourceSafe 5 0 or 6 0 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog will be displayed figure 7 3 which lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 entry from the Version Control Systems list and click the Select button 3 Click OK to confirm the selection The SourceSafe Login dialog is displayed figure 9 1 4 Enter your Visual SourceSafe login into Username and password into Password 5 Enter into Database path the full path to the Visual SourceSafe database i e SRCSAFE INI into which you would like to add this project 6 Click OK The Create SourceSafe Project dialog is invoked figure 9 2 7 The Project name field displays the name of the project i e folder to be created in the database If necessar
198. e module display will expand to show the individual registers of that peripheral module and their names addresses and values Double clicking or pressing the Enter key again on the module name will close the I O register display For a display in the bit level expand the I O register in a similar way to the Registers window 4 5 3 Manually loading an IO file To manually load an IO file right click on the IO window and select the Load IO file menu item on the IO window pop up A standard file browser is invoked Simply select the file you require to load and click OK The IO file will be loaded into the window 4 5 4 Modifying the I O Register Contents To edit the value in an I O register type hexadecimal values directly into the window To enter more complex expressions double click or press the Enter key on the register to open a dialog box to modify the register contents When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 4 6 Looking at Labels Symbol information is included in the debugging information which is used when the HEW links the user program source code to the actual code in the memory Symbol information is also included in the debug object file This information is a list of names that indicate addresses in the program These names are called labels in the HEW The Disassembly window shows the f
199. e next display lt Back Returns to the previous display Finish Opens the Summary dialog box selections followed by this button are default Cancel Returns to the New Project Workspace dialog box To move to Step 2 click the Next gt button in Step 1 191 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual New Project Step 2 21x Treat double as float Pass struct parameter via register Pass 4 byte parameter return value Figure 3 3 Option Setting Display Step 2 2 Specify the options common to all project files in Step 2 The specifiable items depend on the CPU selected in Step 1 List Box Settings Operating Mode Specifies the operating mode of the object to be created Normal Normal mode Advanced Advanced mode Address Space Specifies the address space of the object to be created 1M byte Specifies 1 Mbyte address space 16M byte Specifies 16 Mbyte address space 256M byte Specifies 256 Mbyte address space 4G byte Specifies 4 Gbyte address space Merit of Library Specifies whether the priority of the standard library is speed or code size Code Size Reduces size Speed Execution speed Stack calculation Specifies the range of the stack address Small 1 byte calculation of the stack address Medium 2 byte calculation of the stack address Large 4 byte calculation of the stack address Check Box Settings Change number of parameter registers from Three registe
200. e register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or long word default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different modes In this case if a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not performed and the specified address is used directly 5 lt format gt Format for register output Valid values are H for Hexadecimal D for decimal and B for binary 6 lt bitfields gt section defining the bits within the register Bitfield sections define the bits within a register each entry is of the type bit lt no gt lt name gt 1 lt no gt is the bit number 2 lt name gt is a symbolic name of the bit 379 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Comment lines are allowed and must start with a character gt Example Comment SH7034 Family I O Register Definitions File Modules BaseAddress 0 Module1 lt Power_Down_Mode_Registers Modules Module2 DMA_Channel_Cormrmon Module3 DMA_O_Short_Address_Mode Module42 Bus_Controller Module43 System Module44 Interrupt_Controller DMA_Channel_Common regO regD MAWER Module reg regD MATCR Definition reg2 reqD MABCRH SAM reg3 reqDMABCRL SAM reg4 regDMABCRHF AM reg5S regDMABCRALFAM dep regMSTPCRH7 0 Register Bit Value reaD MAWER id DMAWER Oxffff00 B A H dma
201. e server machine All other client machines then use the service this machine is providing So if one of the client machines adds a new file the server machine is notified The server then notifies all other clients the action has taken place This structure is shown below in figure 10 1 Networked workspace and project Network t access eo Networked_Data_Example Networked_Data_Example a Debug 4 SimDebug SH 2 Server Network access All files are under the network service s control These include the workspace project session and source files Clients do not access data directly with the workspace and project files on the network The clients cannot directly communicate with each other either All communication is directed through the server machine Figure 10 1 Network database access structure The network system allows users to be given access rights to files This allows the project administrator to make sure the only people who can modify the project and source files are allowed to do so This might allow the administrator to limit each user to only have write capabilities for their own area of the project other areas would be read only This could limit any potential conflict or damage one user could do to other areas of the project These limitations can be set to a number of different levels This is outlined later in this section Note Certain operations are locked when other clients a
202. e star PResetPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D 0800 B R OF v P Figure 4 50 Standard Toolchain Dialog Box 1 252 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 12 2 Profile Information Files To create a profile information file choose the Output Profile Information Files menu option from the pop up menu of the Profile window and specify the file name after measuring a profile data of the application program This file contains information on the number of times functions are called and global variables are accessed The Optimizing Linker ver 7 0 or later is capable of reading the profile information file and optimizing the allocation of functions and variables in correspondence with the status of the actual operation of the program To input the profiler information file to the linker choose Optimize from the Category list box and check the Include Profile box in the Link Library sheet of the Standard Toolchain dialog box and specify the name of the profile information file H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain 2 x C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU gt Category Optimize x Show entries for Optimize items z Optimize Speed x Eliminated size Tey T Include profile Modity sache sre i Sree ine Tony Configuration SimDebug_H85 26004 z Unify string Eliminate dead code K K K K
203. e templates view 86 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 12 4 Brace Matching Complicated source code can often become unwieldy especially when blocks of C code are deeply nested within each other or when complex logic statements are expressed within an if clause To help in such situations the High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides a match brace feature which highlights text between braces of type and gt To find a matching brace 1 Either highlight the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it 2 Click the match braces toolbar button press CTRL B select Edit gt Match Braces or select Match Braces from the local menu To check the structure of an entire file place the cursor at its start and then repeatedly invoke the match brace operation The editor will successively highlight each pair of braces in turn until there are no more to match 87 4 13 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Editor Column management The editor in HEW has the ability to manage columns apart from the main editor column These can be added and used by debugger feature You can choose the column to display undisplay tutorial c 5 x 0x00000a0c 0x00000a16 0x00000a18 0x00000820 0x00000a2c 0x00000a2e 000000836 0200000838 0x00000a3a 0x00000a44 0x00000a62 0x00000a66 0x00000a72 0x00000a74 include lt no_float
204. e the tools location 1 Select Tools gt Administration 2 Click the Modify button for the Current HEW tools database location field 3 Select the directory under which the new tool is located then click OK 4 This will switch the directory and change the tool location to the new directory It will be necessary to scan for any new tools that may be in this location this is achieved by using the scan disk or register tool functionality 92 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 3 Registering Components The HEW will automatically attempt to register any new components installed since the last time it was invoked However in some circumstances you may need to register components yourself 5 3 1 Searching Drives for Components In some cases it is useful to search a drive for HEW compatible components This is especially useful if the HEW installation was deleted or corrupted as it can recreate your tool information instantly gt To search for components 1 Click the Search Disk button on the Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 The Search Disk for Components dialog will be displayed figure 5 3 Search Disk for Components Select the directory in which to begin the search Close c Hew Browse I Include subfolders i RPE Located components Component HRF Location Register Generic Watch View ECX 1 0 C Hew Too Generic Waveform V
205. e workspace window Right click and then select Modify folder name Enter the new name in the dialog Click OK 39 40 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 Advanced Build Features This chapter explains the more advanced build concepts 3 1 The Build Process Revisited Chapter 2 Build Basics began by describing the build process in terms of a compiler an assembler and a linker figure 2 1 This will be the case for most installations of the High performance Embedded Workshop However if you want to begin changing the build process e g adding and removing phases then it is important to understand more about the way in which a build functions 3 1 1 What is a Build Building a project means applying a set of tools upon certain input files in order to produce the desired output Thus we apply a compiler upon C C source files in order to create object files we apply an assembler upon assembler source files in order to create object files and so forth At each step or phase of the build we apply a different tool upon a different set of input files Figure 3 1 presents another view of the build process Kas BEGIN fal gt PHASE 1 gt Phase 1 Input Files Phase 1 Output Files N rf PHASE 2 gt Phase 2 Input Files l Phase 2 Output Files S lt J PHASE 3 gt
206. ect a configuration named debug has a configuration directory located at c hew workspace project debug HEW EXE is installed in c hew a HRF file of a toolchain i e compiler assembler linker is located in c hew toolchain renesas sh 5 11 This is referred to as TCINSTALL on the option setting dialogs of the Options menu and as TOOLDIR on the Tools Administration dialog the Windows operating system is installed in c Windows and the Windows system directory is c Windows System a version control executable path is v vc win32 ss exe a user name and its password to login the version control system are JHARK and 214436 respectively COMMENT is specified in a command line to the version control executable and c project is mapped to x vc project on the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog which is invoked via Tools gt Version Control gt Configure an error of compiler or assembler occurred at line 12 376 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Note Not all of the placeholders are relevant in every field For example the LINE placeholder has no meaning when specifying a dependent files location USERNAME PASSWORD VCDIR and COMMENT placeholders are acceptable only in version control If you enter a placeholder into an edit field where it is not acceptable you might be informed
207. ecting this box steps the program at the source level Clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key starts step execution 4 8 10 Executing Multiple Targets Multiple targets can be debugged in synchronous execution For details refer to section 4 23 Synchronizing Multiple Debugging Platforms 4 9 Stopping Your Program This section describes how you can halt execution of your application s code This section describes how to do this directly by using the Halt button and by setting breakpoints at specific locations in your code 4 9 1 Halting Execution When your program is running the Halt toolbar button is enabled sh ared STOP sign and when the program has stopped it is disabled ah the STOP sign is grayed out Click on the Halt toolbar button or choose Debug gt Halt Program When the program has been stopped by Halt Stop is displayed in the Debug sheet of the Output window 4 9 2 Standard Breakpoints PC Breakpoints When you are trying to debug your program you will want to be able to stop the program running when it reaches a specific point or points in your code You can do this by setting a PC breakpoint on the line or instruction at which to want the execution to stop The following instructions will show you how to quickly set and clear simple PC breakpoints If more complex breakpoint operation is required use the Event window 242 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual which c
208. ectory Directory of file involved in operation Configuration directory Current configuration directory Project directory Current project directory Workspace directory Current workspace directory Temp directory Temporary directory Command directory Version control executable directory Windows directory Directory where Windows is installed Windows system directory Directory where Windows system files exist Workspace name Current workspace name Project name Current project name Configuration name Current configuration name 8 3 1 Specifying File Locations When referring to a file s location be sure to use a placeholder otherwise the command will only relate to a hardwired file For example let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file The Arguments field could be specified as GET c vc files project main c However when executed this command can only ever get the file MAIN C To resolve this problem HEW uses a system of placeholders and directory mappings The latter tell the HEW which working directories i e where source files are being worked on map to which controlled directories i e where the source files are stored in the version control system Mappings between these two directory systems can be specified via the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 7 129 High perform
209. eeaeeaeeneees 231 4 5 4 Modifying the I O Register Contents ccceceeceesceseeseceeeeeceeeeseeseeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeas 231 Lookin at Labels x2 en i parii TA er ATEREA VEKA EREVENT 231 6 1 Listing Labels aru a EEEE EN 232 4 6 2 Adding a Labelssnneren osioissa r R E E 233 4 6 3 Editing a Labe bierrien aE NA EOAR ER 233 46 4 Deleting Label iii icsecssescssssssisszasescsecevesaseeavcacsncassvesvazesnssveeiadersazesnsenenasdanssscaraoss 234 4 65 Deleting All Label ssisecs sci cacccasscstesssascassasvnaacnavsacsstsesazeonesnacsseaneiacenbasavesavieiaceeaiae 234 4 6 6 Loading Labels from a File ee eeescesseseeseceeceseeseeseeseceeeecceaeeaeeaeeseeeeeeaeeaeeaeens 234 46 7 Saving Labels intoa File eiecise ceecccaavetecccaestdestenteiecateascaeecsteaveredsdetatiadiencaaes 235 46 8 Searching for a Tables veces tacdsssseeccsdiventecaireendegs voeecsseaeescab ees cab iasedeouaseen aves 235 4 6 9 Searching for the Next Label s ssssessssssssssssssrserssesisesesesisinisrnrrsrersrsseseresesese 236 4 6 10 Viewing the Source Corresponding to a Label ceeeeeeeseeceeteeseeteeeeceeeeeeaeens 236 LOOKING at Registers sc sevisesesecevcssievisenssaaacesasscvescedcascscavesateveccatescdanaztatsies secedavavasnarsnscvaste 237 4 7 1 Opening the Register WindOW cseseseeseeeeeeseeseeseesecseeeeeeeeaeeaeeneeeeeeseaeeneens 237 4 7 2 Expanding a Bit REGiSt f viscccccsseccccaisncceceascarcsasbanesaeunestcanseseesavevevecdaseuscsta
210. elds provided choose a suitable name for the placeholder and a description of what the placeholder means 5 Then choose a directory which relates to this placeholder It is possible to use placeholders that are already defined in this field such as PROJDIR 115 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual New Custom Placeholder Figure 6 15 New Custom Placeholder Dialog 6 9 Using the workspace and project log facilities The HEW 3 0 has workspace and project logging facilities integrated into the application These facilities can be switched on via the log tab on the Tools customize dialog This option is especially useful when the network database is in operation This is because user names and changes are logged to this file This dialog is shown in figure 6 16 When the workspace log is clicked any workspace changes will be logged to a file with the same name as the workspace with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the workspace file When the generate log for projects log is clicked any projects in the current workspace that have changes made to them will be logged to a file with the same name as the project with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the project file The log file is updated when the workspace is saved Customize Browser Figure 6 16 Tools customize log tab 116 High performance E
211. emory map and memory resource 287 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Simulator System 2 xi System Memory 00000000 0001FFFF 00007FFF_ Read wr OOFFEOOO OOFFEFBF OOFFEFBF Read wr OOFFF800 OOFFFF3F ODOFFF800 OOFFFF3F Read wr OOFFFF6O OOFFFFBF OOFFFF60 OOFFFFFF_ Read wr OOFFFFCO OOFFFFFF Figure 4 87 Simulator System Dialog Box Memory Tab The following items can be specified in this dialog box Memory Map Displays the memory type start and end addresses data bus width and access cycles Memory Resource Displays the access type and start and end addresses of the current memory resource Memory Resource can be added modified or deleted using the following buttons a Adds Memory Resource items Clicking this button opens the Set Memory Resource dialog box and memory map items can be specified Modifies Memory Resource items Select an item to be modified in the list box and click this button The Set Memory Resource dialog box opens and memory map items can be modified x a Deletes Memory Resource items Select an item to be deleted in the list box and click this button Memory Resource is the same setting information as that of Memory Resource of the Simulator sheet in the H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain dialog box Modifications are reflected on both items For the H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain dialog box refer to section 3 3 1 Memory Map Memory
212. en click the required radio button Then click OK to save the access rights changes gt To remove an existing user to the system 148 Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 Click the access rights button The dialog displayed in Figure 10 4 is displayed Select the user you wish to remove in the users list Press the remove button Then click OK to save the access rights changes User access rights High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 21xI User access rights res test Admin Remove Access Administrator Full read write access Read write file access only Read only access 10 1 4 Figure 10 4 Access rights dialog Changing your password To change your password 1 10 1 5 ON EAN He BD Log into the HEW network database you are changing your password for Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 Click the password button Enter your new password and confirm it in the second edit box Click OK Then click OK to save the password change Using the network HEW service When you connect to a networked project for the first time the HEW automatically c
213. er s Manual 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands The following 8 operations are available e Add a file to version control e Remove a file from version control e Get a read only copy of a file or files e Check out a read write copy of a file or files i e for editing e Check in a previously checked out file or files i e update Visual SourceSafe with the edits made e Undo a previously check out operation on a file or files i e cancel any edits made e View the status of a file e View the history of a file These commands can only be accessed via the Tools gt Version Control sub menu whereas all of the other commands can be accessed from both the toolbar and menu 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them gt To remove a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to remove from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Remove Files toolbar button is or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Remove Files menu option 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time However it is possible fo
214. es not exist then the HEW will use the configuration that was last used in the dependent project gt To make projects depend upon another 1 Select Project gt Dependent Projects The Dependent Projects dialog will be displayed figure 2 24 2 Select the project to which you would like to add dependents to When you do this the Dependent projects list will display all of the projects in the workspace excluding the selected project 3 The Dependent projects list has a check box for each project listed Set the associated check boxes to make those projects depend upon the selected project 4 Click OK to confirm the new project dependencies Dependent Projects 2 LX main_project het Cancel Dependent projects depend01 Figure 2 24 Dependent Projects dialog 36 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 12 Removing a Project from a Workspace gt To remove a project from a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Remove Project option or 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Press the DEL key 3 Dialog box is displayed You confirm to remove the project In the Options dialog box of the Tools menu you can select this confirmation is performed or not Note You cannot remove the current pr
215. escription Initializes all breakpoints and memory mapping It also initializes debugging platform as if you had reselected the target DLL Syntax in Parameter Type Description none Initializes debugging platform Example IN Initializes debugging platform 5 42 LOG Abbreviation LO Description Controls logging of command output to file If no parameters are specified logging status is displayed If an existing file is specified you will be warned if you answer No data will be overwritten to the existing file otherwise the file will be added Logging is only supported for the command line interface Syntax lo lt state gt I lt filename gt Parameter Type Description none Displays logging status lt state gt Keyword Starts or suspends logging Starts logging E Suspends logging lt filename gt Numeric Specifies the logging output file Examples LOG TEST Stores the logging in file TEST LO Suspends logging LOG Resumes logging LOG Displays logging status 342 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 43 MAP DISPLAY Abbreviation MA Description Displays memory resource settings Syntax ma Parameter Type Description none Displays the current memory resource settings Example MA Displays the current memory resoruce settings 5 44 MAP SET Abbreviation MS Description Allocates a memory area Syntax ms lt start address gt lt end a
216. esesseseeeeceeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeneees 279 4 17 9 Updating the Information eeeceseeseeseesecseeeseeseeseeseceeeeceeeeaeeseeaeeeeseeeeaseaeens 279 4 17 10 Stopping Update visni onii NEETER E ESSE EEEO SE 279 4 17 11 Confirmation Request Dialog BOX ssesesessesssesrsrrsrsrsrsrsreersestrsesresrsrsresesrssesreet 279 4 17 12 Save Coverage Data Dialog BOX eeseeesesessessstsrsresesssrsststerrsesersesrsrsrsresesessesrset 280 4 17 13 Displaying the Coverage Information in the Editor Window ceeeeee 280 4 18 Viewing the Current Status cc ceeeceeseeseeseceecesceseeseesecseeseeeeeeseesecaeceeeeeeeaeeaesaeeeeseeseaeeaee 281 4 19 Debugging with the Command Line Interface ec eeeeeecceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeseeseeseeeeeeaeeaeeaee 281 4 19 1 Opening the Command Line Window cccecceseeseeseesecseeeeceseeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeees 281 4 19 2 Specifying a Command File cee eseseeseeeeeeceeseeseeseeeceeceeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 282 4 19 3 Executing a Command File ce eceseeseeseesececceseeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeeeaeeaeeneens 282 4 19 4 Stopping Command Execution ccesesceeeceeceseesceseeeceeceeeeseeaeeseeseeeeceeeeeeeaeeas 283 4 19 5 Specifying a Log File erronee ia cous EER EEE OA ENEE 283 4 19 6 Starting or Stopping Logging eeeeeesseeeesssssesesersrsesestsrsersentrsessssrsrsresessssesrees 283 4 19 7 Entering a Full Path to the File cc eceeceecssceeeeseeseeeeceeceeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeseaeeaeeaeees 283
217. ess 53 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual CONFIGDIF Mutilities lib Figure 3 12 Custom Options Output Files Tab gt To add an output file 1 Click Add The Add Output File dialog will be invoked figure 3 13 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click OK to add this output file to the list Placeholder popup menu Add Output File E E Figure 3 13 Add Output File Dialog gt To modify an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to modify 2 Click Modify The Modify Output File dialog which is the same as figure 3 13 except the title will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required and then click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list gt To remove an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button 54 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 4 3 Dependent Files Tab The Dependent Files tab figure 3 14 is where you can specify the dependent files that are needed by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the dependent files are of a more recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e dependent files have been modified since the input file or files were last modified If not the phase is not executed f
218. ess First address of the memory data displayed on this row n Memory data read from Address and n means the offset value from the first address of the row Data is read from the debugging platform s physical memory in the access width and then converted to the display width Value Data displayed in an alternative format 4 2 2 Displaying Data in Different Formats If you want to change the display format of the Memory window select Format from the pop up menu The dialog box shown in figure 4 9 is displayed Format Begin Ho0000000 End H o00000FF Format Byte x1 ba Display Value As ANSI character 7 Cancel io x Bytes Count For One Line 16 Byte 7 Figure 4 9 Format Memory Display Dialog Box To display and edit memory in different widths use the Format drop down list For example choose the Byte option and the display will be updated to show the memory area as individual bytes The data can be converted into different formats as shown in the third column Value The list of formats depends on the data selection To change the number of bytes displayed on one line use the Bytes Count For One Line drop down list For example choose the 8 Byte option and the display will be updated to show the 8 byte data on one line 4 2 3 Splitting Up the Window Display To vertically divide the Memory window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move th
219. essssasseveavexsapaattsvavediarssaheieesssharaaessbaseene E seats 256 412 9 ProfilesChatt Windows sisvsssoceceszes sav aeaaaee rE ENAERE AR 257 4 12 10 Types and Purposes of Displayed Data ceceeceseeseeseeeeeeceeseeseeeeeeceeeeseeneeaees 258 4 12 11 Creating Profile Information Files ccccecceceeseeseeseeneeeeceeeeseeseeseeeeneeeeeeeeaees 258 412 12 Notes ieee eioi i nie apentioietits secs costeieevsieasinti dense seniaiiatibeen ane 259 Viewing the Function Call History cc cececceseeseeseeeseeeeeseeseesecseceeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 260 4 13 1 Opening the Stack Trace WindOW ccscsssseesceseeseeseceeeeeceeeeseeseeaeesecneeereeneeaees 260 4 13 2 Viewing the Source Program cceceesesseeseceeceseeseeseesecaeeeeceeeeaeeaeeaeeecneeeeeeaeeaees 260 413 3 Specifying the Viewin aoisi nsa EE RE TEE 260 Viewing the Trac Information isosisiie critieria oo NEE E 262 4 14 1 Opening the Trace Window cceccesessseseeseeeeceseeseeseesecsecseceeeeseeseeaeeaecaeeseeereeees 262 4 14 2 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions cecceseeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenees 262 4 14 3 Acquiring Trace Information eceeeseesceceeseeseeseesecseceeceeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeaeeneeaeeaees 263 4 14 4 Searching for a Trace Record cecessscsceeeceeeeseeseeseesecsececeeeeseeseeaeesecaeeeceeeeeees 263 4 14 5 Clearing the Trace Information cceseseseseeeseeteeecseeeeceeeeseeaeeaeeeeneeeeseneeaees 264
220. etcssscesseapessazczatensseazecesesazseve ES ENE ENGT EEES 187 2 16 Pseudo TterrUPtS iscascscseveenccasesscsssavevsscecesacscaassvnsceacsscavavesvesceaeascsvavssateveavasesavavevdsasearessvaiis 187 DAT COVETA DE oa oi iosi Eni ENEAS RERE AAKE TRECERE EE EREE EE EEEE 187 Section 3 Preparations for Debugging ssessesessssssessrsiessresrsesrrresiseseseesesenes 189 3 Building before Debussyn ie a a R EE E TEE RR 189 3 2 Selecting a Debugging Platform s vcisscsccsscscsssessssvevsvevssassscsesacscscsavasssssscazssveczaness vatevsosseeess 189 3 3 Configuring the Debugging Platform ee eecceceesessecseeeeeeeeesecsecseceeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeenee 200 SSL Memory Map resvi a oinean REEE Aa EPEE E KANEC KENE ANEK Ea 200 33 2 M moty RESOU CE seseto s tooit estis to seitei rata EVE EER R ia 202 3 33 Downhloading a Prostatic i E E E ita 203 3 3 4 Manual Download of Modules cece cseeeeseeeescsecseeecseeeeessesesseeeseesaeees 207 3 3 5 Automatic Download of Modules 0 0 ese eeseescesceeceeeecseeeeetseeesseeeeseeeeees 207 333 6 Unloading of Modules scsccsccsccsccscccsevasevssassvessacvasevasascescdassseevaiensccedavanesnesvaveossacaae 207 BA DEDUSEr SESSIONS 8 55 unciis taiii ts teaei e EA sacs A EEIE REE AASER ess 207 3AL Selecting a Sessies srn E A 207 3 4 2 Adding and Deleting Sessions seeeeeseeeeeeesesesetersertstserersestrstsrsrsisrsresrseseses 209 3 4 3 Saving Session Information s sssssesssssssssesssrssstssstst
221. f CCR and the value before compensation was illegal in the DAA or DAS instruction e A division by zero or an overflow occurred during DIVXU or DIVXS instruction execution Correct the user program to prevent the error from occurring Memory Access Error System Call Error One of the following states occurred e A memory area that had not been allocated was accessed e Data was written to a memory area having the write protect attribute e Data was read from a memory area having the read disable attribute e A memory area in which memory does not exist was accessed Allocate memory change the memory attribute or correct the user program to prevent the memory from being accessed System call error occurred Modify the incorrect contents of registers RO R1 and parameter block I O area not exist The I O area was deleted Be sure to set the I O area The memory resource has not been set up 368 The memory resource was set outside the range of memory mapping Modify the memory resource settings so that no error will occur High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix A Trouble Shooting I have clicked the Stop Build button or selected Build gt Stop Build to abort a build but the build process has not stopped The HEW will stop the build after it has built the current file or executed the current single phase If the builder does not respond after a longer period of time you can
222. f the editor will be launched e You must save your own files before you perform a build file build or build all operation 6 6 Customizing File Save The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to customize file save on the Editor tab of the Options dialog figure 6 11 To open the tab select Tools gt Options and click the Editor tab The following sections explain the options related to file save 6 6 1 Save files before executing any tools To force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving edited files before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands set the Save files before executing any tools check box 6 6 2 Prompt before saving files In addition to the above check box set this to prompt before saving 113 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 7 Using an External Debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu The Debugger tab of the Customize dialog figure 6 13 is where the Hitachi Debugging Interface related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting Tools gt Customize and then selecting the Debugger tab C Hew HDIS SIMSSH
223. f you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box 7 Tf your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions check box Refer to Appendix B Regular Expressions for further information 8 The Direction radio buttons allow you to select the direction of the search Selecting Down means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the bottom of the file Selecting Up means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the top of the file 9 Click the Find Next button to begin the search Click Cancel to stop the find action The High performance Embedded Workshop editor also allows you to search for a string across many files 73 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 5 2 Finding Text in Multiple Files gt To search for text in many files 1 Select Edit gt Find in Files select Find in Files from the editor window s local menu or click the find in files toolbar button i The Find in Files dialog box will be displayed figure 4 3 Find In Files 27 xi Find M yStruct X Cancel In files types 1 c cpp exp fsy h hpp inc lis p ema Directory fe hew demo demo X Browse I Match case IV Search sub directories I Regular expressions Figure 4 3 Fi
224. fault options field If you have a preferred directory in which you would like this program to run from i e where you want the current working directory to be set to before the tool is executed then enter it into the Initial directory field New Build Phase Step 3 of 4 D c toals mytool exel AA e Ocas men coe Figure 3 3d New Build Phase Dialog Step 3 45 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The fourth and final step figure 3 3e allows you to specify any environment variables which the phase requires New Build Phase Step 4 of 4 21x NJ Does the command require any environment variables to be set If so enter them into the list below Madi Renove T Read Output On Fly lt Back Finish Cancel Figure 3 3e New Build Phase Dialog Step 4 To add a new environment variable click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 3 4 will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field and the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the list of the fourth step To modify an environment variables select the variable in the list and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable to the list To remove environment variab
225. file Information files Close Profile Information files Sample C Hew Sample Sample pro Browse i gt Figure 4 57 Save Profile Information Files Dialog Box 4 12 12 Notes 1 The number of executed cycles for an application program as measured by the profile function includes a margin of error The profile function only allows the measurement of the proportions of execution time that the functions occupy in the overall execution of the application program Use the Performance Analysis function to precisely measure the numbers of executed cycles 2 The names of the corresponding functions may not be displayed when the profile information on a load module with no debug information is measured 3 The stack information file extension SNI must be in the same directory as the load module file extension ABS 4 It is not possible to store the results of measurement 5 It is not possible to store the results of measurement 259 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 13 Viewing the Function Call History The Stack Trace window shows the function call history 4 13 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window To open the Stack Trace window choose View gt Code gt Stack Trace or click the Stack Trace toolbar button Bl Value F func3 short Ox00000094 P param 3 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fd8 short L local 3 D 3 Ox00003fd4 unsigned long F fune2 s
226. ge from address H O to address H 1000 is written to BA FFFF A break occurs when address H FFFF is accessed 317 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 10 BREAK CLEAR Abbreviation BC Description Deletes breakpoints Syntax be lt index gt Parameter Type Description lt index gt Numeric Index of the breakpoint to be canceled If the index is omitted all breakpoints are deleted Examples BREAK_CLEAR 0 BC 5 11 BREAK CYCLE Abbreviation BCY Description The first breakpoint is deleted All breakpoints are deleted Specifies the number of cycles as a break condition Syntax by lt cycle gt lt count gt lt Action gt Parameter Type Description lt cycle gt Numeric The condition matching the number of cycles lt cycle gt xn lt count gt Keyword The condition satisfying the number of times optional default ALL All Break condition is satisfied every time the condition is matched Numeric 1 to HFFFF Break condition is satisfied only when it matches the specified number of times lt Action gt Keyword Action taken when the conditions are satisfied optional default Stop Stop P Halts the execution of the user program Input I Inputs saves data to a file Output O Outputs reads data from a file Interrupt T Initiates a pseudo interrupt 318 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Format The method of def
227. h gt include lt stdio h gt include lt math h gt include lt stdlib h gt void main void void sort long a void change long a extern void srand unsigned int void main void long a 16 min max long j int i srand 1 gt I printf t Data Input n for i 0 i lt 10 i j rand if j lt 8 gt s afi j printf a d ld n i a i sort a printf Sorting results n for i O i lt 10 i printf a d 1d n i a i ES T e Figure 4 16 Editor columns gt To switch off a column in all source files 1 2 3 4 Right click on the editor window Click the Define Column Format menu item The Global Editor Column States dialog is displayed The Check status shows whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked it is enabled if the check box is gray this means that in some files the column is enabled and in other files it is not Click OK for the new column settings to take effect gt To switch off a column in one source files 88 1 Right click on the editor window which you wish to remove a column from and the editor pop up is displayed Click the Columns menu item and a cascaded menu item appears Each column is displayed in this pop up menu If the column is enabled it has a tick next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or n
228. hain Dialog Box 201 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual CPU hardware map PEI Operation Memory view a 00000000 0001F FFF On Chip Physical Memory Section 00000400 PResetPRG Pin 00000000 ae resource p 00000800 P C C DSEC C oo E 00FFE000 OOFFEFBF On Chip R 00000400 f OOFFEOOO B A OOFFEDCO S aman 00000800 4 00FFF800 OOFFFF3F 1 0 4 00FFFF60 OOFFFFBF 1 0 00600000 oof OOFFFFCO OOFFFFFF On Chip ECT24 00000060 VECT25 00000064 D E Map file VECTO 00000000 00000003 00800000 VECTS5 00000014 00000017 00400000 Ge VECT 0000001 c 00000014 Ga VECTS 00000020 00000023 oocoooo0 Ga VECTS 00000024 00000027 Ga VECT10 00000028 0000002t 00E00000 Ga VECT11 0000002 0000002f Ge VECT16 00000040 0000004 OOFFFFFF Ge VECT17 00000044 0000004 VECT18 00000048 0000004 E On Chip ROM Dr VECT19 0000004c a onena RaM RW ECT20 00000050 lo Nonuse SVECT21 00000054 E Reserve Di Allocated Area Figure 3 13 CPU hardware map Dialog Box The following information is displayed Operation Displays the address range in the upper step Displays the linkage map in the lower step Memory View Displays memory map and memory resource information A memory resource already allocated Allocated Area is displayed in yellow 3 3 2 Memory Resource To use the simulator the memory resource of the address range being
229. haracter except a digit t n Matches a space a tab or newline AN Matches a literal if is placed after This is the regular expression override character If the character following the backslash is a regular expression character it is treated as a normal character The backslash is ignored if it is followed by a normal non regular expression character Searches for every occurrence of an asterisk Searches for every occurrence of a backslash High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix C Placeholders This appendix describes how to use the placeholders a feature provided by several of the High performance Embedded Workshop components C 1 What is a Placeholder A placeholder is a special string inserted into text which is replaced at some subsequent time for the actual value For example one of the HEW placeholders is 7FULLFILE which represents a file with a full path Suppose that you have an editor in c myedit myeditor exe which can take the file to edit as a parameter When invoking the editor the following shortcut could be made e g c myedit myeditor exe c files file1 c if you wanted to open FILE1 C from the directory c files However what happens if you want the HEW to open any file through this editor The problem is that the command above is specific to c files filel c What we want to be able to do is to tell the HEW to use the editor specified but to open
230. hase A system phase is a ready made phase which is already defined within the toolchain you are using e g compiler assembler linker librarian etc or a utility phase e g file copy complexity analyzer etc The Add an existing system phase button is inactive if no more system phases are available Select the Create a new custom phase button to create your own build phase New Build Phase Step 1 of 4 fe Ada erecta Sosten phase Figure 3 3a New Build Phase Dialog Step 1 43 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The second step figure 3 3b asks what type of phase you would like to create There are two choices multiple or single When a multiple phase is executed the command is applied to each file in the project of a certain file group For example if you set the input file group to be C source files then the command will be executed once for each C source file in the project A single phase is executed once at most during a build New Build Phase Step 2 of 4 Y What type of phase would you like to create Multiple phase The command is applied to each file in a file group An example of this type of tool is a compiler or assembler Select input file group C source file C Single phase The command is only ever executed once per build An example of this type of tool is a linker lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 3 3b
231. he conditions are satisfied optional default Stop Stop P Halts the execution of the user program Input I Inputs saves data to a file Output O Outputs reads data from a file Interrupt T Initiates a pseudo interrupt Format The method of defining each Action are as follows Stop Input lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file from which data is input string lt addr gt Numeric Address to which the data is read lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF 323 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Output lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt lt option gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file to which data is saved string lt addr gt Numeric Address from which data is output lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF lt option gt Keyword Specifies a new file or appends to an existing file optional makes a new file when abbreviated A Adds the data to the existing file Interrupt lt interrupt typel gt lt priority gt Parameter Type Description lt interrupt type1 gt Numeric Type of interrupt Interrupt vector number 0 to H FF lt
232. hort Ox00000072 P param 2 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fe4 short L local 2 D Z Ox00003fe0 unsigned long F funcl short Ox0000003e P param 1 Ox00003ffa Ox00003ff0 short L local 1 D i Ox00003fec unsigned long F main Ox00000012 L start D 103 Ox00003ffa short Figure 4 58 Stack Trace Window The following items are displayed Kind Indicates the type of the symbol F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Indicates the symbol name Value Indicates the value address and type of the symbol 4 13 2 Viewing the Source Program Select a function and choose Go to Source from the pop up menu to display then the source program corresponding to the function which has been selected by opening the Editor window is displayed 4 13 3 Specifying the View Choose View Setting from the pop up menu to open the Stack Trace Setting dialog box which allows the user to specify the Stack Trace window settings 260 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Figure 4 59 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Nest level Specifies the level of function call nesting to be displayed in the Stack Trace window Display symbol Specifies the symbol types to be displayed in addition to functions Display Radix Specifies the radix for displays in the Stack Trace window 261 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 14 Viewing
233. ialog box specifies the location and name of a coverage information file to be loaded The placeholder or the Browse button can be used Only COV files can be loaded If a file name extension other than COV is specified an error message will be displayed Note If the coverage range is specified by a source file the saved COV file cannot be loaded 4 17 9 Updating the Information Choose Refresh from the pop up menu to update the Coverage window to the latest information 4 17 10 Stopping Update Choose Lock Refresh from the pop up menu to only update Times and Pass when program execution stops Memory accesses to update instruction codes in the Coverage window are stopped 4 17 11 Confirmation Request Dialog Box A confirmation request dialog box will appear when Clear Data or Set Range is clicked or an attempt is made to close the Coverage window Confirmation Request Figure 4 77 Confirmation Request Dialog Box Clicking OK clears the coverage data Choosing Save Coverage data opens the Save Coverage Data dialog box figure 4 78 to save the coverage data in a file before it is cleared 279 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 17 12 Save Coverage Data Dialog Box When File gt Save Session menu option is clicked the Save Coverage Data dialog box will appear which allows the user to save the Coverage window data in separate files or a single file Addre
234. iew ECX 1 0 C Hew Too Register All Binary File Object Reader 1 0 C Hew Too ElfOwarf2 object reader 2 0 C Hew Too Intel Hex Record Object Reader 1 0 C Hew Too SRecord object reader 1 0 C Hew Too H8S H8 300 Series Simulator Target Platform 3 0 C Hew Too gt Search Status 50 file s found Figure 5 3 Search Disk for Components Dialog 2 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 3 Check the Include subfolders check box if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 4 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 5 The results of the search are shown in the Located components list Select a component and click Register to register an individual component or click Register All to register all located components 6 Click Close to exit the dialog 93 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 3 2 Registering a Single Component The HEW allows you to navigate directly to a single component in order to register it The HEW Registration File HRF is located in the root directory of a component s installation gt To register a component 1 Click the Register button on the Tools Ad
235. ified in the Select input file group drop down list on the New Build Phase dialog figure 3 3b If you would like a phase to take files output from a previous phase i e intermediate files then you must define this in the File Mappings tab of the Build Phases dialog figure 3 16 Build Phases Assembler i Object file Compiler Linker Object file HEMGYE Figure 3 16 Build Phases Dialog File Mappings Tab 57 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual A file mapping states that you would like the HEW to pass output files of a certain type produced by one phase referred to as the source phase to another phase referred to as the destination phase Such intermediate files are passed in addition to the project files gt To add a file mapping 1 2 Click Add The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked figure 3 17 Select the file group which you want to pass between the phases from the File group drop down list box Select the source phase i e which phase generates the files from the Source phase drop down list box Select the destination phase i e which phase takes these files from the Destination phase drop down list box Click OK to create the new mapping Define File Mapping dil File group Object file E Cancel Source phase Destination phase e Figure 3 17 Define File Mapping Dialog
236. ify check box and comparing the data value to be filled and the filled memory data On clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the memory range 4 2 9 Copying a Memory Area You can copy a memory area using the memory copy function Select a memory range and then choose Copy from the pop up menu The Copy Memory dialog box opens figure 4 13 Destination Format Byte amp 1 z T Verify Figure 4 13 Copy Memory Dialog Box The source start address and end address selected in the Memory window will be displayed in the Begin and End fields Checking the Verify check box enables copying while comparing the copy source and copy destination The copy unit can be selected in the Format list box Enter the destination start address in the Destination field and click the OK button or press the Enter key This will close the dialog box and copy the memory block to the new address 221 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 10 Saving and Verifying a Memory Area A memory area in the address space can be saved into a disk file using the memory save function Open the Save Memory As dialog box by choosing File gt Save memory Binary ol Cancel File name manualbin 7 E Start address p End Address HFFFF Figure 4 14 Save Memory As Dialog Box Enter the start and end addresses of
237. ike name them how you want and define their order in the menu User defined menu options do not appear on the version control toolbar gt To create a new version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The dialog shown in figure 8 4 will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the menu option into the Option field 4 Commands are added to the menu option via the Add button See the section Defining Version Control Commands later in this chapter for further information Close the Add Menu Option dialog by clicking OK 6 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK m Add Menu Option Maatpa ep5 WP EMGYE MOJEN Move GGoWh Figure 8 4 Add Menu Option Dialog 125 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To remove an existing version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be removed from the User menu options list and then click the Remove button 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK gt To modify an existing version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be modified from the
238. ing Linker ver 7 0 or later Each of these files contains information related to the calling of static functions in the corresponding source file Reading the stack information file makes it possible for the HEW to display this information to do with the calling of functions without executing the user application i e before measuring the profile data However this feature is not available when Setting gt Only Executed Functions is checked in the pop up menu of the Profile window When the HEW does not read any stack information files the data about the functions executed during measurement will be displayed by the profile function To make the linker create a stack information file choose Options gt H8 H8 300 siries Standard Toolchain and select Other from the Category list box and check the Stack information output box in the Link Library sheet of the Standard Toolchain dialog box H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain 27 x C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU 4 gt Category Other he Miscellaneous options Configuration SimDebua H85 26004 z Demo_H Always output 9 record at the end ack information output Compress debug information Low memory use during linkage User defined options JAbsolute Relocatable Library 7 Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list CONFIGDIR PROJECTNAME map nooptimiz
239. ing a Function Click the OK button to set the functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box The functions are set and the Select Function dialog box closes 245 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without setting the functions 4 10 4 Debugging an Overlay Program This section explains the settings for using the overlay functions Displaying Section Group When the overlay mode is used that is when several section groups are assigned to the same address range the address ranges and section groups are displayed in the Overlay dialog box Open the Overlay dialog box by choosing Memory gt Configure Overlay Address Section Name GK Cancel 002000 002005 Figure 4 40 Overlay Dialog Box at Opening This dialog box has two areas the Address list box and the Section Name list box The Address list box displays the address ranges used in the overlay mode Click to select one of the address ranges in the Address list box Overlay x Address Section Name 001000 001023 PsectO1 Psectil 002000 00200B PsectO2 Psecti2z PsectO3 Psecti3 Cancel Figure 4 41 Overlay Dialog Box Address Range Selected The Section Name list box displays the section groups assigned to the selected address range gt Setting Section Group When using the overlay function the highest priority section group must be selected
240. ining each Action are as follows Stop Input lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file from which data is input string lt addr gt Numeric Address to which the data is read lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF Output lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt lt option gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file to which data is saved string lt addr gt Numeric Address from which data is output lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF lt option gt Keyword Specifies a new file or appends to an existing file optional makes a new file when abbreviated A Adds the data to the existing file Interrupt lt interrupt typel gt lt priority gt Parameter Type Description lt interrupt type1 gt Numeric Type of interrupt Interrupt vector number 0 to H FF lt priority gt Numeric Interrupt priority optional default 0 0to 17 Examples BREAK CYCLE 1000 20 BCY 5000 Specifies breaks to occur H 20 times in every H 1000 cycles Specifies a break to occur in every H 5000 cycles 319 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 12 BREAK_
241. ion Updates the dependencies for the current project Syntax ud Parameter Type Description None Updates the dependencies for the current project Example update_all_dependencies Starts an update all dependencies operation on the current project 366 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 6 Messages 6 1 Information Messages The simulator debugger outputs information messages as listed in table 6 1 to notify users of execution status Table 6 1 Message Information Messages Contents Break Access The break access condition was satisfied and execution has stopped Break Cycle The break cycle condition was satisfied and execution has stopped Break Data The break data condition was satisfied and execution has stopped Break Register The break register condition was satisfied and execution has stopped Break Sequence The break sequence condition was satisfied and execution has stopped PC Breakpoint The breakpoint condition was satisfied and execution has stopped Sleep Execution has been stopped by the SLEEP instruction Step Normal End The step execution succeeded Stop Execution has been stopped by the Stop button Trace Buffer Full Since the Break mode was selected by Trace buffer full handling in the Trace Acquisition dialog box and the trace buffer became full execution was terminated 367 6 2 High pe
242. ion file radio button 4 Enter a name for the session 5 Browse to the existing session file location that you would like to import into the current project If the Open and maintain link to session file check box is not checked the imported new session file is generated in the project directory If the Open and maintain link to session file check box is checked a new session file is not generated in the project directory but is linked to the current session file If the Make session file link read only check box is checked the linked session file is used as read only 6 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box e To remove a session 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 3 19 2 Select the session you would like to remove 3 Click the Remove button Note that the current session cannot be removed 4 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box e To view the session properties 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 3 19 2 Select the session you would like to view the properties for 3 Click the Properties button to display the Session Properties dialog box figure 3 21 Session Properties Name SimSessionH8S 2600N Location C user Releasetutorial tutorial simsessionh8s 2600n Last modified 15 49 04 Wednesday March 13 2002 Canca I Read only
243. ions performed on it from the Tools menu If the project is unloaded its icon appears grayed in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and no actions can be performed upon it You can set which project is active in a workspace gt To set a project as the current project 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select the Set as Current Project option or 1 Select the project which you want to make active from the Project gt Set Current Project sub menu gt To load a project in the workspace 1 Select the unloaded project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select the Load Project option 3 This will also set the project that was just loaded as the current project gt To unload a project in the workspace 1 Select the active project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select the Unload Project option 34 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 10 Inserting a Project into a Workspace When a workspace is created it contains only one project but after it is created you can insert new or existing projects into a workspace gt To insert a new project into a workspace 1 Select Project gt Insert Project
244. iple or single phase according to the selection of phase type in figure 3 3b 51 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Debug Options Output Files Dependent Files l hewtest Command E C source file p _hew files Dos amp windows executables CMDLINE EXE E hewtest c initsct c Options intpra c C FULLFI E sbikc FULLFILE vecttbl c _ Default Options H hewtest1 m hewtest2 hewtest3 ad eb ee Placeholder hewtest3 c initsct c D Fie path name 7 Insert intprg c sbrk c of Figure 3 10 Custom Options Dialog The dialog in figure 3 10 is a custom phase options dialog The implementation of which is slightly different depending on whether you are using a multiple or single shot phase On the left hand side is the project and file list It is possible to select multiple projects and files in the same way as Windows explorer to modify the options for more than one selection On the right hand side are the 3 options tabs This is where you set the options that you want to apply to the selected file s You can also choose which configuration information is being viewed from the configuration list on the upper left of the dialog box Each configuration is listed along with a special entry named Multiple configurations If you select multiple configurations then a dialog is displayed
245. irst eight characters of each label instead of the corresponding address or as a part of an instruction operand Note When a label value matches an operand the corresponding instruction operand is replaced by the label If two or more labels have the same value the one that comes first in alphabetical order is displayed Hint When edit control accepts an address or a value a label can be input instead 231 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 6 1 Listing Labels Choose View gt Symbol gt Labels or click the View Labels toolbar button J to list all labels defined in the current debugger session Labet amp x BP Address Nane a H 00401214 D ROM H 00401220 _ B BGN H 00401224 B END H 00401218 D BGN H 0040121C __D END H 00400400 _INT_Reserved106 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved142 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved151 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved160 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved205 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved214 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved223 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved232 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved241 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved250 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved107 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved125 H 00400400 _INT_Reserved143 H 00400400 _INT_Reservedi61 H 00400400 _INT_Reservedi70 u nananngnan TMT Damewrre anng 4 Ly Figure 4 25 Label Window You can view symbols sorted either alphabetically by ASCII code or by address value by clicking on the respective column heading Double clicking in the BP column can
246. jects together For example you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is built all of its child projects are built first However workspaces on their own are not very useful we need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before we can actually do anything High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 1 2 The Main Window The HEW main window appears as shown in figure 1 2 3 Demo_H8S2600A High Performance Embedded Workshop Demo_H8S2600A c File Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help laj x Deuas merema eea a 2 sa cimaiz ila oaae AS sind enun Hes 2c004 E simsessiontes 25008 E A e al a SS E ji aorto lm agats mEn elias lala lalala E xl B m Demo_H8526004 Demo_H8S26004 B E Assembly source B lowlvi sre C source file 2 dbsct c ES Demo_H8S 2 lowsre c resetpra c 4 sbtk c Download modu E Demo_H8sz Dependencies B void main void void sort long a void change long a extern void srand unsigned int Ox00000800 long a 10 void main void long a 10 min max long j 0x0000080a int i 0x00000812 srand 1 0x00000822 printf Data Input
247. k must be accessed in the parameter size After the I O processing the simulator debugger resumes simulation from the instruction that follows the system call instruction Each I O function is described in the following format 1 S 4 Parameter Block 5 Parameters 6 1 Number corresponding to table 4 1 2 Function name 3 Function code 4 I O overview 5 I O parameter block 6 I O parameters 1 GETC Inputs one byte from the standard input device H 01 H11 H 21 Parameter Block One byte One byte 0 Input buffer start address e Function code H 11 24 bit address H 21 32 bit address One byte One byte 0 Beatles Input buffer start address Parameters e Input buffer start address input 292 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Start address of the buffer to which the input data is written to 2 PUTC Outputs one byte to the standard output device H 02 H 12 H 22 Parameter Block e Function code H 02 16 bit address One byte One byte 0 Output buffer start address e Function code H 12 24 bit address H 22 32 bit address One byte One byte 0 2 Parameters e Output buffer start address input Start address of the buffer in which the output data is stored 3 GETS Inputs one line from the standard input device H 03 H 13 H 2
248. kpoint by using the Breakpoints dialog box The Breakpoints dialog box is shown in figure 4 38 It allows the user to view the current breakpoints set Clicking the Edit Code button displays the source where each breakpoint is set The Remove or Remove All button deletes one or all breakpoints respectively The check box of each breakpoint enables or disables the breakpoint Breakpoints lowsre ckLine 12 Cancel Edit Code Remove Remove All Figure 4 38 Breakpoints Dialog Box e Toggling PC breakpoints It is possible to toggle the PC Breakpoints setting by either double clicking in the BP column of the line where the PC breakpoint is set or placing the cursor on the line and pressing the F9 key The setting to be toggled depends on the debugging platform 243 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 10 Elf Dwarf2 Support The HEW supports the Elf Dwarf2 object file format for debugging applications written in C C and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers It provides a powerful way of accessing observing and modifying the symbolic level debugging information about the user application that is running Key Features e Source level debugging e C C operators e C C expression casting pointers references etc e Ambiguous function names e Overlay memory loading e Watch locals and user defined e Stack Trace 4 10 1 C C Operators The C C language operators are a
249. kshop User s Manual 4 17 1 Opening the Coverage Window Choose View gt Code gt Coverage or click the Coverage toolbar button to open the Open Coverage dialog box Open Coverage a x m Options New Window OK C Start address End address E Cancel Fie fresetpra c p lerowse Configuration directory Open a recent coverage file Project directory Workspace directory HEW installation directory Workspace name Browse to another coverage file Project name Configuration name Figure 4 69 Open Coverage Dialog Box This dialog box specifies the coverage acquiring range To set coverage for a new range the following two ways are available e Specifying the start and end addresses on the new window Start Address Start address of coverage information display When a prefix is omitted the values is input in hexadecimal End Address End address of coverage information display When a prefix is omitted the value is input in hexadecimal e Specifying the file on the new window File Source file whose type number is C or CPP in the current project Functions in the specified file can be set as the coverage range If the type number of the file is omitted C is complemented The file that has other type numbers than C or CPP cannot be specified A placeholder or the Browse button is available To use the settings saved in a coverage information file ch
250. kshop User s Manual Build Build All Current Congifuration Current Session Launch Slave Hew View Workspace Build File Stop Launch Debugger View Output ae a slla me Figure 1 8 Standard Toolbar Template Selection Define Template Insert Template pr Templaten T Figure 1 9 Templates Toolbar Add File s Check Out File s Remove File s Check h File s Get File s Show Status Be amp FA Figure 1 10 Version Control Toolbar Ignore white space Compare files Find next Find previous Find previous difference Find next difference m se AT SL Figure 1 11 Difference Toolbar When the Standard toolbar or a toolbar is docked it has a control bar as shown in figure 1 11 i If you want to move the docked Standard toolbar click and drag its control bar to the new location Figure 1 11 i shows the Standard toolbar when it is docked and figure 1 11 ii shows the Standard toolbar when it is floating i ei j Debus Z Debug WAe OP Standard Ea i e Debug Debug 7 nEn GQ fl Figure 1 12 Standard Toolbar Docked and Floating gt To dock the menu bar or a toolbar 1 Double click on the title bar of a floating menu bar or toolbar or High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Drag the title bar of a floating menu bar or toolbar and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar toolbar or the HEW main f
251. kspace wide tool which is only valid for the current workspace Once you have made the choice choose the relevant section of the dialog Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Application wide tools Name Version Workspace wide tools Hitachi Mapview dd Hitachi Call Walker 11 Modify Hitachi H Series Librarian Interface 11 Remove Figure 6 4 Customize Dialog Menu Tab 2 Click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 6 5 will be invoked If you would like to add an existing system tool to the menu then select the Select from existing system tools radio button choose the tool from the drop down list and then click OK Alternatively if you would like to add a tool of your own then follow the remaining steps Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the command excluding arguments into the Command field Enter any arguments that you would like to pass to the command into the Arguments field Enter an initial directory in which you would like the tool to run into the Initial directory field Click OK to add the menu option to the Tools menu Shy Oe ee 106 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Add Tool 21 x Define new user tool 0K m Tool details Cancel Name cma E xplorer Command StWINDIF explorer exe gt Browse Argu
252. l AND Il logical OR lt lt left arithmetic gt gt right arithmetic shift shift addition 2 subtraction x multiplication division modulo bitwise OR amp bitwise AND od bitwise NOT A bitwise exclusive OR logical NOT equal to l unequal to gt greater than lt less than gt greater than or lt less than or equal to equal to Examples EV H 123 D 73 B 10 EV R1 R2 Result H 16E D 366 0 556 B 00000000000000000000000101 101110 Result H 121 D 289 0 441 B 00000000000000000000000100100001 333 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 31 EXEC_MODE Abbreviation EM Description Specifies the operation of the simulator debugger when a simulation error occurs Syntax em lt mode gt Parameter Type Description None Displays the current execution mode lt mode gt Keyword Execution mode operation of the simulator debugger when a simulation error occurs S Stops operation C Continues operation Examples EXEC_MODE Displays the current execution mode EM c Specifies to continue operation when a simulation error occurs 334 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 32 FILE_LOAD Abbreviation FL Description Loads an object code file to memory with the specified offset Existing symbols are cleared and the new ones are defined If an offset is specified this will be added to the symbols The file extension default is MOT
253. l be satisfied by a number of cycles of Cycle x n However the specified number of cycles and the number of cycles that satisfied the condition may be different Count Number of times breaks will occur ALL A break will occur whenever a condition is satisfied Times when the prefix is omitted values must be input and are displayed in hexadecimal 1 to 65535 A break will occur only when the number of times the conditions is satisfied is equal to or below the value specified for Times When PC Breakpoint and Break Sequence is selected if an overloaded function or class name including a member function is specified in address the Select Function dialog box opens In the dialog box select a function For details refer to section 4 10 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels Clicking the OK button sets the break conditions Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without setting the break conditions 268 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Specifying the Action at Break Specify the action when a break condition is satisfied in the Action page in the Set Break dialog box figure 4 66 Condition Action Action type z reen Figure 4 66 Set Break Dialog Box Action Page This dialog box specifies the action when a break condition is satisfied Set the action in Action type The following show the items that can be set in each action Stop Stops the operation of user p
254. le To facilitate this the Arguments field has a placeholder button refer to appendix C Placeholders for an in depth discussion of placeholders which when clicked on invokes a pop up menu of available placeholders figure 8 6 An explanation of each placeholder and how their values are derived can be found in table 8 2 Arguments Field Placeholders User login name User login password Version control directory Comment File path name Filename File leaf File extension File directory Configuration directory Project directory Workspace directory Temp directory Command directory Windows directory Windows system directory Workspace name Project name Configuration name Figure 8 6 Arguments Field Placeholder Pop up Menu 128 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table 8 2 Arguments Field Placeholders Placeholder Value and How its Determined User login name Current user login General tab User login password Current user password General tab Version control directory Virtual version control mapping Projects tab Comment Comment specified before command execution File path name Full path and name of file involved in operation Filename Filename including extension of file involved File leaf Filename excluding extension of file involved File extension Extension of file involved in operation File dir
255. le address optional default 0 Examples FILE_VERIFY A BINARY TEST A22 Verifies Motorola S Record file TEST A22 against memory FV ANOTHER 200 Verifies Motorola S Record file ANOTHER MOT against memory with an offset of H 200 bytes 5 36 GENERATE_MAKE FILE Abbreviation GM Description Generates a makefile for build usage outside of HEW Syntax gm lt mode gt lt scan gt Parameter Type Description lt mode gt String cccp Generate make file from the current configuration in the current project default accp Generate make file from all the configurations in the current project acap Generate make file from all the configurations all projects lt scan gt String Scan Scan dependencies default noscan noscan Don t scan dependencies 338 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Example GENERATE_MAKE FI Generates a makefile for the current configuration and current LE cccp scan project Before the makefile is generated the dependencies are scanned 5 37 GO Abbreviation GO Description Executes object code the user program While the user system is halted a PC value is displayed Syntax go lt state gt lt address gt Parameter Type Description lt state gt Keyword Specifies whether or not to continue command processing during user program execution optional default wait wait Causes command processing to wait until user program stops c
256. lect the label and choose Delete from the pop up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request Figure 4 28 Message Box for Confirming Label Deletion If you click OK the label is removed from the list and the window display is updated If the message box is not required then do not select the Delete Label option of the Confirmation sheet in the HEW Options dialog box 4 6 5 Deleting All Labels To delete all the labels from the list choose Delete All from the pop up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request Figure 4 29 Message Box for Confirming All Label Deletion If you click OK all the labels are removed from the HEW system s symbol table and the list display will be cleared If the message box is not required do not select the Delete All Labels option of the Confirmation sheet in the HEW Options dialog box 4 6 6 Loading Labels from a File A symbol file can be loaded and merged into the HEW s current symbol table Choose Load from the pop up menu to open the Load Symbols dialog box 234 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Load Symbols Look in areut si El c 2 tutorial sym File name my_code sym Files of type Symbol Files sym 7 Cancel Figure 4 30 Load Symbols Dialog Box The dialog box operates like a standard Windows open file dialog box select the file and c
257. les select the variable that you want to remove from the list and then click the Remove button Environment Variable 27 xi Variable OK pm ox Cancel Value Placeholder c dos c mytools c windows c temp popup menu Figure 3 4 Environment Variable Dialog If the tool you are adding can display its output as the tool is running then use the Read Output On Fly option This will display the tool output as each line of output happens If this option is set to off then the HEW will store all output which is being displayed by the tool and display it in the output window when the tool has finished its operation This can be a problem when the tool is running an operation that might take many minutes as it is difficult to see the progress of the current execution Note Using Read Output On Fly can cause problems when using certain tools on certain operating systems If you are having problems with tools locking up or freezing in HEW then uncheck the Read Output On Fly option Click the Finish button to create the new phase By default the new phase is added to the bottom of the Build Phase Order list in the Build Order tab of the Build Phases dialog Figure 3 2 46 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 3 Ordering Build Phases In a standard build shown in figure 3 5 you could add a phase at four different positions before the c
258. lf abcdef Target sH2 Monitor Default Debug Format Sysrof Download Modules Offset Address D HEW20 Exe WinhD H 00 Figure 3 16 Debug Settings Dialog Box Target Sheet Any changes made in the Debug Settings dialog box do not take effect until you click the OK button The default debug format is set to the first download module in the list by default Only one default debug object format can be specified for each session All currently installed debugger formats are listed here Debug Settings 2 x ReleaseSession fei Target Options tutorial Command batch file load timing At target connection Command Line Batch Processing Add Remove Up Down I Connect up to target on debug go Figure 3 17 Debug Settings Dialog Box Options Sheet 205 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The Options sheet figure 3 17 of the Debug Settings dialog box contains the option that determines when a target is connected If the option is checked the target is not connected until you select Build gt Debug gt Go If the option is unchecked the target is connected whenever a configuration is opened This happens when a new workspace or project is opened or also when you switch configuration using the toolbar or Build Configurations dialog box The Command Line Batch Processing list in the sheet contains a list of command line batch commands These batch comm
259. lick Open to start loading The standard file extension for symbol files is sym When the symbol loading is complete a confirmation message box may be displayed showing how many symbols have been loaded this can be switched off in the Confirmation sheet on the HEW Options dialog box 4 6 7 Saving Labels into a File Choose Save As from the pop up menu to open the Save Symbols dialog box The Save Symbols dialog box operates like a standard Windows Save File As dialog box Enter the name for the file in the File name field and click Save to save the HEW s current label list to a symbol file The standard file extension for symbol files is sym See appendix B Symbol File Format for symbol file format Once a file is specified by the Save As menu the current symbol table can be saved in the same symbol file just by choosing Save from the pop up menu 4 6 8 Searching for a Label Choose Find from the pop up menu to open the Find Label dialog box Find Label Name 7 Address 7 Tl Match case ui Figure 4 31 Find Label Dialog Box Enter all or part of the label name that you wish to find into the edit box and click OK or press the Enter key The HEW searches the label list for a label name containing the text that you entered 235 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Note Only the label is stored by 1024 characters of the start therefore the la
260. list on the Change Toolchain Version dialog and click the Information button Then a tool information dialog figure 3 21 will show you the information of the tool Click the Close button to close the dialog H8S H8 300 C C Compiler Information 24 x Information High performance Embedded Workshop H8S H8 300 SERIES C C Compiler Ver 4 0 04 c 1994 1996 1997 1999 Renesas Technology Corp Figure 3 21 Toolchain Information Dialog 61 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 9 Using an External Debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu as described in chapter 6 Customizing the Environment in this manual The Debugger tab of the Customize dialog figure 3 22 is where the High performance Debugging Interface related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting Tools gt Customize and then selecting the Debugger tab C Hew HDIS SIMSSH Hdi exe CONFIGDIR PROJECT NAME hds CONFIGDIR PROJECT NAME abs Figure 3 22 Customize Dialog Debugger Tab When an external debugger is used check Use external debugger and then set the following items Firstly the location of the HDI executa
261. ll be stop after the current file has been built 2 Wait until the message Build Finished appears in the Output window before continuing gt To forcibly terminate a current tool 1 Select Build gt Terminate Current Tool The HEW will attempt to stop the tool immediately Note Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again 2 6 4 Building Multiple Projects The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build multiple projects and configurations at once gt To build multiple projects 1 Select Build gt Build Multiple The figure displayed in figure 2 18 2 The build multiple gives you the choice of which projects and configurations should be built To select which projects and configurations need to be built select the check box next to the project configuration combination you want to build For example in figure 2 18 if you wanted to build the entire hewtest2 project you would check the hewtest2 Debug and the hewtest2 Release selections and leave all other check boxes unchecked 3 When you are happy with your chosen selection click the build button and the HEW will then build the projects and configurations you have chosen If you want to build all the projects which you choose you click the build all button 5 Results from the build are displayed in the build win
262. lowing conditions holds 1 The options for the current file have been modified since the last build 2 If any of the output files are missing 3 Any of the source files have a newer date than the phase s output files 4 Any of the dependent files have a newer date than the phase s output files 5 Ina user defined custom build phase the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box is checked To see the status of this check box select Options gt Build Phases select the phase in the Build Phase Order list in the Build Order tab and click the Modify button Then you will see the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box on the Command tab 6 A subcommand file is selected in Optimizing Linkage Editor I want to exclude a file in a project from build temporarily Push the right button of your mouse on the file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Exclude Build lt file gt where lt file gt is the selected file Then the file is excluded from build To include the file in build again push the right button of your mouse on the file and select Include Build lt file gt I opened a workspace from my PC and one of my colleagues opened the same workspace simultaneously from another PC I changed the settings of the workspace and saved it He or she saved the workspace after me I opened the workspace again and
263. m eee 121 Defining Version Control Menu Options 121 8 1 1 System menu options and toolbar buttons 0 0 0 eceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaee 123 8 1 2 User menu options siei e seriste ES VEEE E EEEE E AA 125 Defining Version Control Commands eccescssceseeseeeseeseeseeseesecaeeeceneeseeaeeaeeeecneseaeeneens 127 8201 Executable return COdG se e aa aaup r EE EEA E EA RA TES 127 Specifying Argument sirpis sneri arena ESE EEE E EEEN IEE NEVERE NEEE EEEE EE 128 83T Specifying File Locators cs eccccvncsecees wusceeorsexcecsvceseceavesncaaserevetcovernceseveasetesveneee 129 8 3 2 Specifying Environment cccscscesccsccesessssscsscenscosensssensesaceeseneenseneseneessensense 132 8 3 3 Specifying Comments cesccssazecceccsseuecssszsocessaberavansvncccdsewenccusevevecdoveueccnnevaveceseeetes 133 8 3 4 Specifying a User Name and Password ccccsscssesseeseeeeceeceseeseesecereeeeeeeeaeeaeenee 134 Controlling Execution sisir arat KR LE TIEI EEE EEE EEEE ETES 8 4 1 Prompt before executing command iii High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 4 2 Run in DOS Window eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 136 8 4 3 Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter 136 8 5 Importing and exporting a Set up ee eeeeseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaee 136 9 Using Visual S rceSafesuassskosn n ei 139 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a Workspace 139 9 1 1 Selecting
264. mance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Standard I O and File I O Processing The simulator debugger enables the standard I O and file I O processing listed in table 2 2 to be executed by the user program When the I O processing is executed the I O Simulation window must be open Table 2 2 shows the supported I O functions The function codes have 16 bit address 24 bit address and 32 bit address versions Select the version according to the CPU to be used Table 2 2 No T O Functions Function Code Function Name Description 1 H 01 16 bit address GETC Inputs one byte from the standard input H 11 24 bit address device H 21 32 bit address 2 H 02 16 bit address PUTC Outputs one byte to the standard output H 12 24 bit address device H 22 32 bit address 3 H 03 16 bit address GETS Inputs one line from the standard input device H 13 24 bit address H 23 32 bit address 4 H 04 16 bit address PUTS Outputs one line to the standard output device H 14 24 bit address H 24 32 bit address 5 H 05 16 bit address FOPEN Opens a file H 15 24 bit address H 25 32 bit address 6 H 06 FCLOSE Closes a file 7 H 07 16 bit address FGETC Inputs one byte from a file H 17 24 bit address H 27 32 bit address 8 H 08 16 bit address FPUTC Outputs one byte to a file H 18 24 bit address H 28 32 bit address 9 H 09 16 bit address FGETS Inputs one li
265. mbedded Workshop User s Manual 7 Version Control The High performance Embedded Workshop provides facilities for connecting to a version control tool Some of the reasons why version control tools are used with a project are e To maintain the integrity of a project e To store each stage of a project e To enable different users to co develop a project by controlling revisions to its source files Figure 7 1 illustrates a typical project where a version control system is in use This shows three users who all use the same shared network drive to exchange source code The version control system provides access and updates to the source files NETWORK Figure 7 1 Version Control 117 118 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 7 1 Selecting a Version Control System Initially the version control sub menu will appear as shown in figure 7 2 At this time only the Version Control gt Select option is available because a version control system is not yet active for the current workspace op Tools Serije addkiels EMGye FIEIS a 7A ee Enteral Debugger DLR CINE it Figure 7 2 Version Control Sub Menu High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To select a version control system 1 Select Version Control gt Select The dialog shown i
266. me Renesas Technology Renesas Technology i O0x0000105e Figure 4 47 Expanding a Watch Item To collapse an expanded watch item click on the item again The item s elements will collapse back to the single item and the minus sign changes back to a plus sign Editing a Watch Item s Value You may wish to change the value of a watch variable e g for testing purposes or if the value is incorrect due to a bug in your program To change a watch item s value use the Edit Value function gt Editing a watch item s value Enter a value directly in the window In another way select the item to edit by clicking on it you will see a flashing cursor on the item Choose Edit Value from the pop up menu The Edit Value dialog box opens Expression max Current Value H 0000794b Ox00fffbb4 New Value fH 10000 Cancel Figure 4 48 Edit Value Dialog Box Enter the new value or expression in the New Value field and click OK The Watch window is updated to show the new value Deleting a Watch Item To delete a watch item select it and choose Delete from the pop up menu The item is deleted and the Watch window is updated To delete all watch items choose Delete All from the pop up menu All items are deleted and the Watch window is updated 250 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Specifying Realtime Update The R mark shown to the left of each variable indica
267. memory corresponding to a memory type End End address of the memory corresponding to a memory type Data bus Memory data bus width State count Number of memory access cycles Clicking the OK button stores the settings Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without modifying the settings Note The memory map setting for the area allocated to a system memory resource cannot be deleted or modified First delete the system memory resource allocation with the Simulator Memory Resource dialog box then delete or modify the memory map setting 289 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 21 4 Set Memory Resource Dialog Box The Set Memory Resource dialog box sets and modifies memory resources Set Memory Resource Begin H o0000000 End H 00003FFF Attribute Read Write Cancel x Figure 4 89 Set Memory Resource Dialog Box The following items are specified Begin Start address of the memory area to be allocated End End address of the memory area to be allocated Attribute Access type Read Read only Write Write only Read Write Read and write Click the OK button after specifying the Begin End and Attribute Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without modifying the setting 4 22 Standard I O and File I O Processing Use the Simulated I O window to enable the standard I O and file I O system calls from the user program 4 22
268. ments 2 Initial directory s TEMPOIR LP Browse C Select from existing system tools Hitachi Mapview version 1 0 Figure 6 5 Add Tool Dialog New menu options are added to the bottom of the list i e bottom of the tools menu by default The order of menu options in the Tools menu can also be modified 2 To modify a menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 2 Select the menu option that you would like to modify and then click the Modify button 3 Make the desired changes on the Modify Tool dialog figure 6 6 and then click OK ModifyT ool 21x Cancel Command StWINDIF explorer exe gt Browse Arguments 2 Initial directory S TEMPOIR D Browse Figure 6 6 Modify Tool Dialog gt To remove a menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 2 Select the menu option that you would like to remove and then click the Remove button 107 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 3 Configuring the Help System The High performance Embedded Workshop provides context sensitive help within the editor window In other words if you select some text in the editor window and then press F1 the High performance
269. ministration dialog A standard file open dialog will be launched with its file filter set to HEW Registration Files hrf 2 Navigate to the HRF file of the component you would like to register select it and then click Select 3 A dialog will be invoked which displays information regarding the selected tool Click Register to confirm that you want to register the tool or click Close to abort the operation 5 4 Unregistering Components The components which are registered with the HEW affect the way in which it behaves For example every compatible system tool which is registered will be added to the tools menu when a new project is created Sometimes this may not be desirable If so open the Tools Administration dialog select the component from the Registered components list and then click the Unregister button A dialog will be invoked which asks you to confirm this action Click Yes to confirm the action Note Unregistering a component does not remove its installation from hard disk It simply removes the information which the HEW was storing about that component i e it disconnects it from the HEW The action can be easily reversed at anytime by registering the tool see above If you want to remove a component from the hard disk i e uninstall a component then refer to the section Uninstalling Components later in this chapter 94 High performance Embedded Workshop
270. mory unit and entering the new value in hexadecimal through the keyboard 4 2 6 Selecting a Memory Range If the memory address range is in the Memory window you can select the range by clicking on the first memory unit according to the Memory window display choice and dragging the mouse to the last unit The selected range is highlighted If the memory address range is larger than or outside the Memory window you can enter the start address and byte count in the respective fields of the Format dialog box 219 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 7 Finding a Value in Memory To find a value in memory open the Memory window and select Search from the pop up menu Otherwise when the Memory window has already been opened simply press the F3 key The Search Memory dialog box shown in figure 4 11 is displayed Data ___ _ Search Data As Byte amp 1 7 IV Search Equal Data I Search Backward Figure 4 11 Search Memory Dialog Box Enter the start and end addresses of the range in which to search the start and end address of the Memory will be automatically filled in and the data value to search for and select the search format If pattern search is selected as the search format a byte string of up to 256 bytes can be searched for The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Sear
271. n Width Pixel Specifies the width of the image When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Height Pixel Specifies the height of the image When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Buffer Size Displays the buffer size of the image from the width and height Displayed in hexadecimal Specifies the location size and data start location of the part to be displayed among the entire image Specifies the entire part to be displayed in the image Full Size Displays the entire image Part Size Displays part of the image Top Displays data from the upper left Bottom Displays data from the lower left Specifies the start position of the image where part of the image is to be displayed Valid when Part Size is selected X Position Specifies the X axis of the start location When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Y Position Specifies the Y axis of the start location When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Width Height Size Specifies the height and width of the image to be displayed partly Width Pixel Displays the width of display When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal 225 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Height Pixel Displays the height of display When a prefix is omitted the values are input and dis
272. n acquisition buffer becomes full Break Stops execution when the trace information acquisition buffer becomes full The trace buffer capacity can be selected from 1024 records 4096 records 16384 records and 32768 records in the Trace Capacity 262 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Clicking the OK button stores the settings Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without modifying the settings 4 14 3 Acquiring Trace Information After trace acquisition is enabled trace information is acquired during instruction execution The acquired information will be displayed in the Trace window Trace olx PTR CCR Mult Instruction Access Data Source Labe 05343 0000029266 000800 MOV L QOFFFBES lt void main void _mai 05342 0000029281 000804 a STH L OOFFFBDC lt 05341 0000029289 000808 ae SUB W R lt FBB4 05340 9000029293 00080C MOV L ER amp OOFF 05339 0000029301 00080E waa MOV W RO lt 0001 srand 1 05338 0000029312 000812 JSR PC lt O0000DB4 05337 0000029316 000D54 EXTU L ERO lt 0000 _sra 05336 0000029334 000DB6 S MOV L OOFFFO6A lt 05335 0000029345 000DBE E RTS Pc lt 00000816 05334 0000029357 000816 fier MOV L ERO lt 0000 printf 05333 0000029368 00081C ssa MOV L OOFFFBBO lt 05332 0000029379 000820 oo JSR PC lt 00000C74 05331 0000029390 000C74 MOV
273. n components It supports the following structures in the view for C source files The basic structure of the information is shown below in figure 13 2 Workspace x ANIMAL 9C Classes demo a CPerson es CCrocodile CCrocodileShark CHorse CReptile amp CGreatWhite amp CGreatWhite FeedTheShark CCrocodile myGoat FeedTheShark CFish mpFishyFood FeedTheShark char psz0therT ype FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyF FeedTheShark CPerson myPersonl amp FeedTheShark void amp GetClassN ame void lt m_nDangerous E maws E m_nSea E m_stName Globals heap_area amp _siptr be bs amp brk amp INT Vectors Project Templates Navigation of C navigation category title Project name Class name Class Member functions Protected member variable Private member variable Global variables and functions folder Figure 13 4 C Navigation information The C navigation view uses a number of icons to describe the type of function or variable the icon belongs too These are listed in the table below 159 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Public member function Figure 13 5 C Navigation Icons The navigator view allows you to move around your source code q
274. n figure 3 15 is displayed 4 The Format list box contains a list of supported object format readers This allows you to choose the correct reader for the download module you wish to add to the project 203 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual nn The Filename field allows you to browse to the download module on your disk or simply type it into edit control if you have not yet built the module Enter an offset address to the Offset field suitable only for some object formats 6 7 Specify the memory access size as 1 2 4 or 8 8 To download only the debugging information check the Download debug information only check box 9 To verify memory during downloading check the Perform memory verify during download check box 10 When the user clicks the OK button the debug download module is added to the bottom of the list If you wish to position the module in a different position in relation to the other modules select the module and then use the Up and Down buttons to position the module correctly Download Module Ve x Offset aa Ho0000000 Cancel Format Elf Dwarf2 x Filename S CONFIGDIR S PROJECTNAME abs gt Browse Access size hd T Download debug information only J Perform memory verify during download 204 Figure 3 15 Download Module Dialog Box High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Debug 7 Target Options
275. n figure 7 3 will be displayed This dialog lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the desired version control system from the Version control systems list and click the Select button The Current version control system is changed to reflect the new selection 3 Click the OK button to confirm the selection Select Version Control System Figure 7 3 Select Version Control System Dialog Note Only those version control systems which have been installed with the HEW will appear in the Select Version Control System dialog figure 7 3 Once a version control tool is selected you will notice that the Version Control gt Configure option has now become available The next chapter discusses the usage of the custom version control system 119 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 120 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 Using the Custom Version Control System The custom version control system is a configurable addition to the High performance Embedded Workshop which allows you to connect to a version control system already installed on your machine To clarify further the High performance Embedded Workshop does not provide a version control tool itself only a means by which you can integrate the version control system which you use into your workspaces and projects 8 1 Defining Version Control Menu Options The custom version co
276. n instance of the string double click on the desired entry in the Output window 4 5 3 Replacing Text Replacing text is similar to finding text as discussed in the previous section The difference is that when the text is found you have the option to replace it with other text gt To replace text in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search 3 Select Edit gt Replace press CTRL H or select Replace from the editor window s local menu A replace dialog box will be displayed figure 4 4 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the replace operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 74 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 Enter the text that you want to replace the search string with into the Replace with field or select a previous replace string from the drop down list box oe 21 xi Find what fetr ing z Replace with u meric z Replace I Match whole word only Replace In Replace All J Match case Selection J7 Regular expression Whole file Cancel C All open files Figure 4 4 Replace Dialog 6 If you would like to search for
277. n to another user with a different installation the build will probably fail In general use placeholders wherever possible using a full specific path should be avoided when possible 63 64 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 Using the Editor This chapter describes how to use the editor that is provided with the High performance Embedded Workshop 4 1 The Editor Window The editor window figure 4 1 contains the file windows that are being viewed or edited Only one window is active at anytime This window is called the active window or current window and its title bar will appear a different color from that of the others dbsct c is the active window in figure 4 1 All text operations such as typing pasting text and so forth only affect the active window To switch to another source file window i e to make some other window the active window there are a number of methods e Click on it if it is visible e Press CTRL TAB to cycle through the windows one after another e Select the window by name from the Window menu e Select its tab at the bottom of the editor window When a file has been edited an asterisk is appended to the window s title bar The asterisk remains there until the file is saved The asterisk is also removed if all of the edited changes are undone in the current window LS KEKE EEK KKH KK EEK KK
278. nce Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 20 1 Setting a Trigger Button Choose Setting from the pop up menu to open the Trigger Setting dialog box and to specify the details of the pseudo interrupt to be generated by pressing each trigger button Trigger Setting Cancel JV Enable Name fi Interrupt Typel Hoooo0000 Interrupt Type Priority fo E Figure 4 85 Trigger Setting Dialog Box This dialog box allows the user to specify the details of the pseudo interrupt to be generated by pressing each trigger button Trigger No Selects a trigger button to specify details Name Specifies the name of the selected trigger button which will be displayed in the Trigger window Enable Enables the trigger button when this box is checked Interrupt Typel Specifies the Interrupt vector number 0 to H FF Priority Interrupt priority 0 to H 11 Whether or not the interrupt is accepted is determined by the CPU s specification of the selected debugging platform However when H 8 or larger is specified for the priority interrupts are always accepted Clicking the OK button stores the setting Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without setting the details of the interrupt Note If the Cancel button is clicked after multiple trigger button settings are modified the modifications of all those buttons are canceled 4 20 2 Changing the Number of Trigger Buttons Specif
279. nchronization eesseeeeeeeeeessesreeresesresrseerrsesersesrsrrsisrsresrseseses 302 4 23 2 Internal HEW synchronization eesseeeeeeeeeeesesiseriseetsrsresiseserstsrsersisresesresesreet 303 Section S Command LiNeSre rora ana E E RARR NRR NN RENN a 307 viii 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 49 5 50 5 51 5 52 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual COMMENT 310 ADD_FILE 310 ANALYSIS nd ANALYSIS_RANGE seeeess 311 ANALYSIS_RANGE_DELETE ASSEMBLE oseere 313 ASSERT 313 BREAKPOINT 314 BREAK ACCESS 1s sisssesucssdvescagiavsssstedsszessesnevsscessaresetussvtatsisazanesusstestetearsaraapssetadesraueneiis 315 BREAK CLEAR sirnaa siausreshar EEE a sedi sn vaai EN Aas 318 BREAK CYCLE ea a E EEE AEA E 318 BREAK DATA ioeina RaO TEERAA 320 BREAK DISPLAY siiivecssestnensscsibansdsshieeltssiupeesaiuenedes EE e 321 BREAK ENABLE niuinntir Es aA E ER A rE NEN 322 BREAK REGISTER pisses sscsessssseeeiessseeaassevcasbezesvias savseasbsaeanasssbustanistantauastestaabseneeiiseienttis 323 BREAK SEQUENCE sisi sesessiscsdsans A NONE EDES ROINNE EIEEEI Ete 325 BUM D EEEE E E E L E A E T 327 BUID Ale bres scores iis citar eee esi oa es vest ih ued
280. nd in Files Dialog 2 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find field 3 Enter the file extensions of the files you would like to search into the In files types field If several extensions are specified be sure to separate them with a comma e g c h 4 Enter the directory in which you would like to search files into the Directory field Alternatively you may browse to the desired directory graphically if you click the Browse button 5 Ifyou would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it then check the Search sub directories check box If you just want to search the single directory specified in the Directory field then ensure that this check box is not checked 6 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match case check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 7 If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box 8 Click Find to begin the search Any matches found will be displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window To jump to a
281. nd of file H 0B Parameter Block One byte One byte 0 Return value File number Parameters Return value output 0 File pointer is not at EOF 1 EOF detected File number input The number returned when the file was opened FSEEK Moves the file pointer to the specified position H 0C Parameter Block One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 Derection Unused 4 Offset upper word 6 Offset lower word Parameters Return value output 0 Normal completion 1 Error File number input The number returned when the file was opened Direction input 0 The offset specifies the position as a byte count from the start of the file 1 The offset specifies the position as a byte count from the current file pointer 2 The offset specifies the position as a byte count from the end of the file Offset input The byte count from the location specified by the direction parameter FTELL Returns the current position of the file pointer H 0D Parameter Block 300 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual One byte One byte 0 Return value File number 2 Offset upper word 4 Offset lower word Parameters e Return value output 0 Normal completion 1 Error e File number input The number returned when the file was opened e Offset output The current position of the file pointer as a
282. nd to display the Editor window corresponding to the cursor location in the Coverage window 4 17 4 Changing the Display Address Choose Go to Address to open the Go To Address dialog box Go To Addr H Cancel Figure 4 72 Go To Address Dialog Box This dialog box changes the address displayed in the Coverage window 4 17 5 Changing the Coverage Range e Specifying the coverage range with an address Choose Set Range from the pop up menu to open the Coverage Range dialog box Start address 200 7 End address 850 v Cancel C Fie Figure 4 73 Coverage Range Dialog Box Specifying Address This dialog box specifies the condition to acquire instruction execution information The following items can be specified Start Address Start address When a prefix is omitted the value is input in hexadecimal End Address End address When a prefix is omitted the value is input in hexadecimal 276 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Clicking OK changes the coverage range 277 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e Specifying the coverage range with a source file Choose Set Range from the pop up menu to open the Coverage Range dialog box Start address z End address z Cancel File fresetpra c gt Browse Figure 4 74 Coverage Range Dialog Box Specifying Source File This dialog box specifies the
283. ndard Toolchain 5 0 2 0 Properties CH38 C Hew Tools Hitachi H845_0_2 include CH38TMP C TEMP PATH C Hew T ools Hitachi sH845_0_2 bin Figure 5 6 Properties Dialog Environment Tab To add a new environment variable click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 5 7 will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the Environment tab Placeholder pop up menus are included to ensure that the environment can be specified as flexibly as possible For a detailed description of placeholders see appendix C Placeholders To modify an environment variable select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment tab and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable to the Environment tab To remove an environment variable select it and then click the Remove button Environment Yariable Placeholder popup menu c dos c mptools c windows c temp Figure 5 7 Environment Variable Dialog 96 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 6 Uninstalling Components The HEW provides a built in uninstaller method which can remove unregistered components gt To uninstall a component 1 Select Tools
284. ndow This window allows the user to control the debugging platform by sending text based commands A series of predefined command lines can be called from a file and the output can be recorded in a file The command can be executed by pressing the Enter key after the command is input at the prompt gt on the last line For information about the available commands refer to section 5 Command Lines and the on line help If available the window title displays the current batch and log file names separated by colons Pressing the Ctrl or Ctrl J keys on the last line displays the previously executed command line The HEW command and TCL ver 8 4 1 commands can be input in this window 4 19 2 Specifying a Command File It is useful to use a command file when a series of predefined command lines need to be executed Create a command file by a text editor and write necessary command lines The default extension of a command file is hde Choose Set Batch File from the pop up menu to open the Set Batch File dialog box in which the name of a command file hdc can be specified Clicking the OK button displays the specified command file name as the window title Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without modifying the setting Set Batch File 24 xi Batch File gt Browse Cancel Figure 4 82 Set Batch File Dialog Box 4 19 3 Executing a Command File Click the Play button in the
285. ne from a file H 19 24 bit address H 29 32 bit address 10 H 0A 16 bit address FPUTS Outputs one line to a file H 1A 24 bit address H 2A 32 bit address 11 H 0B FEOF Checks for end of the file 12 H 0C FSEEK Moves the file pointer 13 H 0D FTELL Returns the current position of the file pointer For details on I O functions refer to section 4 22 Standard I O and File I O Processing 181 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 11 Calculation of the Number of Instruction Execution Cycles The simulator debugger calculates the number of instruction execution cycles by using the expression the data bus width of the memory map and the number of access cycles which is described in the H8S H8 300 Series Programming Manual However note that the number of instruction execution cycles may differ when the number of instruction execution cycles that is calculated on the simulator debugger and the one that the program is executed on the system MOVFPE and MOVTPE Instructions The number of cycles for transferring data of the E clock synchronization instruction is the value between 9 to 16 The simulator debugger calculates as 11 number of operand access cycles The number of operand access cycles can be calculated from the data bus width of the memory and the number of access cycles EEPMOV Instruction The number of cycles for the EEPROM write instruction is the sum of the number of cycles for reading instructions
286. new line e Symbol n Meaning This character matches the newline character n would be used to search for line endings or in patterns that cross line boundaries Example 1 n matches every occurrence of a newline following a semicolon Example 2 nif searches for a semicolon a new line and a line beginning with if 371 372 Symbol Meaning Example 1 Example 2 Symbol Meaning Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Example 6 Symbol Meaning Example 1 Example 2 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual t This character matches the tab character t8 Finds every occurrence of a tab character followed by an 8 init t Finds every occurrence of a tab character following init This matches any one character or a range of single characters listed within the brackets Brackets cannot be nested specifies a range of characters e g a z or 0 9 The beginning character in the range must have a lower ASCII value than the ending character of the range matches a single character if it is not any one of the characters between and This pattern also matches newline characters unless the newline character is included within the brackets AEIOU Finds every uppercase vowel lt gt Finds a literal lt gt or A Za z0 9_ Matches an upper or lowercase letter a digit or an underscore 0 9 Matches any c
287. not continue command processing 5 39 GO_TILL Abbreviation GT Description Executes the user program from the current PC with temporary breakpoints This command takes multiple addresses as parameters and these are used to set temporary PC breakpoints these breakpoints only exist for the duration of the command Syntax gt lt state gt lt address gt Parameter Type Description lt state gt Keyword Specifies whether or not to continue command processing during user program execution optional default wait wait Causes command processing to wait until user program stops continue Continues command processing during execution lt address gt Numeric Temporary breakpoint address list Wait is the default and this causes command processing to wait until user program stops executing 340 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Continue allows you to continue to enter commands but they may not work depending on the debugging platform Example GO_TILL H 1000 Continues execution until the PC reaches address H 1000 5 40 HALT Abbreviation HA Description Halts the user program This command can be used after the GO command if the GO command uses continue for option Syntax ha Parameter Type Description none Halts the user program Example HA Halts the user program 341 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 41 INITIALIZE Abbreviation IN D
288. ns mm Toggle Bookmarks Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line m al Next Bookmark Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line ma Previous Bookmark Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line hl Clear All Bookmarks Clears all bookmarks in the current file 4 2 5 Templates Toolbar Buttons lh Define Template Specify template text for subsequent insertion T Insert Template Insert the template selected in the drop down list at the current cursor position 68 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 Standard File Operations 4 3 1 Creating a New File gt To create a new editing window Select File gt New or click the new file toolbar button L or press CTRL N The window will be given an arbitrary name by default You can provide a new name when you save the file 4 3 2 Saving a File gt To save the contents of an editing window 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save or click the save file toolbar button W or press CTRL S 3 If the file has not been saved before a file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 4 If the file has been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed gt To s
289. nt disable Disables coverage measurement reset Resets result of coverage measurement Examples COVERAGE Displays coverage state CV enable Enables coverage measurement CVr Resets result of coverage measurement 5 23 COVERAGE_DISPLAY Abbreviation CVD Description Displays coverage information Syntax cvd Parameter Type Description none Displays coverage information Example COVERAGE_DISPLAY Displays coverage information 329 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 24 COVERAGE _LOAD Abbreviation CVL Description Loads the coverage information from a COV file If a wrong file format is specified or the specified file is not found a warning message will be displayed Note If the coverage range is specified by a source file the saved COV file cannot be loaded Syntax cyl lt filename gt Parameter Type Description filename Character File name string Examples COVERAGE_LOAD TEST Loads the coverage information from the TEST COV file CLV COVERAGE COV Loads the coverage information from the COVERAGE COV file 5 25 COVERAGE RANGE Abbreviation CVR Description Sets the coverage range or displays the range of coverage measurement without parameters Syntax cvr lt start gt lt end gt Parameter Type Description none Displays the coverage measurement range lt start gt Numeric Start address of the coverage measurement range lt end gt Numeric
290. nto a build configuration figure 2 14 This means that you can freeze all of the options and give them a name Later on you can select that configuration and all of the options for all of the build phases will be restored These build configurations also allow the user to specify debugger settings for a build configuration This means that each configuration can be targeted at a different end platform See Simulator Debugger Part in this manual for further information Figure 2 14 shows three build configurations Default MyDebug and MyOptimized In the first configuration Default each of the phases compile and assemble are set to their standard settings In the second configuration MyDebug each of the files are being built with debug information switched on In the third configuration MyOptimized each of the files are being built with optimization on full and without any debug information The developer of this project can select any of those configurations and build them without having to return to the options dialogs to set them again Default MyDebug MyOptimized Configuration Configuration Configuration I I I A Debug ON Debug ON Debug OFF POptimize OFF Optimize OFF Optimize ON List File YES LJ List File NO List File NO Cc Source Files I I I
291. ntrol system allows you to invoke a version control command either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button When either of these actions are performed the associated commands are executed and the output is displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window gt To execute a version control menu option or toolbar button 1 Select whichever items you would like to apply the version control command to from the Workspace window This may include a workspace project s folder s and file s When the command is selected all of the files will be extracted from the selected items and passed in turn to the version control command For example if you select the workspace icon then all of the files in all of the projects will be passed in turn to the version control command This will include any system files For example if you select the project item then 2 Select the required menu option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or click the desired version control toolbar button The custom version control support allows you the most flexibility in specifying how a version control system is to be used To configure it select Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed figure 8 1 121 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Version Control Setup ej FALA
292. o Project then adds the file to the current project 15 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Build File dbsct c Cut CtrltX Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Add le fic Rroject Eind Ctrl F Find Ih Files F4 Replace Gtri H Goto Line CtrHG Match Braces CtritM Book marks gt Templates Toggle Breakpoint F9 Enable Disable Breskoomt GritEg Figure 2 4 Editor Window Pop up Menu e In the HEW it is also possible to Drag and Drop files from Windows Explorer onto the workspace window These files will be automatically added to the project and are displayed in the folder in which they were dragged to Note If you add a file to a project when it is an unrecognized file type then it will still be added to the project Certain functions will be disabled with reference to this file When this file is double clicked in the workspace window instead of opening the file in the editor the open operation is passed to Windows operating system The default open operation is then carried out as if the file was opened in Windows Explorer To view the current defined extensions use the File Extensions dialog see the section on file extensions later in this chapter 16 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 2 Removing Files from a Project Files can be individually removed from a project selections of files can be removed or all files can be removed gt To remo
293. o section 4 22 Standard I O and File I O Processing Syntax tp lt address gt Parameter Type Description lt address gt Numeric System call address Example TP 1000 Sets the system call address to 1000 5 82 TRAP_ADDRESS DISPLAY Abbreviation TD Description Displays the current system call address for standard I O and file I O functions from the user program For details refer to section 4 22 Standard I O and File I O Processing The system call address is displayed in the following format H xxxxxxxx Y H xxxxxxx System call address 8 digit hexadecimal value Y E System call enabled D System call disabled Syntax td Parameter Type Description None Displays the current system call address and whether the system call is enabled or disabled Example TD Displays the system call address value and whether the system call is enabled or disabled 365 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 83 TRAP_ADDRESS ENABLE Abbreviation TE Description Enables or disables the system call for standard I O and file I O functions from the user program For details refer to section 4 22 Standard I O and File I O Processing Syntax te lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables the system call E Enables the system call D Disable the system call Example TEE Enables the system call 5 84 UPDATE_ALL_DEPENDENCIES Abbreviation UD Descript
294. oject from the workspace 2 13 Loading unloading a Project into from a Workspace gt To load a project into a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Load Project option gt To unload a project from a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Unload Project option Note You can load or unload plural projects at a time That is more efficient to load or unload a project individually 37 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 14 Relative projects paths in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop when you add a project to the workspace you can choose to add the project to the workspace using a relative path This allows you to position a project above the workspace directory and it will still be relocated correctly if you relocate the HEW workspace The project is always relative to the workspace so if the project is one directory above the workspace before it is moved the HEW will try to find the project in the same relative location after the relocation procedure This is especially useful if you are using a project shared between more than one workspace In older versions of the HEW this project would not have been relocated and would have still tried to access
295. older project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Undo Check Out menu option 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them Of those files which are being controlled by Visual SourceSafe some will be checked in and others will be checked out i e being edited by a user The status command displays the current status of a file or file s To view the status of a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose status you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status of Files menu option 3 Ifa file has a blue tick next to it a user different to you has checked it out 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a File Visual SourceSafe controls the edits to the files in its projects and allows you to view the complete history of these edits right back to the time that the file was first added to the project gt To view the history of a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose history you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 142 High performance Embedded Workshop User
296. om build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select Exclude Build file where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu figure 2 5 Then a red cross will be put on the file s icon and the file will be excluded from build 2 2 4 Including a Project File in Build An excluded file can be included in the project again gt To include a file which has been excluded from build 1 Push the right mouse button on a file which has been excluded from build on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select Include Build file where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu Then a red cross will be removed from the file s icon and the file will be included in build 2 3 File Extensions and File Groups The HEW can identify files by their extension The system defines certain extensions depending upon the tools which are being used For example if you are using a compiler then the c extension will be in the C source file group and be used as input to the compiler phase figure 2 1 Typical Build Process Additionally the HEW allows you to define your own extensions For example if the project you are developing uses assembler source files the default extension may be src If you would like to use a different extension instead of src e g asm then you can define a new extension and request that the HEW treats it in the same way as a src file File extensions
297. ome new files can be comapred and the differences displayed e Export results to file This opens a dialog which allows you to choose a file to export the current difference results to a textual format e Ignore white space The ignore white space option which is on the advanced options dialog can be toggled via this menu item e Find Displays a standard find dialog This uses the same find dialog as the HEW editor e Find next Finds the next string that meets the find requirements e Find previous Finds the next previous string that meets the find requirements e Previous Difference Automatically jumps the view to the next previous difference e Next Difference Automatically jumps the view to the next difference e Refresh comparison Refreshs the view to manually run the difference comparison again This can be used if either file has been modified since the last comparison The difference window also allows the colours in the view to be customised This procedure is outlined below gt To change the colors viewed in the difference window 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The format views dialog is displayed 2 Expand the difference view The dialog is shown and looks the same as figure 11 6 3 Select the category you want to change The color display tab is displayed and allows modification The categories available are Left hand side moved lines Left hand side different lines Right hand side moved lines and Right hand side
298. ompiler before the assembler before the linker or after the linker You may place your own custom phases or move system phases to any position in the build order It is important to remember that if the output of your custom phase can be input into another phase then the phase order must be correct if the build is to behave as intended Kaa BEGIN al o COMPILE ASSEMBLE LINK f lt 0 Figure 3 5 Typical Build Process The build phase dialog provides facilities for ordering build phases via the Build Phases dialog It has two tabs which are concerned with the ordering of phases Build Order and Build File Order 47 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 3 1 Build Phase Order The Build Order tab figure 3 6 displays the current order in which phases will be executed when the build E or build all 4 operation is selected The check box to the left of each phase indicates whether or not it is currently enabled By clicking this box the phase can be toggled on or off Build Phases Build Order Build File Order File Mappings 2 Build phase order H85 H87300 C C Library Generator Add H8S H8 300 C C Compiler H8S H8 300 Assembler pica OptLinker MyPhase SI S SS Figure 3 6 Build Phases Dialog Build Order Tab In addition the following operations can be performed
299. on Select Edit gt Redo Select Redo local menu Press CTRL Y 72 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 5 Searching and Navigating through Files The High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides find replace and file navigation functionality The following three sections detail how to use these features 4 5 1 Finding Text To search for text in the current file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to search is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search 3 Select Edit gt Find press CTRL F select Find from the editor window s local menu or click the find toolbar button 4 The Find dialog box will be displayed figure 4 2 Find zix Find what sting 7 Find Next I Match whole word only Direction Cancel I Match case C Up Down T Regular expression Figure 4 2 Find Dialog 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 5 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 6 I
300. on on workspace open check box if you want a workspace properties dialog to be launched on opening a workspace This check box has the same role as the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace on the Workspace tab of the Options dialog 5 Click OK to save the description on the Information dialog Click the Cancel button not to save the description Workspace Properties Name Demo_H85 26004 Location C Hew Demo_H8S26004 Demo_H85 26004 hws Last modified 10 28 30 Monday June 23 2003 cne CPU family H8S H8 300 Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Information No workspace information available IV Show workspace information on workspace open Figure 6 10 Workspace Properties Dialog When a workspace is opened the High performance Embedded Workshop can display this information so that it is possible to determine whether the workspace is the desired workspace To display this information on opening a workspace set the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace check box 6 4 4 Save workspace before executing any tools To force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving the current workspace before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands set the Save workspace before executing any phases check box 110 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Man
301. on these views TT hhh Bebus z Sync session z amp pl sync session E DemaWorkspace SimSessionSH3 D 3 Session combo when B DemoWorkspace SimSessionSH3 D _ Synchronized debugging is switched or Enable Disable Synchronised Debugging Session list Synchronised Debugging Figure 4 92 Synchronized debug toolbars Note There are a number of capabilities that are synchronized when this facility is enabled The following tables display the capabilities when synchronized debugging is switched on or off The example shows what happens in the two synchronized sessions Debugging function Target Debugger Session 1 Target Debugger Session 2 User click GO in any GO GO Session User click STEP Step Step Into out over in any Session User click ESC in any BREAK BREAK Session BREAK by breakpoints illegal Stop running Same Effect of access or due to illegal User pressing ESC Program Stop running Same Effect of BREAK by breakpoints illegal pressing ESC access or due to illegal User Program 304 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual RESET CPU in any Session RESET CPU RESET CPU Figure 4 93 Synchronized debugging on Debugging function Target Debugger Session 1 Target Debugger Session 2 User click GO
302. onnects you to the correct network HEW service This is defined using machine name If the service cannot be found using the machine name in the workspace then the dialog displayed in figure 10 5 is shown Simply type or browse to the machine where the service is located and click OK If you want to be the server machine then leave the radio button on its default selection use local machine 149 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Select Server Location Figure 10 5 Select machine name If you have previously been the server of a workspace then the following message will be displayed when you attempt connection to another machine This dialog is displayed in figure 10 6 Clicking OK then connects your machine to the new location High Performance Embedded Workshop Figure 10 6 Select machine name Note If the network is running multiple HEW workspaces with the network service enabled then a user can only access one of them at one time The only instance when this is not the case is if the same machine is serving all of the network workspaces 150 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 11 Difference View The High performance Embedded Workshop now has an integrated difference view This view allows detailed difference comparisons to be made with local files on the drive and also with files in the version control system In the HEW version 3 onwards the Visual SourceSafe component
303. ontinue Continues command processing during execution lt address gt Numeric Start address for PC optional default PC value Wait is the default and this causes command processing to wait until user program stops executing Continue allows you to continue to enter commands but they may not work depending on the debugging platform Examples GO Executes the user program from the current PC value Command processing cannot be continued GO CONTINUE H 1000 Executes the user program from H 1000 Command processing can be continued 339 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 38 GO_RESET Abbreviation GR Description Executes the user program starting at the address specified in the reset vector While the user program is executing the Performance Analysis window is updated Syntax gr lt state gt Parameter Type Description lt state gt Keyword Specifies whether or not to continue command processing during user program execution optional default wait wait Causes command processing to wait until user program stops continue Continues command processing during execution Wait is the default and this causes command processing to wait until user program stops executing Continue allows you to continue to enter commands but they may not work depending on the debugging platform Example GR Executes the user program starting at the address specified in the reset vector does
304. ontrol system Get File s Get a read only local copy of the selected file s from version control system Check In File s Put back i e update the selected file s in version control system with the local copy Check Out File s Get a writable local copy of the selected file s from version control system Status of File s View the status of the selected file s gt To modify a system menu toolbar option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the option to be modified from the System menu options and toolbar buttons list and then click the Modify button The dialog shown in figure 8 3 will be displayed This figure shows a dialog when Add File s has been selected for example 3 Commands are added via the Add button See the section Defining Version Control Commands later in this chapter for further information 4 Close the Define Command for lt command gt dialog by clicking OK 5 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK 123 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Define Commands for Add File s HENOVE MGYE Us MGYE GGT 124 Figure 8 3 Modify System Menu Option Example High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 1 2 User menu options You can create as many user defined menu options as you l
305. oose the file from Open a recent coverage file or open a file open dialog box by Browse to another coverage file and select the file When Open a recent coverage file is selected up to four recent files that have been saved are displayed Clicking OK opens the Coverage window 273 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e Coverage window specifying address Coverage H 00000800 H 00000850 Range Statistic Status Times Pass Address Assembler H 00000800 H 00000850 35 Enable 1 3 00000800 MOV L H 002 l 00000802 ADD H FO F l 00000804 LDC R2 VBR 00000806 MOV L H 002 Enable Al 00000808 JSR GRZ Cleat All 0000080A NOP 1 E ooooosoc MOY H FO F 1 0000080E EXTU B R3 R4 1 00000810 LDC R4 5R 1 00000812 NOP 1 00000814 MOV L H 00 I 00000816 JSR BRZ I 00000818 NOP 1 00000814A SLEEP X Figure 4 70 Coverage Window Specifying Address This window is divided into two by a splitter e Leftside This window displays the coverage range and statistical information The following item is displayed Range Address range Statistic Percentage of the instructions executed within the range Status Enable or Disable status of the coverage range e Right side This window displays the coverage information of the function in C C and assembly language level You can select a function by clicking the function name in left side of the window The
306. op User s Manual 3 4 3 Saving Session Information e To save a session Select File gt Save Session A standard file save dialog is displayed Note You can display the dialog box that asks you whether or not the session is saved Clicking No loses the changes you made in the session This dialog box is displayed by checking Confirm before saving a session on the Workspace tab in the Option dialog box selected from the Tools gt Options menu 3 4 4 Reloading Session Information e To reload a session Select File gt Reload Session Clicking this will lose any changes to your session currently and the reload the current session into HEW A confirmation will be displayed before the reload happens 3 4 5 Debugging Multiple Targets For the method to debug multiple targets in synchronization refer to section 4 23 Synchronizing Multiple Debugging Platforms 212 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 4 Debugging This section describes the debugging operations and their related windows and dialog boxes 4 1 Viewing a Program How to look at your program as source code and assembly language mnemonics is explained here The HEW has various facilities for dealing with code and symbol information which are explained in this section and you will be shown how to look at text files via the user interface Note After a break occurs the HEW displays the location of the program counter PC on the edito
307. opening workspace check box on the Workspace sheet of the Tools Options dialog box Click the OK button in the Workspace Properties dialog box to open the workspace Click the Cancel button to stop opening the workspace Workspace Properties 2 xi Name Demo_H8526004 Location C Hew Demo_H8526004 Demo_H85 26004 hws Last modified 13 32 12 Friday May 23 2003 _ Cancel CPU family H85 H8 300 Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Information No workspace information available Vv Show workspace information on workspace open Figure 1 4 Workspace Properties Dialog Box The HEW keeps track of the last five workspaces that you have opened and adds them to the File menu under the Recent Workspaces submenu This gives you a shortcut to opening workspaces which you have used recently gt To open a recently used workspace Select Open a recent project workspace in the Welcome dialog box select the name of the workspace from the drop down list and then click the OK button Another way is to select File gt Recent Workspaces and then from this submenu select the name of the workspace Note The HEW only permits one workspace to be open at a time Consequently if you attempt to open a second workspace the first will be closed before the new one is opened 1 5 Saving a Workspace Selecting File gt Save Workspace saves a HEW workspace 172 High performance Embedded Workshop User
308. or over the variable name that you want to examine a tooltip will appear near the variable showing a value of that variable Z MEM 221 void COPY _MEM void 222 223 unsigned short u 225 TempZ Name NAME u 226 N 227 u H 7E21 Figure 4 43 Tooltip Watch 4 11 2 Instant Watch Display the source file containing the variable that you want to examine on the Editor window Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine and choose Instant Watch from the pop up menu the Instant Watch dialog box will appear and display the variable at the cursor location 247 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Instant Watch str Ox cO00088 struct strB Figure 4 44 Instant Watch Dialog Box shown to the left of the variable name indicates that the information may be expanded by clicking on the variable name and indicates that the information may be collapsed Clicking Add registers the variable in the Watch window Clicking Close closes the window without registering the variable in the Watch window 4 11 3 Watch Window You can view any value in the Watch window Opening a Watch Window To open a Watch window choose View gt Symbol gt Watch or click on the Watch toolbar button if it is visible A Watch window opens Initially the contents of the window will be blank h o1x Name Value Type
309. or the files CONFIGDIR File5 ob CONFIGDIRA File6 obj CONFIGDIR File obj CONFIGDIR File8 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File1 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File2 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File3 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File4 obj Figure 3 14 Dependent Files Tab in Custom Options 55 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To add a dependent file 1 Click Add The Add Dependent File dialog will be invoked figure 3 15 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click OK to add this output file to the list Placeholder popup menu Add Dependent File File eS Browse Cancel Figure 3 15 Add Dependent File Dialog gt To modify a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to modify 2 Click Modify The Modify Dependent File dialog which is the same as figure 3 15 except the title will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required and then click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list gt To remove a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button 56 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 5 File Mappings By default the files input to a phase are only taken from the project i e all project files of the type spec
310. orccuiessovnevecertonsacsovarcecorvancesswvejuteoveancencarapeveuvers 173 159 5 DeDUSSEr SESSIONS oi piieis serieei sea ucde Sencedasseaud cabanas EEEE EEEE aNe 173 Section 2 Simulator Debugger Functions cece cece cece ceeteeeeeteeteeteees 175 Qk PROAUreS acces E ahs sisesvt ea tes AA O EESE NS EEES 175 22 Vatgetsser Programs scisysisissusssesesassiticdisaresedassssateens vexeiaysnacanasascvesiyescasedvistaseapisesuedeaseseetae 175 iv High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 3 Simulation Range e175 2 4 Memory Management eee 176 2 5 Instruction Execution Reset Processing 177 2 6 Exception Processing ceeeeeeee 178 2 7 H8S 2600 CPU Specific Functions 179 2 8 Control Registers eee 179 29 Traces aydaa 180 2 10 Standard I O and File I O Processing cceseceeseeseeneeeees 181 2 11 Calculation of the Number of Instruction Execution Cycles ccccecceseeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeaes 182 212 Break Conditions isiscssisivscsiniveae ar E te sien ua inns 183 24134 Flo atin g Point Data sarosa oiin EER pun coves cans evasuveuteancensenevervstuates 185 2 14 Display of Function Call History 2 0 0 ccceeeccsceeeeeseeeeceeceseeseeseesececeeeeseeseceeeeeeeeeaeeaeease 186 2 15 gt Performance Measurement sii sescecsieseeeiiveorestigusres T E E 186 DVS Me Profilet iestr coins ta setor Sore ESA EEEE TESERO EETAS ENEE ENE ETES 186 2 15 2 Performance Analysis csscsscessissscc
311. osition click this toolbar button The Insert Template dialog box will be invoked Select a template name and then click OK For further information on templates refer to the Templates section later in this chapter fo Toggle Bookmark The High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides standard bookmark capabilities To set a bookmark select the line to mark and click this button a green mark will then appear in the blank on the left side of the editor window To remove a bookmark select the line to remove a bookmark and click this button the mark in the blank on the left side of the editor window will disappear For further information on bookmarks refer to the Bookmarks section later in this chapter 67 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 2 3 Search Toolbar Buttons Oy Find in Files To search several files for a text string then click this button All find results are displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window For further information refer to the Searching and Navigating Through Files section later in this chapter ray Find Click this button if you want to find a certain text string in the current file It invokes a find dialog box where you can specify the search parameters amp FindNext Finds the next occurrence of the current search string B Find Previous Finds the previous occurrence of the current search string 4 2 4 Bookmarks Toolbar Butto
312. ot High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Global Editor Column States MlSource Address Figure 4 17 Global column state Dialog 89 90 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 Tools Administration You control the components which can be used by the High performance Embedded Workshop via the Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 which is invoked via Tools gt Administration Modification of the Tools Administration dialog box is only possible when no workspace is open while only reference is possible when a workspace is open 5 x Tools Administration Registered components tL Toolchains 3 System Tools Call Walker 11 Register H Series Librarian Interface 1 1 Mapview 1 0 Utility Phases E Debugger Components Binary File Object Reader 1 0 ElfDwarf2 object reader 2 0 Generic Cache View ECX 1 0 Seach Generic Coverage View ECX 1 0 Generic Event View ECX 1 0 Generic Image View ECX 1 0 E a ae OMe BEY 12 Ra Uninstaller T Show all components Current HEW tools database location EAHew Modify Eopeties Erpat 3 w 1 Tool information i Figure 5 1 Tools Administration Dialog Example There are five standard types of component e Toolchain a set of build phases e g compiler assembler
313. ou must select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system gt To add a file or files to Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to add to Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof When selecting the project or workspace folder then the system files will be added to the selected file list For example selecting the project folder will also add the project file to the file list If the project file is then checked out and the version is newer than when it was last loaded you will be asked whether you want to reload the project 2 Click the Add Files toolbar button Eh or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Add Files menu option When you add files to Visual SourceSafe the local versions in your working directory will become read only To check that the add files operation was carried out as you expected or to quickly review the status of all of the files in a project 1 Select the project folder whose files you want to check 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status of Files menu option 3 The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window The information shown includes whether the file is added to the project if the file is checked out and if it is checked out who did so 140 High performance Embedded Workshop Us
314. overage information can be displayed in the Editor window by highlighting the column corresponding to the source line of the executed instruction For the address range or function to be measured the coverage statistical information is displayed in a percentage format which is helpful to know the amount of program that has been executed The instruction coverage information can be saved in or loaded from a file Only a file in the COV format can be loaded For details refer to section 4 17 Acquiring Code Coverage 187 188 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Section 3 Preparations for Debugging This section describes the preparations for debugging your program You will learn how to select and configure a debugging platform with which to debug how to load the user program and what the debugger sessions are 3 1 Building before Debugging To debug your program in the C C source level your C C program must be compiled and linked with the Debug option enabled When this option is enabled the compiler puts all the information necessary for debugging your C C code into the absolute file or management information file If either of these files is used for this purpose it is usually called a debug object file When you create your project the initial setup will normally be configured for debugging Note Make sure you have the Debug option enabled in you
315. password into both of the fields and click OK This should set the user and password on the Tools gt Options network tab It is now possible to leave the Tools gt Options dialog When the dialog is closed you are asked if you want to save the workspace and then re open it This is because the workspace must be re opened in the shared access mode If the changes are not saved then they will be lost When the workspace is re opened a dialog is displayed which asks you to log back into the system Once you have logged in a dialog is displayed which shows your current access rights For example if you are the admin user the level will be administrator When this dialog is closed the HEW server window is opened and the network facilities are enabled High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Network database access Log in User Password Password Access rights Figure 10 2 Initial setup of network tab Change password ix Admin Password pe Confirm password by retyping below Cancel i Figure 10 3 Password dialog 147 10 1 3 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Adding new users to the system The initial setting of the network database adds an administrator user and a guest user to the system The following levels of access are possible in the HEW system e Administrator Full access to every aspect of HEW The user can add and remove users from the
316. played in decimal After the settings have been made in the Image Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Image View window Even after the Image View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the pop up menu Figure 4 19 Image View Window Displays the memory contents as an image 4 3 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh gt Not Refresh in the pop up menu will not refresh the window Checking Auto Refresh gt Stop in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops Checking Auto Refresh gt Realtime in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated in an instruction interval specified with the Response command 4 3 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the pop up menu immediately updates the window contents 4 3 4 Displaying the Pixel Information Double clicking within the window displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box 226 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Pixel Information ks x Color mode RGB 24bit Pixel R 101 G 134 B 58 Position x 325 Y 251 Buffer Size Width 640 Height 480 Image Size Width 384 Height 256 Figure 4 20 Pixel Information Dialog Box
317. plays the operation of the simulator debugger when a break condition is satisfied Stop Execution halts File Input file name File state Memory data is read from file File Output file name File state Memory data is written to file Interrupt Interrupt type priority Interrupt processing For Action the condition specifying Stop is displayed on the Software Break tab and the condition specifying others is on the Software Event tab 266 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 15 2 Setting a Breakpoint Choose Add from the pop up menu in the Event window to open the Set Break dialog box which allows the user to set a break condition The Set Break dialog box has two pages Condition page for specifying break conditions and Action page for specifying the action when a break condition is satisfied In the Action page the pop up menu is selected on the Software Break and Software Event tabs for specifying Stop and others respectively Specifying Break Conditions Specify break conditions in the Condition page in the Set Break dialog box figure 4 65 Condition l Action Break type l PC Breakpoint z Address Hi 000 Count fi Figure 4 65 Set Break Dialog Box Condition Page This dialog box specifies break conditions Set a break type in the Break type box The following shows the conditions that can be specified in each type PC Bre
318. priority gt Numeric Interrupt priority optional default 0 0to 17 Examples BREAK_REGISTER RO FFFF W EQ A break occurs when the lower two bytes of the RO BR R10 324 register change to H FFFF A break occurs when the R10 register is written to High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 16 BREAK_SEQUENCE Abbreviation BS Description Sets sequential breakpoints Syntax bs lt address1 gt lt address2 gt lt address 3 gt lt Action gt Parameter Type Description lt address1 gt Numeric Addresses of sequential breakpoints Up to eight lt address8 gt addresses can be specified lt Action gt Keyword Action taken when the conditions are satisfied optional default Stop Stop P Halts the execution of the user program Input I Inputs saves data to a file Output O Outputs reads data from a file Interrupt T Initiates a pseudo interrupt Format The method of defining each Action are as follows Stop Input lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file from which data is input string lt addr gt Numeric Address to which the data is read lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF 325 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Output lt filename gt lt
319. projects and change access rights The administration user can change the workspace and project files and also the source files e Full read write access The workspace and project files can be modified as can the source files But it is not possible to change user access rights from this access level e Read write file access Only the source files can be modified All project settings can only be viewed not modified e Read only All source files and project files can only be viewed as read only Nothing can be modified When any user opens a network enabled project they must type in their user name and password Until this is done no access can be granted Once entered the user is given one of the levels of access as seen above gt To add a new user to the system 1 ati a Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 Click the access rights button The dialog displayed in Figure 10 4 is displayed Click the add button The log in dialog is displayed This allows you as the administration user to add a new log in name and password Normally the password should be set to some default text or left blank Then click OK Once OK is clicked the user is added with read only rights To change the access level select the user you wish to modify and th
320. ption lt address gt Numeric Address to edit lt mode gt Keyword Format optional default byte byte Edits in byte units word Edits in word units long Edits in longword units ascii Edits in ASCII codes single Edits in the single precision floating point format double Edits in the double precision floating point format lt state gt Keyword Verify flag optional default V V Verify N No verify Example ME H 1000 WORD Modifies memory contents in word units starting from H 1000 with verification 5 48 MEMORY FILL Abbreviation MF Description Modifies the contents in the specified memory area to the specified data value 346 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Syntax mf lt start gt lt end gt lt data gt lt mode gt lt state gt Parameter Type Description lt start gt Numeric Start address lt end gt Numeric End address lt data gt Numeric Data value lt mode gt Keyword Data size optional default byte byte Byte word Word long Longword single Single precision floating point double Double precision floating point lt state gt Keyword Verify flag optional default V V Verify N No verify Examples MEMORY _FILL H C000 H COFF H 55AA WORD MF F 5000 H 7FFF H 21 Modifies memory contents in the range from H C000 to H COFF to word data H 55AA Modifies memory contents in the range from H 5000 to H
321. r In most cases for example if an Elf Dwarf2 based project is moved from its original path the source file may not be automatically found In this case the HEW will open a source file browser dialog box to allow you to manually locate the file This path will then be used to update any other source files in this debug project 4 1 1 Viewing the Source Code Select your source file and click the Open button to make the HEW open the file in the integrated editor It is also possible to display your source files by double clicking on them in the Workspace window void main void Source code long a 10 min max Bookmark printf Data Input n PC Break mark for i 0 i lt 10 i jf j rand ifj lt D Ss ali j printf a d ld n i a i PC address arrow sort a printf Sorting results n for i 0 i lt 10 i pues b printf a d ld n i a i Figure 4 1 Editor Window The editor is divided into two areas the gutter area containing markers for breakpoints PC location etc and the text area containing color syntax highlighted code This is shown above in figure 4 1 4 1 2 Source Address Column After your program has been downloaded the Editor window displays the addresses for the current source file figure 4 2 The addresses are shown on the left hand side of the Editor window This is useful for deciding where to set
322. r H8S 2600 normal mode H8S 2000A Simulator H8S 2000 advanced mode H8S 2000N Simulator H8S 2000 normal mode The simulator debugger does not support the following H8S H8 300 series MCU functions Programs that use these functions must be debugged with the H8S H8 300 series emulator e Dual port RAM e Timer e Pulse width modular e Serial communication interface SCI e A D converter e I O ports e Interrupt controller 2 4 Memory Management Memory Map Specification A memory map is used to calculate the number of memory access cycles during simulation The following items can be specified e Memory type e Start and end addresses of the memory area e Number of memory access cycles e Memory data bus width For details refer to section 4 21 2 Modifying the Memory Map and Memory Resource Settings The user program can be executed in all areas except for the internal I O area Memory Resource Specification A memory resource must be specified to load and execute a user program The following items can be specified e Start address e End address e Access type The access type is readable writable read only or write only Since an error occurs if the user program attempts an illegal access for example trying to write to read only memory such an illegal access in the user program can be easily detected Unlike the other memory EEPROM is writable by the EEPMOV instruction even if its access type is read only Other ins
323. r any user to obtain a read only copy of any file gt To get a read only copy of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to get from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Get Files toolbar button amp or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Get Files menu option 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive This can only be done if another user does not already check out the file or files in question gt To check out a writable copy of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to check out from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Check Out Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check Out Files menu option 141 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 3 When the operation is finished the file has a red tick next to its name This means you as the current user of HEW has checked it out 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control
324. r compiler and linker when you generate an object file for debugging Even if your debug object file does not contain any debugging information for example the S record format you can still load it into the debugging platform but you will only be able to debug it in the assembly language level 3 2 Selecting a Debugging Platform Selecting the debugging platform is very dependent on the installation method of the HEW If the HEW has a toolchain installed the application project generator will be able to set up both the toolchain and the debugger targets simultaneously This allows the options for the targets and toolchain to be matched closely so no inconsistencies occur If there is no toolchain installed you will only be able to select debug only project types By default the HEW will display the debug only project generation type for each CPU family in the New Project Workspace dialog box 189 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual New Project Workspace Application Assembly Application Demonstration Tes Empty Application t5 Import Makefile Library H85 H87300 ja Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard M Figure 3 1 New Project Workspace Dialog Box The dialog box shown in figure 3 1 allows you to select a project generation type that matches your target CPU Application Project for generating an execution program that includes the initial routine file written in the C C language
325. r function is specified the Select Function dialog box opens In the dialog box select a function For details refer to section 4 10 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels Clicking the OK button stores the setting Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without setting the function to be evaluated Select a function that has been set and choose Edit Range from the pop up menu or press the Enter key to open the Performance Option dialog box and to change the function to be evaluated 4 16 3 Starting Performance Data Acquisition Choose Enable Analysis from the pop up menu a check mark is shown to the left of Enable analysis to start acquiring performance analysis data 4 16 4 Resetting Data Choose Reset Counts Times from the pop up menu to clear the current performance analysis data 4 16 5 Deleting a Target Function Select a function and choose Delete Range from the pop up menu to delete the selected target function and to recalculate the data for the other ranges The selected function can also be deleted by the Delete key 4 16 6 Deleting All Target Functions Choose Delete All Ranges from the pop up menu to delete all the current target functions and to clear the performance analysis data 4 17 Acquiring Code Coverage The Coverage window acquires code coverage information CO coverage and C1 coverage in the range specified by the user and displays the information 272 High performance Embedded Wor
326. racter of the previous line This enables you to type neat C C or assembler code faster as you don t have to type leading spaces or tabs yourself Figure 4 8 illustrates two examples The first i shows the effect of pressing return when the auto indentation feature is disabled the insertion cursor returns to the left hand side of the window on the next line When the line int z 20 is typed it is not aligned with the previous two lines The second example ii shows the effect of pressing return when auto indentation is enabled the insertion cursor drops underneath the i of the previous line Now when the line int z 20 is typed it is automatically aligned i e automatically indented void myfunction void int x 5 int y 10 Yee int z 20 void myfunction void int x 5 int y 10 YRI int z 20 i Auto Indentation Disabled ii Auto Indentation Enabled Figure 4 8 Effect of Auto Indentation gt To enable disable Auto Indentation 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Enable auto indentation check box accordingly 3 Click OK for the setting of the auto indentation check box to take effect 79 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 9 Splitting a Window The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to split a text window into two Fig
327. rame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating bar changes To float the menu bar or a toolbar 1 Double click on the control bar of a docked menu bar or toolbar or 2 Drag the control bar of a docked menu bar or toolbar and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar 1 2 4 The Workspace Window The Workspace window has three panes The Projects tab shows the current workspace projects and files figure 1 13 You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its corresponding icon Workspace Iof x G go emo Assembly source file A dbsctc Demo c intprg c lowsre c tesetprg c sbrk c vecttbl c ependencies fissile ueug p o Navigation Tab Templates Tab Project Tab Projects lt I Navigation Figure 1 13 Workspace Window Projects Tab The Navigation tab provides jumps to various textual constructs within your project s files What is actually displayed within the navigation tab depends upon what components are currently installed Figure 1 14 shows ANSI C functions See chapter 2 Build Basics for more information on the Workspace window The Templates tab displays template settings See 4 12 Templates for more information about a template
328. re 1 15 Workspace Window Docked and Floating When the Workspace window or the Output window is docked it has a control bar as shown in figure 1 15 If you want to move a docked window click and drag its control bar to the new location Close button S e_ Figure 1 16 Control Bar of Docking Window gt To dock the Workspace window or the Output window High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Allow Docking must be checked on the pop up menu of the window to dock the Workspace window or the Output window The pop up menu will be displayed when you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the window Then you have two ways to dock the window 1 Double click on the control bar of a floating window or 2 Drag the title bar of a floating window and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar or toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating window changes gt To float the Workspace window or the Output window Allow Docking must be checked on the pop up menu of the window to float the Workspace window or the Output window The pop up menu will be displayed when you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the window Then you have two ways to float the window 1 Double click on the control bar of a docking window or 2 Drag the control bar of
329. re 2 17 27 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Add Configuration a Figure 2 17 Add Configuration Dialog 3 Enter the new configuration name into the Configuration name field As you enter the new configuration name the directory underneath changes to reflect the configuration directory that will be used Select one of existing configurations from which you want to copy a configuration out of the drop down list of the Based on configuration field Click OK on both dialogs to create the new configuration gt To remove a configuration 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations to display the Build Configurations dialog figure 2 16 2 Select the configuration that you want to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Click OK to close the Build Configurations dialog 28 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 6 Building a Project The outline of the build process is shown in figure 2 1 2 6 1 Building a Project The build option only compiles or assembles those files that have changed since the last build Additionally it will rebuild source files if they depend upon a file that has changed since the last build For instance if the file test c include s the file header h and the latter has changed since the last build the file test c will be recompiled gt To perform a build Select
330. re carrying them out This means that if one machine is currently changing the toolchain options all of the other machines can only see read only versions of this data Note The performance of HEW does suffer when using the network facilities If working in a small team it might be more suitable to use the single user mode and version control 145 10 1 1 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Enabling network access gt To use network access 1 2 3 10 1 2 Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in figure 10 2 Click the enable network access checkbox This should add an administrator to the system without a password The administrator is the only user that can add additional users to the system and change user access rights The administrator has the highest level of access Before leaving the network dialog the administrator must set their password It is not possible to leave this dialog until this is completed This is described below Setting the administrator user s password gt To set the password 1 Bi TOY IV Be 146 Continue from the previous sections steps Click the password button This should have been enabled when the network data access was enabled The password dialog is displayed This is shown in figure 10 3 The user name is read only in the top field In this case it should be Admin Type the new
331. recor _malloc _setsbit md _power _mult64 lt lt nnnnnnnnn ng eee HO0005C6C H O0005C68 H 00005048 H O0005BC8 H O00054E8 H 00005 460 H 00005960 H 00005944 H 000057B4 H O000568C H 00005674 H 00005618 H OO00557C H 000054EC H 000053E4 H 00005268 H 00005200 H o0000008 H 00000004 H 00000020 H 00000080 H 000000E0 H o0000088 H 00000100 H 00000004 4 eo0000000 POIOCCCOOo HUUUUOU6 H 00000038 H 00000098 Ho00000F8 H 00000048 H o000005C H o0000000 H o0000090 H 00000108 H 00000170 H oo000068 p oooooooooog m m m m m m m boooooooooog o0o000000 boooooooooog Function Variable F V Address Size Times Oycle_ Ext mem 1O area Int mem E E E E m m pboooooooooo Clicking the column header sorts the items in an alphabetical or ascending order Double clicking the Figure 4 53 List Sheet Function Variable or Address column displays the source program corresponding to the address in the line Right clicking on the mouse within the window displays a pop up menu For details on this pop up menu refer to section 4 12 8 Tree Sheet 255 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 12 8 Tree Sheet This sheet displays the relation of function calls along with the profile data that are values when the function is called This sheet is available when Disable Tree Not traces function call is not selected from the pop up menu in the Profile window
332. reduce the overhead of function calls Stack Size When there is deep nesting of function calls pursue the route of the function calls and obtain the total stack size for all of the functions on that route to estimate the amount of stack being used Times Sorting by the number of calls or accesses makes it easy to identify the frequently called functions and frequently accessed global variables Profile Data e Times the number of function calls or global variable accesses e Cycle the number of execution cycles e Ext_mem the number of external memory accesses e I O_area the number of internal I O area accesses e Int_mem the number of internal memory accesses The number of execution cycles is calculated by subtracting the total execution cycles at a specific function call instruction execution from the total execution cycles at a return instruction execution of a specific function 4 12 11 Creating Profile Information Files To create a profile information file choose the Output Profile Information Files menu option from the pop up menu The Save Profile Information Files dialog box is displayed Pressing the Save button after selecting 258 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual a file name will write the profile information to the selected file Pressing the Save All button will write the profile information to all of the profile information files rofile Information Files Pro
333. remainder of this chapter discusses registration and how it affects you 5 2 HEW Registration Files HRF When a HEW compatible component i e toolchain system tool or utility phase is installed part of its installation will include a file with the extension HRF figure 5 2 i This file named a HEW Registration File describes the component to the HEW The process of registration refers to loading a component s HRF file into the tools administration dialog figure 5 2 ii i INSTALL ii REGISTER a CA a CA y MyTool y MyTool MYTOOL HRF MYTOOL HRF a S HH E me Figure 5 2 HRF File Location and Registration In order to use a component with HEW it must first be registered The Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 shows all currently registered components To access it ensure no workspaces are open and then select Tools gt Administration If you attempt to access tools administration when there is a workspace open the tools administration dialog is opened but cannot be modified When HEW is installed by default any new tools are automatically registered HEW stores tool information in a tool database file By default this is created in the HEW application directory however if you are working in a network environment this directory may be set to another location It is possible to change the tool directory location gt To chang
334. reo Buffer Size Specifies the buffer size of data Displayed in hexadecimal After the settings have been made in the Waveform Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Waveform View window Even after the Waveform View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the pop up menu 896 Figure 4 22 Waveform View Window Displays the memory contents as waveforms The X axis shows the number of sampling data and the Y axis shows the sampling value 228 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 4 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh gt Not Refresh in the pop up menu will not refresh the window Checking Auto Refresh gt Stop in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops Checking Auto Refresh gt Realtime in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated in an instruction interval specified with the Response command 4 4 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the pop up menu immediately updates the window contents 4 4 4 Zoom In Display Selecting Zoom In from the pop up menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis enlarged 4 4 5 Zoom Out Display Selecting Zoom Out from the pop up menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axi
335. ress is set other than the internal I O For details refer to section 4 21 1 Simulator System Dialog Box 2 8 Control Registers The H8S 2600 series support the SYSCR system control register as the control register mapped to the memory It enables multiplication accumulation operation user program simulation for EXR accessing and debugging The SYSCR address is set in SYSCR Address in the Simulator System dialog box For modifying or displaying the control register use the IO window For details refer to section 4 22 1 Modifying the Simulator System Settings or section 4 5 Viewing the I O Memory 179 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 9 Trace The simulator debugger writes the execution results of each instruction into the trace buffer The conditions for trace information acquisition can be specified in the Trace Acquisition dialog box Right clicking on the Trace window displays the pop up menu Choose Acquisition from the pop up menu to display the Trace Acquisition dialog box The acquired trace information is displayed in the Trace window The trace information can be searched The search conditions can be specified in the Trace Search dialog box Right clicking on the Trace window displays the pop up menu Choose Find from the pop up menu to display the Trace Search dialog box For details refer to section 4 14 Viewing the Trace Information 180 2 10 High perfor
336. rformance gt Profile to open the Profile window Choose Enable Profiler from the pop up menu of the Profile window The item on the menu will be checked 4 12 5 Specifying Measuring Mode You can specify whether to trace functions calls while profile data is acquired When function calls are traced the relations of function calls during user program execution are displayed as a tree diagram When not traced the relations of function calls cannot be displayed but the time for acquiring profile data can be reduced To stop tracing function calls choose Disable Tree Not traces function call from the pop up menu in the Profile window a check mark is shown to the left of the menu item When acquiring profile data of the program in which functions are called in a special way such as task switching in the OS stop tracing function calls 254 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 12 6 Executing the Program and Checking the Results After the user program has been executed and execution has been halted the results of measurement are displayed in the Profile window The Profile window has two sheets a List sheet and a Tree sheet 4 12 7 List Sheet This sheet lists functions and global variables and displays the profile data for each function and variable Profile _ BTBL _sbrk_size _ conexp 28 _ conmnts 29 _Sw12 _ table 25 ctype _nfiles _memset _rsft _powld _mult _add _ _mo
337. rformance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Error Messages The simulator debugger outputs error messages to notify users of the errors of user programs or operation Table 6 2 lists the error messages Table 6 2 Message Error Messages Contents Address Error One of the following states occurred e APC value was an odd number e Aninstruction was read from the internal I O area e Word data was accessed to an address other than address 2n e Longword data was accessed to an address other than address 2n Correct the user program to prevent the error from occurring Exception Error An error occurred during exception processing Correct the user program to prevent the error from occurring File Open Error An error occurred during opening a file with the break of file input output action Correct the file setting File Input Error An error occurred during reading a file with the break of file input output action Correct the file setting File Output Error An error occurred during writing to a file with the break of file input output action Correct the file setting Illegal Instruction Either of the following states occurred e Acode other than an instruction was executed e MOV B Rn SP or MOV B SP Rn was executed Correct the user program to prevent the error from occurring Illegal Operation Either of the following states occurred e The relationship between flags C and H o
338. rkspace windows pop up menu e Clicking the Launch Editor toolbar button gt To specify an external editor 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 6 11 Figure 6 11 Options Dialog Editor Tab 112 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Check the Use external editor check box The External Editor dialog will be displayed figure 6 12 External Editor 2 xi Command CAwinD OWS Notepad exe Browse OK Arguments to open file Cancel SFULLFILE gt Arguments to open file at line S FULLFILE gt Figure 6 12 External Editor Dialog 3 Enter the path of the executable without any arguments into the Command field 4 Enter the arguments required to open a file into the Arguments to open file field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened 5 Enter the arguments required to open a file at a specific line into the Arguments to open file at line field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened and the LINE placeholder to represent the line number at which the cursor should be initially positioned 6 Click OK to define the editor Note When using an external editor be aware of the following issues e Each time you invoke the external editor in whichever way a separate instance o
339. rogram when a condition is satisfied There is no item to be set File Input The data of a specified file is referred to and its contents are written to the specified memory when a condition has been satisfied Input file Data file to refer to When the simulator debugger has reached referring to the end of a file it will repeat referring to the beginning of the same file Address Memory address where data should be written to Data size Data size to be written to 1 2 4 8 Count Number of data to be written to when the prefix is omitted values must be input and are displayed in decimal H 1 to H FFFFFFFF 269 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual File Output The contents of a specified memory is written to the specified file when a condition has been satisfied Output file Data file to be written to Append When a existing file is specified for the Output File Address Memory address to read data to Data size Size of one data to refer to 1 2 4 8 Count Number of data to refer to when the prefix is omitted values must be input and are displayed in decimal H 1 to H FFFFFFFF Option Data match mismatch Interrupt Interrupts the program when a condition has been satisfied For details refer to section 2 16 Pseudo Interrupts Interrupt typel Specifies the interrupt vector number when the prefix is omitted values must be input and are displayed in hexadecimal
340. rol directory delimiter 8 5 Importing and exporting a Set up Each workspace can have a different version control set up The HEW allows you to store the version control settings independently so that you can import them into other workspaces This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to configure the same version control settings across several workspaces gt To export a version control set up 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Export button A standard file save dialog will be displayed Browse to the directory in which you would like to save the configuration 3 Enter the name of the file and then click OK 136 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual gt To import a version control set up 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Import button A standard file open dialog will be displayed Browse to the HVC file which you would like to import 3 Select the file and then click OK 137 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 138 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 9 Using Visual SourceSafe The High performance Embedded Workshop provides specific support for the Visual SourceSafe version control system At the time of writing the HEW can only attach to versions 5 and 6 of Visual SourceSafe Th
341. rs for storing parameters 2 default to 3 There are two registers by default 192 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Treat double as float Generates an object making the value of the double precision floating point type as the single precision floating point type Pass struct parameter via register Specifies whether or not the parameter of the structure is allocated to the register When checked the parameter is passed with the register When not checked the parameter is passed with the memory not with the register Pass 4 byte parameter return value via Specifies whether or not the 4 byte parameter register or the return value is allocated to the register When checked the parameter is passed with the register When not checked the parameter is passed with the memory not with the register Use try throw and catch of C Checking enables the C exception processing functions try catch and throw Enable disable runtime type information Enables or disables the type information at execution When checked dynamic_cast and typeid are available When not checked dynamic_cast and typeid are unavailable For details refer to the compiler manual To move to Step 3 click the Next gt button in Step 2 21x What kind of initialization routine would you like to create IV Use I O Library Number of I O Streams f a IV Use Heap Memory Heap Size F420 Generate main Function E
342. rticular project are displayed below the project icon 157 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual It is possible to disable scanning for certain navigation categories if you do not require the information gt To switch off a navigation category 1 Right click on the navigation window The pop up menu displayed in figure 13 2 is shown Select the Select Categories menu item The dialog in figure 13 3 is displayed 2 3 4 Uncheck any categories you are not interested in seeing definitions for 5 Click OK Go to Declaration Go to Definition Configure View Select Categories lv Allow Docking Hide Figure 13 2 C Navigation pop up menu Select Categories x Please select the categories to scan for VIC Defines VIC Functions Cancel v C Classes Figure 13 3 C Navigation select categories dialog Note The navigation items are displayed gradually as the files are scanned This means it may take some time if there are many files to fully complete the navigation view update Files are rescanned when they are saved This means that navigation information will not be available for new classes and functions until the file or files are saved 158 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 13 1 C Navigation component The C navigation component is the most complicated of the three supported navigatio
343. rtsestsistsrsrsrnrsrrsreressresestsest 212 3 4 4 Reloading Session Information 0 0 0 0 cece cece es cescseteeeecseeeesetseeeaeeeeseeaeees 212 3 4 5 Debugging Multiple Targets 0 cccceeseseeecceceeeeseeeeeeceeceeceaeeaeeaeeeeeeceeseaeeaeees 212 Section 4 Debugging te wivevessevrosesiveviesreyeadvorsysreyegayonsyetesvadgonesenddegasontatoveeasedeys 213 41 lt Viewing a Program 5 sccoscasectecnssvesecalsvecesgesvacecalsvetecgabuececassvesd ER A 213 4 1 1 Viewing the Source Code cceceescesesseeseeseeeeceseeseeseesecececeeeeaecaeeeeeeseaeeseeaeeaees 213 Ail 2 Source Address Coluiins sieys sess cessassuesetea saeecssesensseasacvessaraseevscnnsvasbaviaeanssaeevasiaze 213 4 1 3 D busger Columnists vesciessvsscissareessissveesuvtetastivi sages sisediueiesreleesisetassviseacerreieaishd 215 4 1 4 Viewing the Assembly Language Code ccecessseessceeeesceeesecneeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeees 215 4 1 5 Modifying the Assembly Language Code ececeseseeseeeseeceeseeseeeeeceeeeeeeneeaees 216 4 1 6 Viewing a Specific Address esseci sieniin A 216 4 1 7 Viewing the Current Program Counter Address cescssceeseeseeseeteeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 216 4 2 Operating Memory vies ssccssescsvscccssasessesavassvesiseve cosa vvasccedasanaatedesssceaavanasnadessvevanvanasneassansvarsene 217 4 2 1 Viewing a Memory Afedersin tnra EREET 217 4 2 2 Displaying Data in Different Formats cceceeseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeceeeeseeneeaees 218 4 2
344. s how to use any particular operating system or how best to tailor code for the individual devices These issues are left to the respective manuals Document Conventions This manual uses the following typographic conventions Table 1 Typographic Conventions Convention Meaning Menu gt Menu Option Bold text with gt is used to indicate menu options for example File gt Save As FILENAME C Uppercase names are used to indicate filenames enter this string Used to indicate text that must be entered excluding the quotes Key Key Used to indicate required key presses For example CTRL N means press the CTRL key and then whilst holding the CTRL key down press the N key 5 When this symbol is used it is always located in the left hand margin It indicates that the text to its immediate right is describing how to The how to symbol do something High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Contents Main applications scsccscci cies asta veactvssesiveuavasaveravesiyetauavenadisaesiaseveesentooneoanees 1 1 COV EL VIC Weiss scutes nd an seene reier aiae aisan aes aena iare a e o naiari nietas 3 11 Workspaces Projects and Files cccecessesssssesseeseeseeeeceeeeseeseeseeaececeeseceeeesecaeeseeneeeeenes 3 1 2 The Main Windows sists vedio stiestn estan tvdix anton O AEO EA OET at C2 Whe Pile Bat seo cs tes ea A Aera ka se duis ies AOA T
345. s 149 10 1 5 Using the network HEW Service cccecescssseeseesceseeseeneceeceeeeseeseeseseeeeeeeaeeeeeenee 149 11 Difference View cecesesscescesecesecsseeseceseesseeseesseeeseeseeseesseeeaeesees 151 12 Technical SUpport tet aat e ea 155 13 Navigation facilities ET 157 13 1 C Navigation COMPONENE 0 ee eeeeceeeseetecteeesceeceseesecseeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeneeneees 159 13 2 C Function and defines navigation COMpoONENES csseeeeeeeeeteeteteeeteeeeeeeeens 161 14 SMart Editors inden danduaenasnuneumaneededgen ened 163 Simulator DEDUSSET Parts s c ieecsacseovecerdecdetevbeotelecdeotecendsadetesbestedecdeonbebsPebovaasters 167 Section l OVELVISW a a aa R a R A a A AE R S E aE E A EERS Eok 169 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files osinon eaa 169 L2 Weainching the HEW exiseesdsee sctadsasevedceavecs ccacavcsvaesivctasacaveseceaiesdcsneavcdosenseuncedseneecseuevtestentees 169 13 Cr ating a New Workspace ois ccecissesecsiinencscsasesstaibvsocs E E R E RE 171 LA Opening a Workspace ceed essence ca sesiis i eats ented E E EEE 172 1 55 Savana Workspace pennn eE E EA A aE AEAN AE E a E a 172 1 6 Closing amp Workspace isitecsssiscsseascsesexssssasseascassasasesevseancossvaasassvaascscsavarcstaseasdsvsavassssascazesvesns 173 1 7 Using Old Workspaces ccssssesissaisesssaxavasavicestesseicesrassexsiessuaseataisenavensvaresnsvaaicavssuatessvuaeceaaeee 173 1 8 Exiting thie HEW iccccdsncvecessssveccesncensessvunecec
346. s for the address in the selected line e View Profile Chart Displays the Profile Chart window focused on the function in the specified line e Enable Profiler Toggles acquisition profile data When profile data acquisition is active a check mark is shown to the left of the menu text e Not trace the function call Stops tracing function calls while profile data is acquired This menu is used when acquiring profile data of the program in which functions are called in a special way such as task switching in the OS To display the relation of function calls in the Tree sheet of the Profile window acquire profile data without selecting this menu In addition do not select this menu when optimizing the program by the optimizing linkage editor using the acquired profile information file e Find Displays the Find Text dialog box to find a character string in the Function column Search is started by inputting a character string to be found in the edit box and clicking Find Next or pressing the Enter key e Find Data Displays the Find Data dialog box 256 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Find Data x Find Data Find Next Cancel C Minimum Figure 4 55 Find Data Dialog Box By selecting the column to be searched in the Column combo box and the search type in the Find Data group and entering Find Next button or Enter key search is started If the Find Next button or th
347. s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file In order to get all of the files in a project we need to use the following command GET VCDIR FILENAME When the HEW executes the command for a given project file it will replace VCDIR for the equivalent version control directory in the file mapping For example suppose FILE1 C is located at c work application project1 filel c If the get command is applied to FILE1 C then 1 x vc sw app project1 is substituted for VCDIR as this is the version control directory mapping for c work application project1 2 FILE1 C is substituted for FILENAME 131 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Project File C work application projectl filel c Arguments VCDIR FILENAME 1 2 Command X vc sw app project1 filel c Figure 8 10 Example of Substitution 8 3 2 Specifying Environment Select the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog to view the current settings figure 8 7 To add a new environment variable click the Add button beside the Environment list the dialog shown in Figure will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the Environment lis
348. s over more than one project If you select a combination which means the component is loaded in one project and not anther then the intermediate state icon is displayed 101 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 9 Custom Project Types The Project gt Create Project Type menu item in HEW allows you to create a template for your project This menu item takes the settings of the current project and then creates a project type for you The user can specify the name of the new type and style of the project generation wizard Once created these project types appear in the Tools Administration dialog and are initially hidden in the system components part of the tools administration tree To export one of the custom project generators select the Export button on the Tools Administration dialog The execution environments of the custom project generators are packaged on the execution file that can be installed When this file is executed on the target user s machine the custom project generator is installed 102 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 Customizing the Environment 6 1 Customizing the Toolbar The High performance Embedded Workshop provides 2 standard toolbars as detailed in chapter 1 Overview In addition to these you may also construct your own toolbars via the Customize dialog figure 6 1 Customize ME ditor Figure 6 1 Customize Dialog
349. s reduced 4 4 6 Resetting the Zoom Display Selecting Reset Zoom from the pop up menu displays the waveforms in its original size 4 4 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification In the Zoom Magnification submenu of the pop up menu the zoom magnification can be selected from 2 4 or 8 4 4 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale In the XScale submenu of the pop up menu the size of the X axis can be selected from 128 256 or 512 pixels 4 4 9 Non Display of Cursor Selecting Clear Cursor from the pop up menu hides the cursor display 4 4 10 Displaying the Sampling Information Selecting Sample Information from the pop up menu displays the Sample Information dialog box 229 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Sample Information Data Size et Channel Stereo a y AFFFFSS8o HFFFFO99 Value Figure 4 23 Sample Information Dialog Box Displays the sampling information of the cursor location in the Waveform View window The following information is displayed Data Size Displays 8bit or 16bit Channel Displays the data channel Value X Displays the X axis of cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of cursor location displays Y axes for both the upper and lower plots when Stereo is selected 4 5 Viewing the I O Register As well as a CPU and ROM RAM a microcomputer also contains on chip peripheral modules The exact number and type of peripheral
350. ser defined toolbar from the Toolbars list and the Reset button in figure 6 1 changes to the Delete button Then click the Delete button To reset a standard toolbar back to its original state 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Select the standard toolbar from the Toolbars list and then click the Reset button To show or hide toolbar tooltips 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Set the Show Tooltips check box as desired To modify the toolbar name of a toolbar created by a user 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 In the Toolbars list select a toolbar which has been created by a user and whose name you want to modify 3 Modify the name of the toolbar in the Toolbar name filed 105 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 2 Customizing the Tools Menu The Tools menu can be customized to include your own menu options gt To add a new menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 The first thing for you to decide is whether you are adding a global application wide tool Application wide tools which will be available to all of your workspaces Or whether you wish to add a workspace wide tool Wor
351. set or clear a software breakpoints at the start of the function 232 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 6 2 Adding a Label Choose Add from the pop up menu and open the Add Label dialog box to add a label Add Label RAE COO O Address fHooo00000 7 eA Figure 4 26 Add Label Dialog Box Enter the new label name into the Name field and the corresponding value into the Address field and press OK The Add Label dialog box closes and the label list is updated to show the new label When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 4 10 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 4 6 3 Editing a Label Choose Edit from the pop up menu and open the Edit Label dialog box to edit a label Edit Label _main MEI Address fH 00000101 2 7 ei Figure 4 27 Edit Label Dialog Box Edit the label name and value as required and then press OK to save the modified version in the label list The list display is updated to show the new label details When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 4 10 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 233 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 6 4 Deleting a Label To delete a label se
352. sevssvsszeasievasevavasevessaseasevavatavesiseveastassnavcviene 62 Generating a Makefile iii fcctsvceccecssvecconnesstessovescivonenacduavve causuvedacenavsdcstaveumlesses EIK Mette etex 63 Use the Edit tyso he tv he tree dine tae a avd divend adie te ausenione 65 The Editor Window asese ieee a AA Ea A R E E AAN 65 Working with Multiple Files scc ccscsissssscsscstescsassvessscesacssssssvcdessazesnsensasavensazconsenacnscanessconaade 66 AD TheEditot Toolbars arinrin nan aE R NE ER 66 422 Editor Toolbar Buttons ieisscseceswesccssseuessesvosscusercusccosetusencsveuesssuveunstsavecnsscivdaneooreeas 66 4 2 3 Search Toolbar Buttons s 252 a scestesn oes edinesiss oe ia 68 4 2 4 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons 0 ec cecececeeeeeseeecsceecseseeeecseeecsetseeeaseesseeaeees 68 4 2 5 Templates Toolbar Buttons cccceccescsseeseeseeeeeeseeseeseeeceeeeeceseeaeeaeceeseeeeaeeaeeaeees 68 Standard File Operations c isccsccssisisesssscesssastsivessstsiasessessectasssvnsssaessessatsivacssavasecsatctedeasses 69 43 1 Creating a New Pile ssccsscscsassscsssszasesssasivevasezsacassasasevacconcsndsvcassvetsasesndenaenceatesaceraee 69 ABD SAVIN g a Biles sss eini e AEEA EREE REENT TAONE 69 43 3 Saving al Fils E E 70 43 4 Openitig a File ienei niii se re EE E V 70 435 COSINE PUES oreore a EAEE R EEA E EAE EAE 71 Editing a File Searching and Navigating through Files 0 cccsescescesseeseeseeseceeceeceeceseeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeaees 73 ASL Bindings
353. shown in figure 4 18 Image Properties samping E somat F H o0000000 Figure 4 18 Image Properties Dialog Box The Image Properties dialog box is used to specify the display method of the Image View window The following items are to be specified Color Information Specifies the color information of the image to be displayed Mode Specifies the format MONOCHROME Displays in black and white RGB Displayed in R red G green and B blue 224 Bit Pixel Sampling Format Buffer Information Data Address Palette Address High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual BGR Displayed in B blue G green and R red YCbCr Displayed by Y brightness Cb color difference in blue and Cr color difference in red Specifies Bit Pixel according to the selected Mode Valid when RGB or BGR is selected Specifies the format of sampling Valid when YCbCr is selected Specifies Chunky planar Valid when YCbCr is selected Specifies the area to store data size and the address of the palette Specifies the start address of the memory where image data is to be displayed Displayed in hexadecimal Specifies the start address of the memory of color palette data Displayed in hexadecimal Valid when 8Bit is selected for RGB or BGR Width Height Size Specifies the width and height of the image View Information View Mode Start Position Positio
354. sition after template has been inserted 7 Enter the 4 character to specify where the insertion cursor is to be placed after the template has been inserted If this is not specified then the insertion cursor will be placed after the last character in the template as in a normal paste operation 84 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual User Input When defining a template it is possible to define a user input field Using the following placeholder specifies this USERINPUT lt n gt lt some text gt The n is a number which identifies the user input identifier These placeholders can be added manually but the user input button on the define templates dialog adds these placeholders in an automated manner When the template is inserted into a file a dialog is displayed which allows you to enter some custom text for each of these fields This text is then inserted instead of the placeholder You can define ten of these user input fields Define Template Shortcuts alt 1 Figure 4 14 Define Template Dialog A new addition to the HEW 3 0 is the templates view This is shown in figure 4 15 This view is located with the workspace and navigation windows 85 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Workspace E Templates AF ToolChain Templates Project Templates Figure 4 15 Templates view Any new templates which have been added to the HEW are displ
355. source file 7 IV VO Register Definition Files Generate Hardware Setup Function None fz Finish Cancel Figure 3 4 Generation File Setting Display Step 3 3 Specify the generation file in Step 3 Use I O Library Checking enables use of standard I O libraries Number of I O Specifies the number of I O streams that streams can be used simultaneously Use Heap Memory Checking enables use of the heap area management function sbrk Heap Size Specifies the unit of the size of the heap area to be managed 193 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Generate main Function Selects generation of a model main function Generates a main function file Project name c cpp I O Register Definition Files Checking generates an I O register definition file iodefine h written in the C language Generate Hardware Selects generation of a model I O Setup Function register initial setting program Generates a hardware setting file hwsetup c cpp or hwsetup src Note To include a main function that has already been made select None in Generate main Function and after making the project add the file containing the main function to the project Note that if the name of the function to be included is different the function calling section in resetprg c must be modified Be sure to refer to the hardware manual of the CPU for actual values of the sample file contents such as the vector
356. ss gt Numeric The address of a breakpoint lt count gt Numeric The number of times the instruction at the specified address is to be fetched 1 to 16383 default 1 lt Action gt Keyword Action taken when the conditions are satisfied optional default Stop Stop P Halts the execution of the user program Input I Inputs saves data to a file Output O Outputs reads data from a file Interrupt T Initiates a pseudo interrupt Format The method of defining each Action are as follows Stop Input lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file from which data is input string lt addr gt Numeric Address to which the data is read lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF 314 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Output lt filename gt lt addr gt lt size gt lt count gt lt option gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character The name of the file to which data is saved string lt addr gt Numeric Address from which data is output lt size gt Numeric Size per data packet 1 2 4 8 lt count gt Numeric Number of data packets H 01 to H FFFFFFFF lt option gt Keyword Specifies a new file or appends to an existing file optional makes a new file when abbreviated A Adds the data to
357. ss range H 00000800 H00000850 No No To All Yes To All Figure 4 78 Save Coverage Data Dialog Box When multiple Coverage windows are open a Save Coverage Data dialog box will appear for each open coverage window Clicking the No To All button closes the dialog box without saving any coverage data Clicking the Yes To All button saves the data of all Coverage windows in a single file Note Ifthe file is specified for the coverage range not all Coverage windows can be saved in a single file 4 17 13 Displaying the Coverage Information in the Editor Window The coverage information is reflected to the Editor window by highlighting the debugger columns corresponding to the source lines of executed instructions When the coverage settings are modified in the Coverage window the debugger column display will be updated a Tutorial c 0x0000136c Pa main void long a 10 min max long j int i 0x00001392 printf HHH Data Input n 0x0000139c for i 0 i lt 10 i Ox000013a4 j randQ Ox000013ac ifGi lt Of 0x000013b0 jr rds 0x000013b2 ali j Dx000013c0 printf al d ld n i aLi 0x000013e6 sort a x 14 Figure 4 79 Debugger Column Coverage 280 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 18 Viewing the Current Status Choose View gt CPU gt Status or click the View Status toolbar button to open the Status window and see the current s
358. status 1 Click on the Tools gt Options menu item 2 Select the Editor tab of the tools options dialog 3 The dialog in figure 14 1 is displayed The Enable Smart edit for C files should be checked 4 Click OK options ZT Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Tab size 4 r Spacing IV Enable auto indentation r General IV Save files before executing any tools IV Show files in notebook I Prompt before saving files IV Enable syntax coloring IV Enable Smart edit for C files r External editor I Use extemal editor Figure 14 1 Navigation view With this option switched on if you are working on a C file the smart edit capability should be enabled Note Ifthe C Class navigation category has been switched off the Smart edit capability of HEW will not be active During normal usage the following editor operations will make the smart edit facilities visible gt Ifyou are using an object and are trying to access the members using the or gt If you do this a pop up will be displayed which may help you select the correct member more efficiently than typing Whilst typing the pop up will keep track of the keys you have pressed to help your selection If you press return then the currently selected member will be added This pop up is also used when using the method and it is displayed in figure 14 2 163 High performance Em
359. symbol table to MY_CODE SYM 360 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 75 SYMBOL_VIEW Abbreviation SV Description Displays all defined symbols or those containing the case sensitive string pattern Syntax sv lt pattern gt Parameter Type Description none Displays all symbols lt pattern gt Character Character string that should be contained in the symbols to string be displayed Examples SYMBOL_VIEW BUFFER Displays all symbols containing the word BUFFER SV Displays all the symbols 5 76 TCL Abbreviation None Description Enables or disables the TCL Syntax tcl lt state gt Parameter Type Description None Displays the TCL information lt state gt Keyword Enables or disables the TCL enable Enables the TCL disable Disables the TCL Examples TCL Displays the TCL information TCL enable Enables the TCL TCLd Disables the TCL 361 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 77 TRACE Abbreviation TR Description Displays the trace buffer contents The record in the buffer that was executed first is 0 older records have positive offset values Syntax tr lt start rec gt lt count gt lt clear gt Parameter Type Description lt start rec gt Numeric Record to start display optional default most recent record 9 lt count gt Numeric Number of records to be displayed optional default 10 lt clear gt Ke
360. t Environment Yariable 27x Variable Cancel Value Cancel Placeholder popup menu Figure 8 11 Environment Variable Dialog To modify an environment variable select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment list and then click the Modify button beside it Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable back to the list To remove an environment variable select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment list and then click the Remove button beside it 132 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 3 3 Specifying Comments If a command contains the placeholder COMMENT then the HEW will request that you enter the comment when the command is executed via the dialog as shown in figure 8 12 Please Enter Comment Figure 8 12 Please Enter Comment Dialog You may specify a comment for each file or if you would like to specify the same comment for all files check the Apply comment to all files check box before clicking OK 133 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 8 3 4 Specifying a User Name and Password Most version control tools will require you to pass a user name and password on the command line in order to keep files secure and to keep a record of which files were changed by which users The custom version
361. t all of its child projects are built first However workspaces on their own are not very useful first you need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before you can actually do anything 1 2 Launching the HEW To initiate the HEW open the Start menu of Windows select Programs select Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop and then select the shortcut of the HEW The Welcome dialog box shown in figure 1 2 will be displayed by default 169 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Welcome Figure 1 2 Welcome Dialog Box To create a new workspace select the Create a new project workspace button and click the OK button To open one of the recent project workspaces select the Open a recent project workspace button select a workspace from the drop down list and click the OK button The Recent project workspace list displays the same content as that seen in the workspace most recently used file list This list also appears on the file menu To open a workspace by specifying a workspace file HWS file select the Browse to another project workspace button and click the OK button To register or unregister a tool from the HEW click the Administration button Click the Cancel button to use the HEW without opening a workspace 170 1 3 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Creating a New Workspace gt To create a new workspace
362. t up option This allows you to specify the margins top bottom left and right of your printouts It is often necessary to set this because some printers cannot print to the edges of an A4 page Furthermore some users have their own layout requirements e g a large left hand margin so that code can be placed in an A4 binder gt To set up the page margins 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Enter into the edit fields the margins required set the inch or mm radio buttons to set the measurements 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect rage setup ete Margins Left m Bight fo Top fo Bottom p Inh mm Header gt Footer w V Wrap Text Cancel Figure 4 6 Page Setup Dialog gt To set up the page header and footers 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Enter into the header and footer edit fields the text required to be displayed All normal placeholders are available along with page numbering text justification and date fields These are all expanded before the page is to be printed 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect gt To set up print wrapping 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 77 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2
363. table definition and I O register definition which are generated by the project generator To move to Step 4 click the Next gt button in Step 3 Library runtime runtime routines new Performs memory allocation and lt ctype h Handles and checks characte C mathh Performs numerical calculatio _ mathfh Performs numerical calculati stdarg h Supports access to variable Mlstdio h Performs input output handlin istdlib h Performs program standarc string h Performs string comparison jios EC Performs input output pro complex EG Performs complex nu gt gt Enable all Disable all Finish Cancel Figure 3 5 Standard Library Setting Display Step 4 4 Specify the configuration of the standard libraries used by the C C compiler in Step 4 The functions defined in the checked items and the runtime function are included Enable all Selects all standard library functions Disable all Does not select all standard library functions Note that only the minimum required functions runtime and new are selected To move to Step 5 click the Next gt button in Step 4 194 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual What are the stack settings Stack Pointer Address power on reset JHFFEFCO Stack Size H200 Finish Cancel Figure 3 6 Stack Area
364. tant to make sure that this location contains the address of your startup code 239 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 8 2 Continuing Run When your program is stopped the HEW will display an yellow arrow mark in the gutter of the line in the editor and Disassembly windows that correspond to the CPU s current program counter PC address value This will be the next instruction to be executed if you perform a step or continue running To continue running from the current PC address click the Go toolbar button len or choose Debug gt Go To continue running from a specified address which is not the stop address change the PC value in one of the following ways and click the Go toolbar button or choose Debug gt Go e Change the PC value in the Register window Refer to section 4 7 5 Modifying Register Contents e Place the text cursor not the mouse cursor to a target line in the Source or Disassembly window and choose Set PC Here from the pop up menu 4 8 3 Running to the Cursor Sometimes as you are going through your application you may want to run only a small section of code that would require many single steps to execute You can do this using the Go To Cursor feature gt How to use the Go To Cursor 1 Make sure that a Source or Disassembly window is open showing the address at which you wish to stop 2 Position the text cursor on the address at which you
365. tatus of the debugging platform Memory Mode None Target Device Configuration O0000000 O7FFFFFF Z0000000 Z7FFFFFF EXT 40000000 47FFFFFF EXT Coooo000 COOOOFFF EXT FFFFSOO0 FFFFBFFF RAM FFFFFEOQO FFFFFFFF I 0 System Memory Resources o0000000 00007FFF Read Write O6000000 O6000FFF Read Write O VFFFOOO O7FFFFFF Read Write FFFFFEOQO FFFFFFFF Read Write Program Name Memory Loaded Area ug_SH Z demo_shZ abs H oooo0000 H o0000017 H 00000800 H 0000084F H 00001000 H 0000SBES Figure 4 80 Status Window The Status window is split into three sheets e Memory sheet Contains information about the current memory status including the memory mapping resources and the areas used by the currently loaded object file e Platform sheet Contains information about the current status of the debugging platform typically including CPU type and mode and run status e Events sheet Contains information about the current event breakpoint status including resource information 4 19 Debugging with the Command Line Interface Use the Command Line window to enter text based commands instead of window menus and commands 4 19 1 Opening the Command Line Window Choose View gt Command Line or click the Command Line toolbar button to open the Command Line window 281 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Command Line no batch file no log file EG gt Figure 4 81 Command Line Wi
366. tes whether the variable is updated in real time When an R mark is black the value of the corresponding variable will be automatically updated in an instruction interval specified with the Response command during user program execution A pop up menu containing the following options is available in the Watch window e Auto Update Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time e Auto Update All Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates all variables in real time e Delete Auto Update Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels realtime update e Delete Auto Update All Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels realtime update Modifying the Radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the pop up menu Saving the Watch Window Contents in a File To save the contents of the Watch window choose Save As from the pop up menu the Save As dialog box opens It allows the user to specify the name of a file and to save the contents of the Watch window in the file If the Append check box is selected the window contents are appended to the existing file and if it is not selected the existing file is overwritten Opening a Memory Window The contents of the memory area to which the selected variable is assigned can be displayed in the Memory window Choose Go To Memory from the pop up menu the Set Address dialog box opens
367. th a file group 1 Select the file group to be associated from the File Extensions dialog figure 2 11 2 Click the Open with button The Modify File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 12 Modify File Extension So None ea Windows default Techy REG vE Figure 2 12 Modify File Extension Dialog 3 Select None to remove any association select Editor to open this type of file in the internal external editor or select Other if you want to open this type of file with a specific application If you select Other then you can select from any previously defined application from the drop down list or specify a new application 4 Click Add to define a new application The Add Application dialog will be displayed figure 2 13 Add Application Figure 2 13 Add Application Dialog 5 Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the full path to the tool in the Command field do not include any parameters Enter the parameters that are required to open a file in the Parameters field Be sure to use the FULLFILE placeholder to specify the location file see appendix C Placeholders for more information on placeholders and their uses Enter the initial directory in which you would like the application to run into the Initial directory field Click OK to create the application
368. the Command line window because the current directory can be moved However care must be taken to enter the correct full path to a file when it is entered from the keyboard To save this trouble a full path can be easily specified by browsing through files Choose Browse from the pop up menu to open the Browse dialog box Select a file and click Open to paste the full path to the selected file to the cursor location This option can only be used when the cursor is located on the last line 4 19 8 Pasting a Placeholder Select a placeholder from the Placeholder submenu in the pop up menu to paste the selected placeholder to the cursor location This function is only available when the cursor is located on the last line 283 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 20 Generating a Pseudo Interrupt Manually Choose View gt CPU gt Trigger or click the Trigger toolbar button to open the Trigger window which allows the user to generate a pseudo interrupt manually by pressing a button on the window Figure 4 84 Trigger Window This window displays trigger buttons that generate pseudo interrupts manually The details of the interrupt to be generated by pressing each trigger button can be specified in the Trigger Setting dialog box Up to 256 trigger buttons can be used For details on the interrupt processing in the simulator debugger refer to section 2 16 Pseudo Interrupts 284 High performa
369. the original project path The older version of the HEW could only relocate the projects which were in a subdirectory of the workspace directory This is still the standard behavior for the High performance Embedded Workshop gt To change a projects relative path flag 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click and then select properties 3 Click the Project relative file path checkbox to switch on or off the relative file path feature figure 2 25 4 Click OK Properties BEI PPeno nese Figure 2 25 Properties Dialog 38 2 15 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual User folders in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop it is possible to add folders to your workspace window This allows you to logically group your files into certain areas within a project The folder can be set to any name and this is entered in a dialog gt To add a user folder 1 2 3 4 Select the project in the workspace window Right click and then add folder Enter the name and click OK You can now drag and drop files into this folder to group them logically 2 To remove a user folder 1 2 Select the project in the workspace window Right click and then select Remove folder Note that the folder must be empty and that the delete key can also be used instead of the pop up gt To modify a user folder name 1 on 3 4 Select the project in th
370. the current project Examples Build_all Starts a standard build all process on the current project 5 19 CACHE Abbreviation None Description Sets caching on or off or displays the current caching state 327 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Syntax CACHE lt state gt Parameter Type Description None Displays the current caching state lt state gt Keyword Sets caching on or off On Sets caching on Off Sets caching off Example CACHE Displays the current caching state CACHE on Turns on caching 5 20 CHANGE_CONFIGURATION Abbreviation CC Description Sets the current configuration Syntax cc lt config name gt Description Parameter Type lt config name gt Character string Configuration name Example CC Debug 5 21 CHANGE PROJECT Abbreviation CP Description Sets the current project Syntax cp lt project name gt Sets the current configuration to Debug Description Parameter Type lt project name gt Character string Project name 328 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Example CP PROJ2 Sets the current project to PROJ2 5 22 COVERAGE Abbreviation CV Description Enables or disables the coverage range measurement or resets coverage information Syntax cv lt state gt Parameter Type Description none Displays coverage state lt state gt enable Enables coverage measureme
371. the dialog in 11 3 This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog 6 Click compare 7 The difference view is displayed as shown in figure 11 1 Compare files Cancel xX Reference file K SHEW20 HEW 3 0 EXE Win Release Browse Compare with file on drive Advanced fel Target file z Browse Figure 11 2 Difference compare files dialog Compare Files Advanced Options x Advanced Cancel Figure 11 3 Difference advanced options dialog The difference view functionality can be accessed in two different ways The difference view has its own toolbar this is shown in figure 11 4 This functionality can also be accessed via the difference window right mouse button pop up This is shown in figure 11 5 Ignore white space Compare files Find next Find previous Find previous difference Find next difference HM de ATS Figure 11 4 Difference toolbar 152 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Pi Compare Export results to file 64 Ignore whitespace a Find Pa Find previous ry Find next F Previous difference Next difference Refresh comparison Figure 11 5 Difference popup menu The functionality for each menu item is described below e Compare This opens a new compare window so that s
372. the existing file Interrupt lt interrupt typel gt lt priority gt Parameter Type Description lt interrupt type1 gt Numeric Type of interrupt Interrupt vector number 0 to FF lt priority gt Numeric Interrupt priority optional default 0 Oto 17 Examples BREAKPOINT 0 2 A break occurs when an attempt is made to execute the instruction at address H O for the second time BP CO Input in dat Eight two byte data fields are written from file in dat to H 100 when 100 2 8 an attempt is made to execute the instruction at address H CO 5 9 BREAK_ACCESS Abbreviation BA Description Specifies a memory range as a break condition 315 Syntax High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual ba lt start address gt lt end address gt lt mode gt lt Action gt Parameter Type Description lt start address gt Numeric The start address of a breakpoint lt end address gt Numeric The end address of a breakpoint optional default lt start address gt lt mode gt Keyword Access type optional default RW R A break occurs when the specified range is read WwW A break occurs when the specified range is written to RW A break occurs when the specified range is read or written to lt Action gt Keyword Action taken when the conditions are satisfied optional default Stop Stop P Halts the execution of the user program Input I Inputs saves data to
373. the user program is enabled Enable or disabled Disable Simulator I O addr Address for above system call Bus mode Currently cannot be used by the simulator debugger To move to Step 9 click the Next gt button in Step 8 198 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The following source files will be generated Descripti dbsct Setting of B R Section lowly Program of Low level lowsre Program of I O Stream sbrk Program of sbrk iodefine Definition of I O Register intpre Interrupt Program resetpre Reset Program Main Program Header file of I O Stream f Header file of sbrk file Setting of Stack area TFITFTAQOTFTNAOQO Next gt Finish Cancel Figure 3 10 Generation File Name Modification Display Step 9 9 The files to be generated by the HEW based on the settings made so far is displayed as a list in Step 9 File Name File name To change a file name after selecting the file name by clicking on it enter the new file name Extension File extension Description Description of the file Clicking the Finish button in Step 9 displays the Summary dialog box 199 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Project Summary sesso PROJECT GENERATOR Demo_H8526004 PROJECT DIRECTORY C Hew Demo_H8S26004 Dem c CPU SERIES 2600 CPU TYPE 2612 TOOLCHAIN NAME Hitachi H8 H8 300 Standard Tc TOOLCHAIN VERSION 6 0 0 0 GENERATION FILES C
374. then click the Insert button Placeholder Configuration directory 7 Insert Figure C 3 Placeholder Drop down List In the fourth example type the placeholder into the field directly Ensure that you type the placeholder name in uppercase and that it is preceded by and followed by i e This is correct FILEDIR These are incorrect Filedir FILEDIR_ FILEDIR 374 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual C3 Available Placeholders Table C 1 lists the placeholders and their meanings Table C 1 Placeholders Placeholder FULLFILE Meaning Filename including full path FILEDIR File directory FILENAME Filename excluding path including extension FILELEAF Filename excluding path and extension EXTENSION File extension WORKSPDIR Workspace directory WORKSPNAME Workspace name PROUJDIR Project directory PROJECTNAME Project name CONFIGDIR Configuration directory CONFIGNAME Configuration name HEWDIR HEW installation directory TCINSTALL Toolchain install directory on option dialog TOOLDIR Tool installation directory Tools Administration TEMPDIR Temp directory WINDIR Windows directory WINSYSDIR Windows system directory EXEDIR Command directory USERNAME User login Version control PASSWORD User password
375. then selects the default behavior for this file extension as defined in Windows Explorer 6 Click OK to add the extension to the File Extensions list 20 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Add File Extension E te Absolute file ha Windows default x Madiiw REMOVE Figure 2 9 Add File Extension Dialog New Group If you want to create a new extension because your project uses a different extension from those accepted by the HEW For example a phase might by default use the extension asm but the HEW only recognizes src Then you need to create a new extension and add it to an existing file group This process is described below To create a new file extension in an existing file group 1 Select Project gt File Extensions from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed figure 2 7 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 10 3 Enter the extension which you want to define into the File extension field It is not necessary to type the period character The drop list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to an existing group option and select which group you would like to add this new extension 5 Click
376. ting a Configurations s ss ccccsscascsessietscaseesesasansenssasascevenssaensassescversuesensasaine 27 2 5 2 Adding and Deleting Configurations nT 26 Building Projecten ior ii ahaa ss odessa Tosa cca EA cca dee Tata eeu AEOS 29 2 61 Building a Project ree OREORE E 29 2 6 2 Building Individwal Files c cccccassceccstsssesscssececesaveccsheswscdcdsevanedsesnsedadevenesaveneete 29 2 6 3 Stopping a Buldi soreer r aE EE E ER A ETA E 30 2 6 4 Building Multiple Projects cc cececeeseeseeseeseceeceeeeseeseeececeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 30 2 6 The Output Window srren nina nni AE a EE TEETE e 30 2 6 6 Controlling the Content of the Output Window eceseeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeee 31 2 7 JFile Dependencies isiende te iea Aao a EV EEEE EREE EA 32 2 8 Configuring the Workspace Window 132 2 8 1 Show Dependencies under Each File 32 2 8 2 Show Standard Library Includes 33 258 3 SHOW File 1i EROE sos vos gas dove spsstenv sas vvansvesaeueaissrennsives oaeaevavestadeasouensetes 34 2 97 Setting the Current Projects di iesst sieni ahere te E ERE AEE A ai 34 2 10 Inserting a Project into a Workspace sseceeeeseeseeseesecseceseeseeseesecneceeceseeseeaeeaeeeeeeeseaeeaes 35 2 11 Specifying Dependencies between Projects s s ssessssssesieseetsesrestsestsestsresrsrrsrsreresresrsrset 36 2 12 Removing a Project from a Workspace ccceceeseeseeseeeeceeeeseeseeseesecaeeeeesesseeaeeaeeeseeaeeaeente 37 2 13
377. ting mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Select the mapping to be modified from the Version control directory mappings list and then click the Modify button The dialog shown in figure 8 8 will be displayed 3 Make the necessary changes to the two directories and then click OK to confirm the edits gt To remove an existing mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Select the mapping to be removed from the Version control directory mappings list and then click the Remove button Once the mappings have been defined you can use the Version control directory placeholder VCDIR to represent the directory in which the project file is stored Consider the scenario shown in figure 8 9 Here are three directories which are mapped from a shared version control drive X to a local drive where the development is being done C LOCAL C Mapped To NETWORK X m C work application project1 cd C work application src cd C work shared E X ve sw app project1 gt X ve sw app sre X ve sw shared Figure 8 9 Example Mappings Now let
378. tion Note 1 The functions can be sorted by their names percentage status either in ascending or descending order by clicking the Column tab Functions or Statistic or Status 2 By selecting the popup menu item Enable All all the functions can be set enable or disable 3 By selecting the popup menu item Clear All the coverage data of all the functions can be cleared e Right side This window displays the coverage information of the function in C C and assembly language level You can select a function by clicking the function name in left side of the window The following items are displayed Times Number of times instruction was executed Pass Execution status of conditional branch instructions T A branch occurred because the condition was satisfied F No branch has occurred because the condition was not satisfied Address Instruction Address Assembler Disassembled display 275 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Source C C or assembly language source When the Coverage window is closed the acquired coverage information and the conditions to acquire information will be cleared 4 17 2 Acquiring Coverage Information Select Enable Coverage from the pop up menu and execute the user program to acquire coverage information 4 17 3 Viewing the Source Window Choose View Source from the pop up menu to open the Editor window a
379. tion and displaying the error message Table 2 5 lists the states of the program counter PC at simulation error stop The condition code register CCR value does not change at simulation error stop 184 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Table 2 5 Register States at Simulation Error Stop Error Message PC Value Address Error e When an instruction is read Memory Access Error The start address of the instruction that caused the error e When an instruction is executed The instruction address following the instruction that caused the error Illegal Instruction The start address of the instruction that caused the error Illegal Operation The instruction address following the instruction that caused the error Use the following procedure when debugging programs that include instructions that generate simulation errors 1 First execute the program in the stop mode and confirm that there are no errors except those in the intended locations 2 After confirming the above execute the program in the continuation mode Note If an error occurs in the stop mode and simulation is continued after changing the simulator mode to the continuation mode simulation may not be performed correctly When restarting a simulation always restore the register contents and the memory contents to the state prior to the occurrence of the error Break Due to a Trace Buffer Overflow After the Break mode is specified with Tra
380. tion file sni extension output from the optimizing linkage editor does not exist in the directory where the load module is located only the executed functions are displayed even if this check box is not checked 5 Include Data of Child Functions Sets whether or not to display information for a child function called in the function as profile data e Properties This menu cannot be used in this simulator debugger 4 12 9 Profile Chart Window The Profile Chart window displays the relation of calls for a specific function This window displays the specified function in the middle with the callers of the function on the left and the callees of the function on the 257 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual right The numbers of times the function calls the called functions or is called by the calling functions are also displayed in this window Profile Chart _main _PowerN_Reset_ main Figure 4 56 Profile Chart Window 4 12 10 Types and Purposes of Displayed Data The profile function is able to acquire the following information Address You can see the locations in memory to which the functions are allocated Sorting the list of functions and global variables in order of their addresses allows the user to view the way the items are allocated in the memory space Size Sorting in order of size makes it easy to find small functions that are frequently called Setting such functions as inline may
381. tity High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Z RRA ALAA AHHH JEJE E JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE AAA JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE EAR JE JE JE JE JE JE JE ME JE E E E E FILE isbrk c 7 DATE Mon Jun 23 2003 DESCRIPTION Program of sbrk es CPU TYPE H857 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 2 6 es L KKK EAE HEH KFA JE IE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE KEE E E E EE EE include lt no_float h gt include lt stdio h gt include sbrk h const size_t _sbrk_size Specifies the minimum unit of the defined heap area static union long dummy 7 Dummy for 4 byte boundary char heap HEAPSIZE Declaration of the area managed by sbrk jheap_area static char brk char amp heap_area End address of area assigned LEAH HE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE HSE xj gt Figure 1 17 Editor Window The editor window can be customized via the Format Views dialog box which can be invoked via the Tools gt Format Views menu option This dialog allows you to configure fonts colors tabs and so on for the editor window It also allows the
382. tor debugger suspends exception processing displays the generation of the exception processing error and returns to the command wait state 5 Starts instruction execution from the start address If the start address is 0 the simulator debugger stops exception processing displays that an exception processing error has occurred and enters the command input wait state 178 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 7 H8S 2600 CPU Specific Functions MAC Instruction The multiplication accumulation operation MAC instruction can be performed on the H8S 2600 CPU In this instruction a saturation and non saturation operations are selectable The simulator debugger determines the operation with a value of bit 7 hereafter called as the MACS bit in the SYSCR register of internal I O MACS bit 0 Non saturation operation MACS bit 1 Saturation operation EXR Register The EXR register can be used on the H8S 2600 CPU It is also possible to set the enable or disable of this register The simulator debugger determines the operation with a value of bit 5 hereafter called as the EXR bit in the SYSCR register of internal I O EXR bit 0 EXR disabled EXR bit 1 EXR enabled The SYSCR address is set in SYSCR Address in the Simulator System dialog box Note Set the SYSCR address in the internal I O Note that the simulator debugger determines the MACS bit as 0 non saturation and the EXR bit as 0 EXR disabled when the SYSCR add
383. tructions than EEPMOV are not available For details on memory resource setting refer to section 3 3 2 Memory Resource 176 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 5 Instruction Execution Reset Processing The simulator debugger resets the instruction execution counts and the number of instruction execution cycles when e The program counter PC is modified after the instruction simulation stops and before it restarts e The Run command to which the execution start address has been specified is executed e Initialization is performed 177 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 6 Exception Processing The simulator debugger detects the generation of TRAPA instructions H8 300H H8S series only and trace exceptions H8S series only and simulates exception processing Accordingly simulation can be performed even when an exception occurs The simulator debugger simulates exception processing with the following procedures Detects an exception during instruction execution 2 Saves the PC and SR in the stack area EXR is also saved when the enabled bit of EXR is on If an error occurs when saving the simulator debugger suspends exception processing displays the generation of the exception processing error and returns to the command wait state 3 Sets the I bits in CCR to 1 Reads the start address from the vector address corresponding to the vector number If an error occurs when reading the simula
384. ts as Waveforms csccecceseesesseeseeeeceecesceaeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 227 44 1 Opening the Waveform View Window ccceccecessseseeseceeeeeceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneene 227 44 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents ececeseeceeseeseeeeeeeeeseeseeneees 229 4 4 3 Updating the Window Contents eccescescseeeeseeseeseeeceeeeeeeseeaeeaeeeeceeeeaeeaeeaeee 229 44 4 Zoom In Display eeceescscecceseeeeeeseeseeseceecseceeeeaeeseceeseceeceeeeseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeee 229 4 45 Zoom Out Display sivececcasvsecscisesedascvarcstesnesecdaseavcsgesdecccgueageasavsvecccavaneesdsavevccaisene 229 44 6 Resetting the Zoom Display eececcesceseeseceeeeseeseeseeeceeeeeceaeeseeaeeseeeeseeeeaeeaeens 229 44 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification cc eeeseeceesceceeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeceeeeeeeneee 229 44 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale cee eceeceseeseceeeeeeeseeeeseceeeeeceeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 229 4 4 9 Non Display of Cursor ccecesescsssceceeseeeeseceeceeceseeaceaecaeeeeceeeeaeeseeaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 229 44 10 Displaying the Sampling Information cccceeceesceseeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeeeeeaeeaeeneees 229 Viewing the VO Registers ciisocsccitesesacasaoecesteagecocnsecs cestvges NEV 4 5 1 Opening the IO Window 4 5 2 Expanding the I O Register Display ccsceecceseeseeseesecneceeeeeeeaeeseeseeeeceeeeaeeneees 231 4 5 3 Manually loading an IO file ec eeceseeeeeeeeeseeseeseeseceeeceeeeeseceeeeee
385. ual 6 4 5 Prompt before saving workspace In addition to the above check box set this to prompt before saving 6 4 6 Default directory for new workspaces When a new workspace is created the High performance Embedded Workshop invokes the New Workspace dialog One of the fields on this dialog is the directory in which the new workspace will be created By default this is the root directory However if you would like to set this default directory to another location e g C Workspaces then enter the desired directory into the field or browse to it graphically via the Browse button 6 4 7 Prompt before saving session Checking this option will force the High performance Embedded Workshop into displaying a prompt before the session is saved to disk 111 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 6 5 Using an External Editor The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to use an external editor Once an external editor has been specified it will be launched when the following actions are performed Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window e Double clicking on an entry in the Navigation tab of the Workspace window e Double clicking on an error warning in the Build tab of the Output window e Double clicking on an entry in the Find in Files tab of the Output window e Selecting the Open lt file gt option from the Wo
386. uickly and efficiently Double clicking on a navigation item by default jumps you to the associated navigation items definition Normally the definition is found in the source file and the declaration is found in the header file This default behavior can be modified for this action This can be achieved via the configure view dialog The configure view dialog modifies the way data in the navigation view is displayed gt To configure the C navigation views data 1 Right click on a C navigation item in the navigation window The pop up menu displayed in figure 13 2 is shown Select the Configure view menu item The dialog in figure 13 5 is displayed Decide what items you wish to modify and click OK to accept the changes Configure iew xi V Jump to definition on double click Cancel Figure 13 6 C Configure view dialog The following items are available on the configure view dialog e Group by access This option groups the display of public protected and private member variables and functions together in the navigation view 160 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual e Jump to definition on double click By default this option is checked If this option is switched off then a dialog is displayed which asks you where you wish to jump You rather than HEW resolve the ambiguity This dialog is shown in figure 13 6 Select Query Location x Select the query to jump to Go to
387. up menu and select Go to Disassembly to open the Disassembly window at the same address as the current Editor window If you do not have a source file but wish to view code in the assembly language level either choose View gt Disassembly use the Ctrl D accelerator or click on the Disassembly window s toolbar button rsd The Disassembly window opens at the current PC location and shows Address and Code optional which show the disassembled mnemonics with labels when available Disassembly mi x _main 6DF3 HOV W R3 ER7 aj OO000A0E 01206DF4 STM L ER4 ER6 SP O0000A12 79370028 SUB W H 0028 R7 00000416 OD 74 HOV W R R4 00000418 79000001 HOV W H 0001 R0 0000DAIC 5E000CB6 JSR _srand 24 m O0000A20 79001F42 MOY W H 1F42 R0 00000AZ24 6DFO HOV W RO ER 00000426 SEOOOBB4 JSR __printf_lite 24 00000AZ2A OBS ADDS L 2 ER gogggdga2c 1955 SUB W RS R5 oo00gga2E 5E000C80 JSR _rand 24 00000432 17F0 EXTS L ERO OO000A34 OFS86 MOY L ERO ER6 o0000A36 4C02 BGE H OA3A 8 00000438 17B6 NEG L ER6 00000A3A ODS3 HOV W R5 R3 oogggga3C 1053 SHLL W 2 R3 OO000A3E 0943 ADD W R4 R3 00000440 01006956 MOV L ER6 ER3 0000044 OFEO MOV L ER6 ERO 00000446 01006DF0 MOV L ERO ER O0000A4A 6DFS5 HOV W RS ER7 0000O0A4C 79001F56 HOV W H 1F56 R0 00000450 6DF0 MOY W RO ER 00000452 5E000BB4 JSR printf ite 4 gt Figure 4 4 Disassembly Window 215 High perform
388. ure 4 9 shows the split bar button which is located just underneath the maximize button at the top right hand corner of any text window Figure 4 9 Split Bar Button gt To split a window Double click on the split bar button to split the window in half or click on the split bar button keep the button pressed move the mouse down and then release the mouse button at the point you want to split the window gt To adjust the position of the split bar Click on the split bar itself keep the button pressed then move the bar to the new position and then release the button gt To remove the split bar Double click on the split bar or move the split bar to the top or bottom of the window 80 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 10 Configuring Text The following sections detail how to change the appearance of the text displayed in the editor windows 4 10 1 Changing the Editor Font The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to specify the font to be used in its internal editor All editor windows regardless of the file type use the same font gt To change the editor font 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed Select the Source icon in the tree figure 4 10 2 Select the desired font from the Font list 3 Select the size of the font from the Size list 4 Click OK to confirm the new editor settings Format Views Assembly
389. used must be saved In this case the settings can be referred to in the Simulator sheet of the Standard Toolchain dialog box figure 3 12 The Simulator sheet contains the following buttons View Displays the memory map information Add Adds a memory resource Modify Modifies the selected memory resource Remove Removes the selected memory resource Clicking the Add button displays the Add memory resource dialog box figure 3 14 202 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Add memory resource Address Start End 0x10000001 Attribute R 7 Figure 3 14 Add memory resource Dialog Box Specify the following items in the Add memory resource dialog box Start Start address End End address Attribute Attribute R Read only R W Readable Writable The memory resource settings can be changed in the Memory tab of the Simulator System dialog box For details refer to section 4 212 Modifying the Memory Map and Memory Resource Settings Modification of the memory resource information in the Memory tab of the Simulator System dialog box will be reflected in the contents of the Standard Toolchain dialog box and modification in the Standard Toolchain dialog box will be reflected in the Memory tab of the Simulator System dialog box as well 3 3 3 Downloading a Program If there is sufficient memory in the system in which to download your program
390. utines or interrupt routines These are executed at full speed Syntax so lt mode gt lt count gt Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Type of stepping optional instruction Steps by assembly instruction line Step by source code line lt count gt Numeric Number of steps optional default 1 Example SO Steps over 1 step code 357 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 69 STEP_RATE Abbreviation SR Description Controls the speed of stepping in the STEP and STEP_OVER commands A rate of 6 causes the fastest stepping A value of 0 is the slowest Syntax sr lt rate gt Parameter Type Description none Displays the step rate lt rate gt Numeric Step rate 0 to 6 6 fastest Examples SR Displays the current step rate SR 6 Specifies the fastest step rate 5 70 SUBMIT Abbreviation SU Description Executes a file of emulator commands This command can be used even in a command file to be processed Any error aborts the file Syntax su lt filename gt Parameter Type Description lt filename gt Character File name string Examples SUBMIT COMMAND HDC Processes the file COMMAND HDC SU A SETUP TXT Processes the file SETUP TXT on drive A 5 71 SYMBOL_ADD Abbreviation SA Description Adds a symbol or changes an existing one 358 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Syntax sa lt symbol gt lt value gt
391. vailable amp 1 gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt amp amp ll Buffer_start 0x1000 R1 B 10001101 pointer 2 increment_size amp H FFFF0000 gt gt D 15 flag ER4 4 10 2 C C Expressions Expression Examples Object value Specifies direct reference of a member C C p_Object gt value Specifies indirect reference of a member C C Class value Specifies reference of a member with class C value Specifies a pointer C C amp value Specifies a reference C C array 0 Specifies an array C C Object value Specifies reference of a member with pointer C g_value Specifies reference of a global variable C C Class function short Specifies a member function C struct STR value Specifies cast operation C C 244 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 10 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels In some languages for example C overloaded functions a label may represent more than one address When such a label name is entered in a dialog box the HEW will display the Select Function dialog box to display overloaded functions and member functions Select Function x Select Function Name Set Function Name Sample Func long char Sample Func long char int Differ Func short char Differ Func long char Sample Func short char lt lt PELE Counter k Fun
392. ve files from a project 1 Select Project gt Remove Files or select Remove Files from the Projects tab s pop up menu in the Workspace window see figure 2 5 The Remove Project Files dialog will be displayed figure 2 6 Figure 2 5 Projects Tab Pop up Menu Remove Project Files e Shew demo demo c Shew demo demo fesetprg stc e hew demo demo sbrk c e hew demo demo stacksct stc e Shew demo demo vecttbl src e hew demo demo Figure 2 6 Remove Project Files Dialog 17 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 Select the file or files which you want to remove from the Project files list 3 Click the Remove button to remove the selected files or click Remove All to remove all project files 4 Click OK to remove the files from the project gt To remove selected files from a project 1 Select the files which you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple files can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Press the DEL key The files will be removed 18 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 2 2 3 Excluding a Project File from Build A file in a project can be individually excluded from build on a configuration by configuration basis gt To exclude a file in a project from build 1 Push the right mouse button on a file which you want to be excluded fr
393. ve files that you have opened and adds them to the file menu under the Recent Files sub menu This gives you a shortcut to opening files which you have used recently gt To open a recently used file Select the File gt Recent Files menu option and from this sub menu select the desired file You can also open a file via the Projects tab of the Workspace window Either double click the file you want to open or select it click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu and then choose the Open lt file gt menu option where lt file gt is the name of the file selected 70 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 3 5 Closing Files gt To close individual files select one of the following methods 1 Double click on the editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window when not maximized 2 Click on the editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window when not maximized and select the Close menu option 3 Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then press CTRL F4 4 Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then select File gt Close 5 Click on the close button located at the top right of each window when not maximized gt To close all windows at once Select Window gt Close All 71 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 4 Editing a File The High performan
394. vioccenieess 238 4 7 3 Choosing a Register to be Displayed 0 0 eee esceeeseceeescseeeeeesesetaeeeeseteeees 238 4 74 Splitting Up the Window Display ccsceceececeeseeteesecseeeeceeeeaeeseeseeeeeeeeeaeeneeas 239 4 7 5 Modifying Register Contents i asriar rrp aria 239 4 7 6 Using Register Contents ccecsceecceseeseeseeseceeceecesceacesecseeeeeeaeeseeaeeseeeceeeeeeeaeees 239 Executing Your Program soi ocessevcaxcessvcugcshovuessvorsuaccosevansvesveascersvaaesteteavousneuessevstuniecsvonne 239 4 8 1 VRumnitig from RESE bouee rtta reo ta E EEEE AEA E EEEE E 239 48 27 Con nyine Rul sae nnn E EEE 240 48 3 Running to the C r a Ee ETE N E E RS 240 4 8 4 Running from a Specified Address 0 0 cceceeceeseeseeseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeseeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 240 48S Single Steps casclesascsscascastevivcscescescancvvevssvesdscsasascevsianctatsazessasvesseveisisesassarssentsusevranss 241 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 8 6 Stepping Into a Function 4 8 7 Stepping Over a Function Call 4 8 8 Stepping Out of a Function 4 8 9 Multiple Steps ee 241 4 8 10 Executing Multiple Targets 242 Stopping Your Program 4 242 4 9 1 Halting Execution 4 9 2 Standard Breakpoints PC Breakpoints 242 Elf Dwarf2 Supports sessios seseo aara erore EEK NEI ESENE ESEESE SETETE ONEI ERE RENERE 244 4101 C CP Operators ioina EA EAEE EEEE
395. wer_bitfields Register name Address Size Absolute address flag Format drnawer_bitfields bito WEOA biti WWEOB bit2 WE1A bit3 WWE1B Bitfields Definition 380 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Appendix E Symbol File Format In order for HEW to be able to understand and decode the symbol file correctly the file must be formatted as a Pentica B file 1 The file must be a plain ASCII text file 2 The file must start with the word BEGIN 3 Each symbol must be on a separate line with the value first in hexadecimal terminated by an H followed by a space then the symbol text 4 The file must end with the word END Example BEGIN 11FAH Symbol_name_1 11FCH Symbol_name_2 11FEH Symbol_name_3 1200H Symbol_name_4 END 381 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 382 H8S H8 300 Series High performance Embedded Workshop 3 User s Manual Publication Date Rev 1 00 July 3 2003 Published by Sales Strategic Planning Div Renesas Technology Corp Edited by Technical Documentation amp Information Department Renesas Kodaira Semiconductor Co Ltd 2003 Renesas Technology Corp All rights reserved Printed in Japan H8S H8 300 Series High performance Embedded Workshop 3 User s Manual 2rPENESAS Renesas Technology Corp 2 6 2 Ote machi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0004 Japan REJ10B0026 0100H
396. wish to stop by either clicking in the Address field or using the cursor keys 3 Choose Go To Cursor from the pop up menu The debugging platform will run your code from the current PC value until it reaches the address indicated by the cursor s position Notes 1 If your program never executes the code at this address the program will not stop If this happens code execution can be stopped by pressing the Esc key choosing Debug gt Halt or clicking on the Halt toolbar button 2 The Go To Cursor feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 4 8 4 Running from a Specified Address The Run Program dialog box allows the user to run the program from any address Choose Debug gt Run to open the Run Program dialog box Run Program s Program Counter H oo000000 Temporary PC Breakpoints Reset Go Cancel i Figure 4 36 Run Program Dialog Box 240 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual The following execution conditions can be specified in this dialog box Program Counter Instruction address to start execution The initial value is the current PC value Temporary PC Breakpoints A temporary PC breakpoint When execution started by this dialog box stops this breakpoint is cleared Note The Temporary PC Breakpoints feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then
397. y the number of trigger buttons displayed in the Trigger window in the Number of Buttons submenu in the pop up menu 4 16 64 or 256 can be selected 285 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 4 20 3 Changing the Size of Trigger Buttons Specify the size of trigger buttons displayed in the Trigger window in the Size submenu in the pop up menu Large Normal or Small can be selected 4 21 Modifying the Simulator Debugger Settings This section describes how to modify the simulator system memory map and memory resource settings after the simulator debugger is started 4 21 1 Modifying the Simulator System The System tab in the Simulator System dialog box modifies the system call start location execution mode and floating point rounding mode Choose Options gt Simulator gt System or click the Simulator System toolbar button w to open the System tab in this dialog box Simulator System H8S 26004 24 H 00000000 40000 Figure 4 86 Simulator System Dialog Box System Tab The following items can be specified in this dialog box CPU Displays the current CPU The CPU must be specified in the Debug Settings dialog box Data Area Bit size Specifies the number of bits in the data space The following values can be set in each CPU H8 300 H8 300L H8 300HN and H8S 2600N 16 H8S 2000N H8 300HA 17 to 24 H8S 2600A and H8S 2000A 17
398. y you can change this name to another 8 The tree underneath the Project name field shows the structure of the database specified in step 6 Select the folder into which you would like to create the folder specified in the Project name field 9 Click OK 10 HEW will require you to repeat steps 7 9 for as many projects as are present in the current workspace SourceSafe Login 24 x Username Password _Cancel Database path Browse Figure 9 1 SourceSafe Login Dialog 139 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual Create SourceSafe Project 2 xi Project name proiect Cancel project Baas agip ariel E bp commit E def x Figure 9 2 Create SourceSafe Project The HEW has now created the necessary projects within Visual SourceSafe and sets up the version control toolbar and menu for immediate access However although the Visual SourceSafe projects themselves have been created no files have been added to them 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe The previous section has only established the mappings between the project directory on your hard disk i e the working directory and the project directory in Visual SourceSafe i e the controlled directory Although the project directory and any subdirectories on your hard disk may contain many source files whereas the directly its mapped to in Visual SourceSafe will be initially empty Firstly y
399. you can then proceed to download a program to debug By default the program output from the linker of the current project is automatically downloaded It is also possible to manually choose the download modules after the project creation This is achieved via the Debug Settings dialog box shown in figure 3 16 This dialog box allows you to control the debug settings throughout your workspace The tree on the left of the dialog box contains all of the current projects Selecting a project in this tree will then show you the settings for that project and the session selection in the session drop down list Multiple sessions or all sessions in this list box can be selected If you select multiple sessions you can choose to modify the settings for one or more sessions at once The Debug Settings dialog box displays the following debug options e Current debug target for the current project and session selection e Download modules for the current project and session selection The download module list displays the order in which the files will be downloaded to the target It is possible to add remove modify move up and move down modules in this list gt To add a new download module 1 Select Options gt Debug Settings The dialog box shown in figure 3 16 will be displayed 2 Select the project and configurations you are interested in adding a download module to in tree control 3 Click the Add button The dialog box displayed i
400. yword Clears all trace records optional clear Clears all trace records Note When a negative value is specified for lt start rec gt 0 cannot be specified the value is recognized as a PTR value Examples TR 0 20 Displays twenty lines of trace buffer contents starting from the top of the buffer TR Displays ten lines of trace buffer contents starting from the end of the buffer the ten most recently executed lines TR 20 10 Displays trace buffer contents for which the PTR value is between 20 and 11 TRC Clears all trace records 362 High performance Embedded Workshop User s Manual 5 78 TRACE ACQUISITION Abbreviation TA Description Enables or disables trace information acquisition Syntax ta lt mode gt lt trace full handling gt lt trace capacity gt Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables trace information acquisition E Trace information acquisition is enabled D Trace information acquisition is disabled lt trace full Keyword Specifies the operation when the trace buffer becomes full handling gt C Continues operation default B Stops operation lt trace capacity gt Keyword Specifies the capacity of the trace buffer BUF 1 D 1024 records default BUF 4 D 4096 records BUF 16 D 16384 records BUF 32 D 32768 records Note The capacity of the trace buffer can be modified only while the trace buffer is empty Examples TRAC

H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop 3

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents